JP6646232B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of storing winning information of a small role, a replay, and a special role .

2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine , a gaming machine that performs a lottery of a small combination, a replay, and a special combination is known (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2014-150881 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to reduce the use of storage means such as a ROM in a gaming machine capable of storing winning information of small wins, replays, and special wins .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means. Note that the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is indicated by parentheses.
The present invention (sixteenth embodiment)
A winning number determining means capable of determining a winning number (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination process in FIG. 88);
Winning number determining means for determining whether or not the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is less than N (N is a value of 2 or more) (N = “31”) (the processing of step S1041 in FIG. 89) When,
A first storage unit (winning and replay condition device number storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” on the RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a small role or a replay;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the accessory condition device number on the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special combination,
A situation in which the winning information of the special role is not stored in the second storage means (when the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the character condition apparatus number on the RWM 53 is “0” (when the special condition apparatus has not been won) )), In the game in which a predetermined winning number (winning number “1” to “30”) smaller than N is determined by the winning number determining means, the predetermined winning number is less than N by the winning number determining means. After determining whether or not it is the winning number, the determined predetermined winning number can be stored in the first storage means,
In a situation where the winning information of the special role is not stored in the second storage means, the winning number determining means determines a specific winning number not less than N (winning numbers "31" to "33", "34" to "36", In the game in which “43” to “45”, “48” to “50”) are determined, after the winning number determination means determines whether or not the specific winning number is a winning number less than N, the specific number is determined. The first information (accessory condition device number) and the second information (small role) are obtained by a predetermined calculation process using the winning number (the process of step S1042 (the process of acquiring the condition device number from the winning number) in FIG. 89). And the replay condition device number), the obtained first information can be stored in the first storage means, the obtained second information can be stored in the second storage means,
In a situation where the winning information of the special combination is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined arithmetic processing is not executed in a game in which the winning number less than N is determined by the winning number determining means .

According to the present invention, in a game in which a predetermined winning number that is less than N is determined by the winning number determining means, the determined predetermined winning number can be stored in the first storage means as winning information of a small role or a replay.
For this reason, there is no need to have a data table that defines the correspondence between the predetermined winning number that is less than N and the winning information of the small role or the replay. Since there is no need to perform a process of converting the information into the winning information, the process can be simplified, and the amount of storage means such as a ROM using a program or a data table can be reduced .

FIG. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows a storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, an acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. 6A and 6B are diagrams illustrating a main control board accommodated in a board case, wherein FIG. 7A illustrates Example 1 and FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 4 is a view showing a display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, a positional relationship between reels, an effective line, and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the payout number, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the pressing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure showing a pushing order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of a push order instruction number, an advantageous push order, and a display content. It is a figure showing an effect group number table. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the transition of RT. It is a figure showing a lighting process of an advantageous section display LED. 6 is a timing chart (Examples 1 and 2) showing a processing flow of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the push order instruction | indication information by the acquisition number display LED, and notification of the correct answer push order by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding an advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the total number of payouts. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory. It is a figure (modification example) which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the frequency | count of a game etc. using a register. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the frequency | count of a game etc., without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the calculation processing of an advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining information displayed on a management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure showing an example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a base unit 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a main control board housed in a board case according to the second embodiment, in which (a) illustrates Example 1 and (b) illustrates Example 2. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 1) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 2) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 3) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 4) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 5) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 6) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 7) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 8) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (Example 9) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing (example 10) on the main control board side in a 3rd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 1) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 2) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of an image display (example 1-example 4) of an image display device by a sub control board about addition in AT (third embodiment). It is a figure explaining increase of the number of AT games, change of production, etc. in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of an external signal in a 4th embodiment. 14 is a time chart (example 3) of an external signal in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing RT shift in example 1 of a 5th embodiment. 15 is a time chart showing a relationship between an RT shift and an AT in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing example 2 ((a)-(c)) of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing RT shift in a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of replay D group drawn by RT3 in a 6th embodiment, a winning combination, and the pressing order and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows example 1 and example 2 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 3 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 4 and example 5 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in a 9th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of an 11th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of an 11th embodiment. 30 is a time chart illustrating an ending effect and the like in a twelfth embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (2) of a 13th embodiment. 30 is a time chart showing an extension of an advantageous section in a fourteenth embodiment. 30 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an advantageous section and a freeze in a fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (1) in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a), (b) showing Example 1 and (c) showing Example 2 , (D) shows Example 3, and (e) shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number conversion in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows Example 3, (e) ) Shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the description of "DEFB", (c) shows Example 1, and (d) shows Example 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number lottery data definition in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (1) in a 16th embodiment. FIG. 80 is a view illustrating an all RT common lottery table (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (3) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 80. (A) is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (4) in 16th Embodiment, It is a figure following FIG. 81, (b) is a figure which shows the non-RT time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 40C is a diagram showing an RT1 lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT2 lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the RT3 lottery table in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT4 time lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 1BBA time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the 1BBB lottery table in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device numbers etc. in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of internal lottery 1 in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of lottery judgment in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of condition device number set 1 in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of a condition device number etc. in a modification of a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing at the time of all the reels stop in a modification of a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 2 in the modification of a 16th embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (3) in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows the example 1, (c) shows the example 2, (d) shows the winning number conversion data definition. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows the example 1, (c) shows the example 2, (d) shows the all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (6) in the seventeenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 94 (d). FIG. 95 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (7) in the seventeenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 95. (A) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 1, (c) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 2, (D) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 3, (e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and (f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device numbers etc. in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 3 in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of two-step lottery in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the processing of the lottery without a setting difference in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 4 in the modification of a 17th embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number lottery data definition in 18th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (8) in an 18th embodiment. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating the all RT common lottery table (9) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is a diagram following FIG. 105. FIG. 107 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (10) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is subsequent to FIG. 106. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating the all RT common lottery table (11) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is a diagram following FIG. 107. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition equipment numbers etc. in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of an advantageous section number acquisition in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 5 in an 18th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing winning number conversion and advantageous section shift determination data definition, and (c) is Example 1. , (D) show Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (12) in a 19th embodiment. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (13) in the nineteenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 114. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (14) in the nineteenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 115. (A) is a figure which shows the advantage area shift determination random number table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows the description of "DEFW", (c) shows example 1, (d) shows example 2 . It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device number etc. in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of internal lottery 2 in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 6 in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of an advantageous section shift lottery in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 7 in the modification of a 19th embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replay, small role) to be drawn and the winning probability are in a unique lottery state. The transition from RT to another RT means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be drawn is changed. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay at one RT is a value unique to that RT, and it is impossible for one RT and another RT to have the same winning probability for each type of replay. Absent. However, the sum of the replay winning probabilities may be the same for one RT and another RT.

The RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in the present embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.
In this embodiment, the non-internal portion is set to non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal portion is set to RT4. The type (number) of replays to be drawn and the winning probability differ between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during the special game. In the present embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed in both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The "role" means a target of a lottery. In the present embodiment, a condition device is randomly selected, and the condition device is set to include at least one role. Therefore, when any of the condition devices is won, at least one role is won (there is at least one winning role).

The condition devices selected by lottery include an "accessory condition device" that includes any of the "special roles (accessories)" and a "winning and replay condition device" that includes either the small role or the replay. .
The “accessory condition device” includes any of special combinations. When a special role is won, SB (single bonus), RB (first-class special role; regular bonus), CB (second-class special role; challenge bonus), which are devices for facilitating winning of the small role, 1BB (a first-type continuous actor; first-type big bonus) and 2BB (a second-type continuous actor; second-big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operation device (1BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the second-class special item continuous operating device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the second special-purpose item (CB).
In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special combination, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either one of two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the ending condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
In this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the “winning and replay condition device” includes either a small role or a replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the “accessory condition device” includes any of RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, and any of SB and CB that does not carry the winning information after the next game. In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry the winning information after the next game is provided.

When the winning information is won for the special equipment condition device that includes one of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game, the special role winning information until the symbol combination corresponding to that special role stops on the activated line Carry over to the next game.
Then, a game that has not won the bonus information condition device including any of the special roles that can carry the winning information after the next game is referred to as “non-internal”. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected special role has not yet stopped on the activated line, that is, when the winning combination of the special role has been carried over, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is “inside”. That. In the present embodiment, the game that has won the accessory condition apparatus is included in “non-inside”, but the game that has won the accessory condition apparatus may be included in “inside”.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch means an operation mode in which a player with a large number of payouts wins in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage occurs in a game result (combination of symbols stopped on an active line) by an operation mode of the stop switch, Or, an operation mode in which a hand that does not shift (promote) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the order of pressing the stop switches and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the active line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game at the time of winning the pressing order bell (small win B group, small win C group), overlapping replay (replay B group, replay C group) ) Equivalent to the game at the time of winning.

Further, at the time of winning the push order bell, when the stop switch is operated in the correct answer push order, the bell (small role) to be won is changed to the higher-level bell (of the bell group (small role group) which has been repeatedly won, the payout number is smaller). There is a case in which displaying the combination of symbols such as the most small combinations is called a bell (small combination) which is most advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong push order when the push order bell is won, there are a case where the cheaper bell wins and a case where the role is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, a stop appearance (combination of symbols on an active line; also referred to as a "spill eye") displayed when a role is missed is referred to as a "pattern symbol" and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, at the time of the replay overlap winning (winning of the replay B group and the replay C group), different symbol combinations are stopped and displayed in accordance with the pressing order of the stop switch. )).
In this case, the push order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shift to RT with a higher replay winning probability or the combination of symbols that maintain RT with higher replay winning probability, is set to “correct answer”. Push order "or" promotion push order ".
On the other hand, the push order in which the symbol combination that shifts from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, an RT with a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, an RT with a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed as “incorrect” Push order "or" fall (demotion) push order ".

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the "pointing function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning of a small role, the “instruction function” displays a correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (higher-level bell) when the pressing order bell is won. It does not include displaying a correct answering order for winning an advantageous replay (replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of replay overlapping winning.

In the following embodiments, the “instruction function” refers to a function of displaying “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and the “instruction function activation” refers to displaying the correct push order when the push order bell is won. , And displaying the correct push order for winning an advantageous replay at the time of replay overlap winning.
Showing the "instruction" content to the player is "display", and notifying the player of the instruction content is "notification". Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
The “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player for not complying with the “instruction”. However, if the correct push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the higher order bell may not be won when the push order bell is won, or an unfavorable replay may be won when the replay is repeatedly won.

The “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (a small role group B, a small role group C, a replay B group, a replay C group). In the game) won in the group), the game in which the instruction function is activated is meant. For this reason, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may also be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not operated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” refers to a signal relating to an instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining a correct answer pressing order), which will be described later. This is a game section in which transmission to the substrate is prohibited and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (does not activate the instruction function). However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (role), it is possible to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section (lottery or the like).
In the normal section, since the indicating function must not be operated, it is not possible to display the pressing order indicating information on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board described later.

When making a decision to shift to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association (linking) with the winning condition device.
Here, the decision to shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device means that the lottery of the condition device is determined at the same time as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and that the specific condition device is won. , A lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is separately performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is set so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device. In addition, the length of the advantageous section to be determined (winned) (the number of games) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB described later is won, an initial section is counted from the end of the 1BB game and becomes an advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small section E1 alone is won. When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, there may be an advantageous section in which only one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role group C, the replay B group, and the replay C group) is executed. is there.

Furthermore, in determining transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition apparatus, a condition apparatus that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section (separately, when performing a lottery to determine whether to transition to the advantageous section, , A condition device serving as a condition for performing a lottery) is set so as to be a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability.
Here, the "set value" is to determine the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the expected value of the payout is, the higher the set value is). ) Is set. The setting values are provided, for example, in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6.
The “condition device that has no difference in winning probability (setting common)” indicates a condition device in which the winning probability is the same in all settings.

  In addition, it is only `` possible '' to determine the shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability. This does not mean that it is necessary to always make a transition to an advantageous section or to always perform a lottery for transition to an advantageous section. Of course, even when the condition apparatus having no difference in the winning probability is won, it is of course possible to make no decision regarding the advantageous section.

  On the other hand, "a condition device having a setting difference in the winning probabilities (for each setting)" indicates that the winning probabilities are not the same in all settings. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, the case where the winning probabilities of some setting values are different from the winning probabilities of some other setting values (for example, the winning probabilities of the settings 1 to 5). Is “x” and the winning probability of the setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”, etc.).

Further, the “advantageous section” is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board. The game in the advantageous section may be referred to as a reportable game. Conversely, a game in the normal section or a game in the standby section may be referred to as an unreportable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an effect contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

  Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game in which the instruction function operation game can be executed (when the accessory is not operated) can be obtained. In a game that has been won in the condition device (group of small wins B) having an advantageous operation mode, at least one or more games are instructed to indicate the operation mode of the stop switch in which the role (small win 01) relating to the maximum payout number wins. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small win B group and a small win C group are provided as a so-called push order bell condition device.
In the small win B group, a small win 01, which is a nine-prize win, always wins when the push order is correct, and a single win wins (may be missed) when the push win is incorrect.
On the other hand, in the small win C group, the small win 02, which is the three-prong win, always wins when the push order is correct, and the one win always wins when the push win is incorrect.

The game at the time of executing the instruction function operation game is when the accessory is not operated (normal game), and the prescribed number (the number of medals to be inserted) in the normal game is “3”.
Further, when the prescribed number is “3”, the maximum payout number is “9” (at the time of winning the small role 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small win B group) in which the small win 01 can win, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small win 01 is determined. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game that has won the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is a condition device having an advantageous operation mode in the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the transition may be made from the normal section to the advantageous section, or from the normal section to the standby section, and further from this standby section to the advantageous section. Note that the transition from the advantageous section to the standby section cannot be performed, and the transition always to the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. The standby section can be shifted only when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special role. In the game in which the symbol combination is displayed, the game must be completed. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Also, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the instruction function on the main control board or transmit a signal relating to the instruction function to the sub-control board. In the case where the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal relating to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, one execution of the instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) and a case of executing a predetermined number of games Having.
In the advantageous section in which the predetermined number of games are executed, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
In addition, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but, for example, to perform an end (punk) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to terminate the advantageous section when the lottery is won. You may.

Alternatively, simply shifting to the advantageous section does not satisfy the execution condition of the instruction function operation game, and determines whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game by lottery or the like on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, When it is determined to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game may be executed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, a determination (a lottery or the like) is made as to whether to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always ended at that time even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is reached (limiter). Operation), and shifts to the normal section.

  Furthermore, when the maximum number of games has been reached, the condition device (small win B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number ("9") is not or has not been won. Even if the player (small win 01) related to the maximum payout number has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section always ends at that time (limiter operation), and the normal Move to the section.

As described above, although the contents partially overlap with the above, the advantageous sections in the present embodiment are determined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even when it is determined simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device) must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section must not differ according to the set value.
b) Additional lottery in an advantageous section (even when determined without performing lottery) must not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on a winning condition device, it must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference.

c) Special role in a normal section (meaning a special role that carries over the winning. The same applies in this paragraph.) During the inside of the special section or during the operation of the special role, the lottery of the transition to the advantageous section (may be determined simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device). ) Must not be performed. In addition, during the special combination, even in the advantageous section, the additional lottery of the advantageous section (may be determined without performing the lottery) must not be performed. Furthermore, if a special device is included in the advantageous section and the condition device having a setting difference is won and the special role is activated, the additional lottery of the advantageous section is performed during the operation of the special role (to be determined without performing the lottery). Also do not).
Here, conventionally, it is common to perform an AT lottery even after the inside is completed, so even if the inside is performed, the player waits for the AT win while maintaining the inside without receiving a special role. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable not to carry out the lottery of the AT inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that when a special role is won in the normal section and the inside is inside, it is not allowed to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the inside. In addition, if a special role is won during an advantageous section and the inside becomes inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous section must not be added inside the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the game is shifted from the next game to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, the bet for the next game is possible). ), It is necessary to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that the section is an advantageous section).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to exhaust a certain number of games (via a precursor) from when the AT is won to when the player is notified of the AT winning. Was. Also, for example, in the case of drawing an AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the player loses the rare role in the game, the player wins the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. Therefore, even if the player has won the AT by winning the rare role, the game may be stopped before the AT winning is notified. Thereafter, when another player plays the game on the platform, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (allocated by the previous player). However, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the fact that the next game is an advantageous section is displayed until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game can be bet) in principle. Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, in the related art, the AT winning is notified after the winning of the AT (particularly, after passing through the AT precursor), but in the present embodiment, in principle, the betting of the next game is possible. , In that the display indicates that the section is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Further, the conventional AT winning notification is merely performed as a part of the effect, but is displayed to the player as an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp indicating that the section is an advantageous section). Lighting) is performed in order to solve the above-described problem.

The advantageous section ratio refers to a ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (normal section + standby section + advantaged section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section therebetween is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
As will be described later, the advantageous section ratio is displayed in the present embodiment, and the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by performing a calculation and rounding down decimal places.

The pull-in rate (PB) is a probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line from the moment when the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the active line (up to the active line). Inability to perform the pull-in) is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) 率 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), it is described that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) on the active line (PB). = 1 ".

"PB = 1" has a case where the role is such that all reels are so, and a case where it is so only for a specific (part of) reel.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1”, and exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1” is obtained. In particular, the number of symbols on the reel of this embodiment is set to “20”, and if four symbols are arranged at five symbol intervals, the symbol becomes “PB = 1”.

In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game items, “N” game items, “N + 1” game items,... When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game eye is referred to as “this game”. Also, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” th game is referred to as “next game”.

The payout rate is a value calculated from the expected value of the number of tokens to be paid out / the number of inserted medals. When the number is “1”, the current state is maintained, and when the number exceeds “1”, the number of medals increases. In this state, when the value is less than “1”, the number of medals decreases.
Further, the “medal payout expected number” is calculated by the sum of “winning probability of winning times × number of payouts” for all of the winning combinations in the game.

  Furthermore, the “difference number” is a value calculated by “medal payout number (actually paid out medal number or expected medal payout number) −medal insertion number”. When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, The difference number exceeds “0”, and when the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number becomes less than “0”.

"Bet" means to bet a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to three when the accessory is not operated (during normal game). On the other hand, during the operation of the accessory (1BB), the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to two. In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is cared in from a medal insertion slot, or a bet switch is operated to bet a stored medal.
Note that the “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but, for example, in the case of an enclosed game machine, electronic information is used as a game medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknote) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by a gaming machine. Can be stored in a gaming machine as a game medium for performing the game.
In addition, the display of the accessory ratio and the like described later can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to a ball-and-ball game machine. Therefore, the “game medium” includes not only medals but also game balls. It is.

  “Storing” is different from the above “betting” and means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10. The term “storage” may be used in a sense including a bet, but in the present specification, the term “storage” is used in a sense that does not include a “bet”. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the game state or the like. When a small part wins and medals are paid out, medals are stored. In addition, when the medals are maintained and inserted through the medal insertion slot, if the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when a medal is care-inserted from the medal insertion slot, there is a case where a bet is placed and a case where the bet is stored.

  Note that "paying out" a medal to the player by the slot machine 10 and "acquiring" a medal by the player are equivalent. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10 side, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player side, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, there is a case where it is referred to as "payout (number)" (for example, the payout means 67) and a case where it is referred to as "acquisition (number)" (for example, the acquired number display LED 78), both of which have the same meaning.

In this specification, a numerical value suffixed with “B” at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value suffixed with "H" means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in binary, and is expressed as “10 (H)” in hexadecimal. Numerical values indicating decimal numbers are described as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of a binary number, a decimal number, and a hexadecimal number, the suffixes of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (this does not mean that only the one shown in FIG. 1 is provided).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and a peripheral device for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection for inputting a signal from an operation switch or the like, and the output port 52 is a connection for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow whose signal from the peripheral device is directed to the main control board 50, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow directed from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary to display management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50 and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. And the like.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, and the like) are provided.

The MPU including the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the registers is mounted on the main control board 50. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally, in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 43, the medal is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening. I do. On the other hand, when the insertion of the medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped and the winning of the combination is completed) during the game, the insertion of the medal is not permitted. I do. That is, the blocker 45 permits medal insertion at least when a game is not played.

  Further on the downstream side of the blocker 45, an input sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch 46. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or prescribed number) medals are provided.
The present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  The prescribed number of the present embodiment is set to three when the accessory is not activated and two when the accessory is activated. However, if the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, two medals will be given. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during the operation of the accessory, two medals (specified number) can be inserted at a time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that, in actuality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

  On the display board 75, a stored number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided near operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 are provided as in display substrates 75A, 75B,. , Any one of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the stored number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquired number display LED 78, the adjustment switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
In FIG. 2, a display board 75 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is disposed below the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquisition number display LED 78 and inside the slot machine 10. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and includes a digit 1 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying a lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, in particular, is constituted by a seven segment LED (so-called 7 segment) and a segment DP (decimal point; a dot LED for displaying a decimal point). Have been.
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4. In the present embodiment, the digit has nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. 60 (the details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” to “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are bet or stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is serviced, the one medal is bet for the game. When two additional coins are inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. If medals are further maintained, medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored cards reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if medals are provisioned through the medal insertion slot 43, the medals prepared by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout port.

  Here, when a role with a medal payout (excluding replay) wins and a medal corresponding to the role is paid out, priority is given to the fact that the medal is actually paid out from the payout port, and the medal is paid out inside the slot machine 10. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored coins before winning is "10", when the winning of nine coins wins, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

  Furthermore, when the number of stored pieces exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning, the portion exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored coins is “47” before the winning of the role, and nine medals are paid out by the winning of the nine role, three are stored and the stored number becomes “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout port.

  Further, at the time of winning the replay, medals are not stored and paid out, and the medals of the number betted in the game are automatically betted for the replay. For example, when the game is performed with three bets (three) and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing a replay, even if a settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medal cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules on Approval of Gaming Machines and Verification of Type” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “rules”), when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay stops on the activated line, the condition device related to the replay is It is interpreted as an operation and not a "winning". However, in the present application (the present specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replaying winning combination), and the stop of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay on the activated line is referred to as “replay winning”.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by a segment DP of digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be turned on during the advantageous section. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by checking the lighting / off state of the advantageous section display LED 77.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located near the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has a stored medal (for example, when “10” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46. The fact that the vehicle is not in the advantageous section can be easily confirmed by turning off the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable in principle. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the will of the player despite the fact that it is during the advantageous section (or the next game from the advantageous section).

Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays an upper digit and a digit 4 that displays a lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits, similarly to the stored number display LED 76.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is “00”. For example, when nine medals to be described later win and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes: From "00" to "09".
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the acquired number display LED 78 displays an error number “dE”.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquired number, the content of the error, and the advantageous operation mode by the operation of the instruction function. The notification of the advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is operated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of an instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is “notification of the pressing order”. Called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Further, information indicating the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the indicating function, such as “= 1” in FIG. 20, is referred to as “push order indicating information”. That is, by the operation of the indicating function, the pressing order indicating information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed and sealed in a transparent board case 16 due to its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed (the board case 16 cannot be opened). In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50 </ b> A and 50 </ b> B) are shown so as to be seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. Note that the caulked portion 16a may be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers indicating the certification of the proper main control board 50, the serial number, the opening record of the caulking portion 16a, and the like are affixed, but the view may be obstructed by the seals. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on main control board 50 so as not to exist.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which is an LED for displaying a current set value at the time of setting confirmation or setting change. Note that the set value display LED 73 does not necessarily need to be mounted on the main control board 50, and may be used, for example, on the back side of the front door, or as the stored number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. The management information display LED 74 is provided, for example, per one digit housing in FIG.
It is preferable to design the width m1 × the height n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design the width m2 × the height n 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), the number of the main control board 50 is one, but the number is not limited to this, and as in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. Alternatively, each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the entire board in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B, and a connector is provided on each of the main control boards 50A and 50B, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector capable of directly connecting the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and a harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42 (b) described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, while the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board on which the management information display LED 74 is mounted.

  Further, the management information display LEDs 74 are arranged such that, for example, digits 6 and 7 are arranged in an upper row, as in Example 2 of FIG. , And digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven) constitute a so-called seven-segment. .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in digit 1, segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is unused.
In the digit 2, the segments A to G constitute the lower 7 digits of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, each of the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes the upper 7 digits and lower 7 digits of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

  Further, of the digit 5, the segments A to G constitute the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED which is turned on during the setting change. That is, when only the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73 is lit, the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7-segment and the segment DP are lit, the setting is being changed. Note that the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that is turned on when the set value is determined during the setting change.

  The segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 in the management information. Segments DP of digits 6 to 9 are unused. However, when turning on the management information display LED 74, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Also, by lighting the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundaries between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and the confirmation can be facilitated.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of the segment data. For example, when "0" is displayed in digit 1, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".
Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 2 and during the advantageous section, the segments B, C, and DP are turned on, so that the segment data is "100000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (eighth bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to “0” or “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thus, by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of digit 2 is “0” or “1”, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the respective reels 31, and reel sensors 33 for detecting the positions of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reel 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. When the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel 31 has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been serviced and received from the medal insertion slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “chute portion”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the one payout sensor 37. Have been. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medal has been correctly paid out.

For example, if the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that medals have not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal clog has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated clockwise (90 degrees) to the right, and is turned on when a setting is confirmed or a setting is changed.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing the set value. For example, each time the operation is performed once during the setting change, the set value is incremented by “1”. In the present embodiment, the setting values are from setting 1 to setting 6. During setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is changed from “1” → “2” →. Switches from "1" to. During the setting change, any one of the set values is displayed. When the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is determined.

When the power switch 11 is turned on while the reset switch 14 is turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects an open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, and the like) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating an error occurring in the slot machine 10 or occurrence of power interruption, and an opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, a sub control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected. The information (control command) necessary for the output of the effect is transmitted.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to the parallel communication, but may be the serial communication, and the serial communication and the parallel communication may be used together.

The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
The following peripheral devices such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for the effect are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores, as effect data, a program for performing a lottery relating to the effect, various data, and the like.

  The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs or the like, and are turned on in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 21 includes a back lamp and a reel 31 arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 to illuminate the symbols (three symbols vertically continuous from the display window 17) displayed on the reel 31 from behind. , A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the symbol on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp that is arranged on the front face of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. The game information (such as the number of games played and the number of acquired games during the operation of the accessory and in the advantageous section) and the like are displayed.
The cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code which is a game history of the player), and to change various settings by a hall manager (store manager, etc.). It is used when doing.

Subsequently, a combination of symbols, a combination of symbols, and the like of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the present embodiment. FIG. 5 also shows the symbol numbers. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the drawing, “blank” does not mean that no symbol is displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to “blank” is displayed.
“Bell A”, “Bell B”, and “Bell C” have similar appearances, but are different from each other.

FIG. 6A shows a display window (transparent window) 17 provided on a front door (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, the positional relationship between the reels 31, and the effective lines (design symbols). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing display lines for displaying combinations.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, the reels 31 are arranged so that three symbols vertically continuous from the display window 17 can be seen. Therefore, the symbols are arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The number at the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 6 (B) illustrates the designation of the symbol position in this specification. In this specification, the symbol positions at the time of stoppage viewed from the display window 17 for each reel 31 are referred to as "upper", "middle", and "lower" in order from the top. , "Middle left," and "bottom left."
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

  Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination when the reel 31 is stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line). When the combination stops on the line, the winning line of the combination is obtained. In the present embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. I have.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as an active line among the symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations is stopped on that line, a profit is given according to the combination. This is a line in which (medal payout, etc.) is not performed. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not a target for the formation of the symbol combination in the first place.

  In addition, conventionally, there is known a slot machine in which the number of valid lines differs according to the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the number of valid lines is set to one, when the number of inserted medals is two, the number of valid lines is set to three, and when the number of inserted medals is three, the number of valid lines is set to five. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one of the medals shown in FIG. There is no variation in the number of valid lines due to the number of inserted medals. Therefore, in this specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG.

  7 to 12 are diagrams illustrating combinations of types, combinations of payout numbers, and the like, of combinations (eg, combinations included in a condition device selected by the combination selection unit 61 described later) in the present embodiment. FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers "101" to "03") as combinations of symbols which are not combinations but are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won. "120").

The combination according to the present embodiment is roughly divided into a special combination, a replay (re-game combination), and a small combination.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, and the like are determined. When all the reels 31 stop, the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the activated line (the combination wins. The same applies hereinafter), and the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to zero. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  7 to 12, "specified number 3" displayed for the number of payouts and the like indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not operated, that is, the number of thrown-in cards during a normal game). , "Specified number 2" indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of cards inserted during a special game). For example, the replay 01 of the number “3” indicates that the replay is performed with the specified number of three cards, and the “−” of the specified number two indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, the numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special roles (gears). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special combination, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role to shift from a normal game to a special game.
When 1BB is won, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of an accessory).
During the 1BB game (when the accessory is activated), since the payout rate is set to exceed “1”, a medal acquisition can be expected more than when the accessory is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. .

In addition, the replay (replaying role) is a role that allows the player to perform a replaying game in which the number of medals inserted in the current game is maintained (medals are automatically bet).
The replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”) as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, when a prize is won at a specific RT, transfer to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also called transition replays.

More specifically, when the replay 02 wins in RT2, the game is shifted from the next game to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). For this reason, replay 02 is also referred to as promotion replay.
When the replay 03 wins at RT3, the game is shifted from the next game to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, the replay 03 is also called a fall (demotion) replay.

  In addition, the replays 04 and 05 are used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the number of condition devices by overlappingly winning a plurality of replays. In the present embodiment, in the condition devices described later, This is a replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop on the active line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays, and are included in a replay E of the condition apparatus described later. At the time of winning the replay E in the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.
The replay 06 is a replay that is randomly selected during the 1BB operation, and is included in a replay D of the condition device described later. At the time of winning the replay D during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.

The small wins include small wins 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”) as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. The small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to high-order bells) that are won in the correct push order when the push order bell is won, which will be described later. Further, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to Yasume Bell) that can be awarded (PB # 1) in the wrong push order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Further, the small wins 39 and 40 are small wins in which the prescribed number is two, that is, a winning can be achieved only when the accessory is activated.

  As described above, the pattern designs 01 to 03 are not the winning combinations themselves, but appear when the winning combinations are missed (when the winning combinations are not won) at the time of the incorrect answer of the pushing order at the time of the winning of the pushing order bell. It is a combination of symbols. Further, when the combination of the symbols is stopped at an effective line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in the present embodiment), the pattern is shifted to the RT (to RT2 in the present embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the pattern designs 01 to 03 always appear when the winning combination is incorrect in the pressing order at the time of winning the small combination B group. However, another combination of symbols (not the role itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role is not stopped on the activated line in the game won as the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The role to be carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, control is performed so that the winning information of 1BB is carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, while the small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when a small combination or a replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. In other words, in the game in which the winning combination is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game. , The right to win the elected role will be extinguished.

  When starting the game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cares and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 and controls the driving of all the motors 32 so that all the reels are controlled. 31 is controlled to rotate. When the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed in the vertical direction.

  Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and responds to the role lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Thus, the stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning of the winning combination), the payout of the medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the winning combination determination means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
The “winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means (a hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. There is provided determination means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and for determining the winning condition device.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that is counted by a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds and keeps counting from one cycle of “0” to “65535” as long as the slot machine 10 is powered on. Keep counting.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination unit determines the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit with a condition device lottery table described later. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that replay A has been won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices selected by the lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition devices are mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of winning each condition device are described in the reel control means 65. I do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry the winning information to the next game, and the `` accessory condition device '', which is a condition device that includes any of special roles that can carry the winning information to the next game. It is a "prize and replay condition device" which is a condition device that includes either a small role or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition apparatus corresponds to 1BB winning in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition apparatus numbers “1” and “2”.
The accessory condition device number “0” corresponds to non-winning of a special role, the accessory condition device number “1” corresponds to winning of 1BBA, and the accessory condition device number “2” corresponds to 1BBB winning. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device numbers are “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA alone is won, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and small win are overlapped. For example, when 1BBA and small win D are overlapped, the bonus item condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device numbers. Becomes “26”.
When 1BB and a small win or replay are repeatedly won, the winning of the small win or replay is prioritized in the current game (the priority order can be set arbitrarily). In addition, the winning of the small role or the replay is effective only in the current game, so that the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning of a combination (so-called loss).
Replay A of condition device number “1” is a single win of replay 01. When the replay A is won, the replay 01 wins regardless of the pushing order (in any pushing order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), and replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”) Are referred to as “replay C group”). Each of the replays is an overlapping winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is an overlapping winning including at least one of replays 01 and 02. Then, the type of the replay to be won is set to be different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the first left stop, and the replay 01 wins other than the first left stop (middle or right first stop).

In the case of the replay overlap winning, the replay (replaying game) wins regardless of the pushing order, so that there is no concept of higher / lower payout of medals and the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 in the RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from the RT2 to the RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, other than the first left stop, the replay 01 is won to maintain the RT2.
When the replay C1 is won in RT3, the replay 01 is won at the first left stop to maintain RT3. On the other hand, in the cases other than the first left stop, the replay 03 is awarded to cause the RT to fall down (downgrade) (transition from RT3 to RT2).

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single win of replay 06. At the time of Replay D winning, Replay 06 wins regardless of the order of pushing.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is an overlap winning of the replays 04 and 05. When the replay E is won, the replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the pushing order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, if a lottery is drawn at RT1 and a replay E is won during RT1 and during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.

In FIG. 14, the small win A of the condition device number “10” is mounted on a so-called common bell, and the small win 01 is independently elected. When winning the small part A, the small part 01 always wins (PB = 1) irrespective of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
14 to 15, the small wins B1 to B12 of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "small win B group") correspond to a so-called pushing order bell. , A small win 01 (9 bells, 9 wins) and at least one of the small wins 03 to 34 (1 win).

  At the time of winning these condition devices, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, if the correct answer is the pressing order, the small win 01 which is a higher-level bell (9 bells, 9 wins) with "PB = 1" wins. On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect pressing order, the small part 03 which is the low-end bell (one piece) according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There is a case where No. to No. 34 wins, and a case where no small combination wins (a case where a pattern symbol is displayed by dropping).

In FIG. 16, small units C1 to C3 of condition device numbers "23" to "25" (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "small win C group") are so-called pushers, similarly to the above-described small win B group. This corresponds to the order bell, and is an overlap winning including a small combination 02 (3 bells, 3 combination) and small combinations 03 to 10 (1 combination).
At the time of winning these condition devices, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer is the pressing order, the small win 02 which is a higher-level bell (3 bells, 3 wins) with "PB = 1" wins. On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect pushing sequence, any one of the small wins 03 to 10 which is a low-end bell (one win) wins with “PB = 1”. Therefore, unlike the time of winning of the small win B group, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (missing) when the small win C group is won. The present invention is not limited to this, and may have a case where none of the small roles wins.

At the time of winning the small role group B, 9 coins are paid out when the high-bell wins, so when the answer is correct, 3 ins (input number) and 9 outs (payout number) are 9 and the difference in this game The number is “+6”. Therefore, the medal count increases when the push order is correct, and decreases when the push order is incorrect (the payout count is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, the small part C group pays out three cards at the time of winning the high-level bell, so at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order, three in (input number) and three out (payout number) are obtained. Is “± 0”. Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the payout number is one), the medal number decreases.

  It should be noted that the reason why both the push order bell that pays out nine sheets and the push order bell that pays out three sheets in the correct answer push order is provided in order to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the pressing order is incorrect when the small role B group is won, the probability of winning a single role is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is displayed (there is no payout when the pattern symbol is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the pressing order is incorrect in the small part C group winning, one winning combination is won with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells having different payout numbers for the correct answer and the incorrect answer for the push order and appropriately setting the winning probability, the payout rate can be set in an appropriate range. become.

The small combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small combination (watermelon). The small win D is a single win of the small win 35 and is set to “PB $ 1”.
The small win E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small win E2 of the condition device number "28" correspond to the rare small win (cherry), similarly to the small win D1. The small win E1 is a double win of the small wins 36 and 38, and the small win E2 is a double win including the small wins 37 in addition to the small wins 36 and 38. At the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, the two roles (small role 36 or 38) win regardless of the pushing order.

The small win F of the condition device number “29” is a win drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a double win of the small wins 01 to 39. At the time of the winning of the small part F, the small part 39 which is the ten-piece part wins with "PB = 1".
The small combination G of the condition device number “30” is a combination which is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single combination 40 small winning. At the time of winning the small part G, the small part 40 of nine pieces wins with "PB = 1".

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show the winning probability determined by the lottery table when the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and show the number of the character condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT. FIG. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by “65536” gives the winning probability. For example, the number of 1BBA to be independently elected is set to “20” and “10” (total “30”) in each of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 17 is a numerical table of condition devices that are common to the settings and can be determined to shift to the advantageous section, or execute the addition of the advantageous section (or can perform the additional lottery).
Here, “setting common” means that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same numerical value.
Then, when the condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (decided to be added during the advantageous section), or whether to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition apparatus that determines to shift to the advantageous section (decision to add during the advantageous section) and a condition apparatus that determines not to shift to the advantageous section (decide not to add during the advantageous section) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 includes a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition apparatus that always determines to add the advantageous section is set.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “意味” means that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “×” means that it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, “区間” means that the advantageous section is decided to be added, and “×” means that the advantageous section is decided not to be added.
In FIG. 17, “「 ”determines to shift to the advantageous section, and“ △ ”determines to add the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may mean that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, and “△” may mean that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add an advantageous section.

FIG. 18 shows condition devices that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are not determined to add the advantageous section, and the numbers thereof.
In the present embodiment, the condition apparatus that determines to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to the time of winning the condition apparatus shown in FIG. In the winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, the setting numbers of the setting 1 and the setting 6 are representatively shown. However, in actuality, as described above, the setting value has six stages of the setting 1 to the setting 6, The number for each value is defined.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the condition apparatus including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-inside, it is drawn in non-RT and RT1 to RT3. In addition, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case where they win independently, and a case where they win with small roles D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a case where it wins alone. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn at RT4 is handled as a single winning of the small role D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of small wins of the small role D in RT4 is “580” to “585” in total, and the total number of small wins of the small role E1 in RT4 is “1030” in total, The numbers of the small wins E2 in RT4 that are individually won are “310” to “370” in total.
Also, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when the condition device having the setting difference is won, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB or to add the advantageous section. Never.

Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, when the player wins the replay E at RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set not to appear in another RT, the replay E is randomly selected only in RT1.
Further, the small wins D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small wins F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, but are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

  In addition, in FIG. 17, the total number of entries in the single winning of 1BBA is “30”, but in the present embodiment, the entry number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and It is divided into the numeral "10" which is determined not to shift. In other words, in the case of 1BBA single winning, if the number of “20” is won, if the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is also won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA is independently elected, if the number of “10” is elected, the advantageous section is not elected.

Further, when 1BBA is independently won during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is added to either the number “20” or the number “10”.
Similarly, the number of wins for the small role E1 alone is “1000” in total, but in the present embodiment, the number “250” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and the advantageous section The number is determined to be "750", which is determined not to be shifted to.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the winning number of the small role E1 is set to one (1000) (not divided into the number “250” and the number “750”), and the small portion E1 is won. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by a separate lottery. For example, a decision may be made to shift to an advantageous section with a probability of 25%, but not to a transition to an advantageous section with a probability of 75%. As described above, the number of winnings in the advantageous section and the number of non-winning in the advantageous section may be provided from the beginning, but the number itself is set to one value. A lottery (two-step lottery) may be performed.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even at the time of winning the small role D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB alone wins and 1BBB and small win D overlap win, neither of them determines the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after shifting to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small winning combination E2 has a case where it wins repeatedly with 1BBB and a case where it wins alone, but neither makes a decision regarding an advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small win E1 is won, both the single win of the small win E1 and the overlapping win with 1BBA may be determined regarding the advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices of the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group have the same setting, but are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are added during the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, not limited to the examples in FIGS. 17 and 18, at the time of winning of the replay condition device, it is determined to shift to an advantageous section (including lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between the setting 1 and the setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), and the replay A, the replay B group, The replay C group may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, replay A is randomly selected at all RTs when the accessory is not operated. The replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group all have a setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but the numbers are the same in all RTs.

In addition, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the setting 6 has a higher winning probability of 1BB and the small combination in the setting 6. Therefore, in this regard, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the table of “Replay”, the winning probability of replay is highest in RT3. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is set so as to basically stay at RT3, not only the medal is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the push order bell, but also the gaming state in which the decrease in the medal is small due to the replay winning. .

Further, the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group are all set in the condition apparatus having the setting difference. Here, the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small combination A is “250”, and the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small combination B group (entire) is “240 (20 × 12). ". Therefore, the small difference of the small combination A is larger than that of the small combination B group. Thus, by setting the number of small wins A having no winning difference in accordance with the pressing order to a larger value, a difference in payout rate according to the set value can be reliably provided.
Further, the combination of symbols that can be won when the small role A is won and the combination of symbols that can be won when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won are set to be the same (described later). The set value cannot be inferred by counting the number of wins (winnings).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small win B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small win C group. Here, when the specified number is three, the maximum number of payouts is nine, and during the advantageous section, at least one instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts with three specified number) is performed. Need to be executed several times. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once at the time of winning the small win B group. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small win B group to be higher than the winning probability of the small win C group, one instruction function operation game (wins for the small win C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) (Excluding the played game), it is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in the advantageous section that ends only with the game. Furthermore, even if the advantageous section is completed by executing the predetermined number of games, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be completed because the small role B group has never been won during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls ON / OFF of a winning flag corresponding to each winning based on the lottery result by the winning lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for every combination. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the role included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the player wins the replay B1, the two winning flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal middle game, when the small part B1 is won, the small part 01, the small part 03, the small part 10, the small part 11, the small part 18, the small part 19, the small part 19, and the small part included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the role 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.

Further, as described above, the winning of the small role and replay other than 1BB is not carried over, so even if the small role or the replay is won in the current game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the current game ends. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, if 1BB is won in the game this time, and once the winning flag relating to the winning 1BB is turned on, the on state is maintained until the 1BB wins. It is turned off when 1BB wins.

  Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins 1BBA and small win D in duplicate, the winning flag of the small win 35 corresponding to 1BBA and small win D is turned on, and there is no case where both wins are won in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag of 1BBA is maintained and the winning flag of small win 35 is turned off regardless of whether or not the small win 35 has won.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and if 1BBA is not won in this game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. .
Furthermore, in the next game, when the small role A1 is won, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on in addition to the 1BBA that has been carried over. If the 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, 1BBA Is maintained, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the role lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table.
In any of the advantageous section and the normal section, the pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 may select the pushing order instruction number, but is not limited thereto. For example, only during the advantageous section, The selection of the pressing order instruction number may be performed. In such a case, the pressing order instruction number is always “A0” during the normal section.
The transmission of the selected push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 can be performed only during the advantageous section (excluding transmitting the push order instruction number “A0” during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selecting means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number. For example, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay A is “A0”, and the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction numbers include “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The pushing order instruction number “A0” does not have a pushing order that is advantageous to the player (the pushing order has no advantage / disadvantage, ie, the pushing order does not matter).
Each of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” has an advantageous push order for the player. For example, the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order designation number “A2” is the middle first stop.

The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 02 (the pressing order for promoting the RT).
The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small win B group is set to the pressing order in which the small win 01 (9) is won.
Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination C group is set to the pressing order in which the small combination 02 (three) is won.

  In FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is Is shown. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When "=" is displayed, the segments D and G in FIG. 4 among the seven segments are turned on (see FIG. 26 described later). When the push order instruction number is “A0”, there may be no display (no segments are lit).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed under the control of the sub-control board 80, and in the present embodiment, is the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23.
The “operation of the instruction function” means a display using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub-control board 80 corresponds to the “operation of the instruction function” of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device “11” is won during the advantageous section, the push order instruction number “A1” is selected, and the activation of the instruction function causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display “= 1”. You. In addition, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "1 ○○" which allows the player to understand that the left first stop is performed.

In FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small part A is as follows.
At the time of winning the small part A, since the small part 01 wins regardless of the pushing order, there is no advantageous pushing order. However, during the advantageous section, any one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy pressing order instruction number. The selectivity is "1/3". By setting in this way, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the indicating function is operated and the pressing order indicating information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small win A or the small win B group in the game. This setting is made for the following reason.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small role A is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small win 01 wins the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a capture, at the time of winning the small win A in the advantageous section, the indicating function is operated to display the dummy pressing order indicating information. Of course, by counting the number of times the small role 01 wins in the game in which the instruction function is activated, it is not possible to infer the set value, but the number of times the small role 01 wins in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. Requires a larger number of trials than when estimating a set value.

Further, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small roles E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, at the time of winning the small role E1 in the advantageous section, an addition of the advantageous section is performed. However, as described above, if the player wins 1BB during the advantageous section and enters the inside, the additional advantage section is not performed. For this reason, during the advantageous section and inside (during the game section where the addition of the advantageous section is not performed), the small combination E1 is won, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination E1 (a combination of symbols that is expected to be added to the advantageous section) When a certain middle stage cherry stops, there is a possibility that the player may be given an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small part E1 is won during the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is operated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

  When the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop at the time of winning the small role E1, the so-called middle cherry is not stopped as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. In addition, since the payout number of each of the small wins 36 and 38 that can be won when the small win E1 is won is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in the present embodiment, the upper limit is set within 1500 games. Therefore, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is present, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In such a case, if the player wins the small role E1 and displays the middle cherries when the game is close to the 1500 game in the advantageous section, for example, the player expects to add the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small role E1 is won, the middle cherry is not displayed as in the case of winning inside. Activate the indicating function to display the right first stop.

At the time of winning the small part E2, as shown in FIG. 18, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, when the small role E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, when the middle cherry is displayed at the time of 1400 games or more from inside or from the start of the advantageous section, there is a possibility that a misunderstanding may be given to the player. In this case, too, the instruction function is activated. Display the first stop, right.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of winning the small role E2, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed in the first place, the operation of the above-described instruction function may not be performed and the middle cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As a result of the lottery of the condition device, the winning and the replay condition device number itself that has been won may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device numbers themselves are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers that have been won in the current game.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device has a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group is set to “5”. The effect group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”.

Therefore, as a result of the lottery of the condition device, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number when winning the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is “5”, the sub-control board 80 knows that the player has won one of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group in this game. it can. Thereby, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

  However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the rendering group number “5” has been won, or when the player has won one of the small wins B in the game, for example, the correct answer is pushed. I can't tell the order. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer push order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but is not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 may output as an effect the fact that the player has won the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group, and the correct push order corresponding to the push order instruction number. it can. On the other hand, during the normal section or the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces the effect that the player has won one of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group (bell), Cannot be output as an effect.

  Even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to the different effect group numbers. For example, the pressing order instruction number when winning the replay B1 is “A1” (first left), and the pressing order instruction number when winning the small role C1 is “A1” (first left). In each case, the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number “2” is transmitted, and when the small role C1 is won, the effect group number “5” is transmitted. For this reason, when the effect group number “2” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number “5” is transmitted, for example, It is possible to report the correct answer pressing order by using the yellow color indicating the order.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a rotation start command of the reel 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. To control. Further, after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game, and determines the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. The control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control unit 65 determines a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be able to stop on the activated line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (combination with the winning flag turned off) on the activated line. .

Here, "within the range of the stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 actually stops or the rotation amount of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Within the range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “Replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage (on the effective line), the four frames ahead, that is, the fifth “bell” The pattern up to "B" can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (bitter stop) to No. 5 (four frames slip) can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the maximum number of moving frames can be set to four from the symbol next to the symbol located on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “Replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left, the next symbol, that is, from the second “blank”, The pattern up to No. 6 "Replay", which is the pattern four frames ahead, is a pattern that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol located on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is four.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to stop until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, when the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of the symbol 31, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the activated line (kick-off stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles have been won, priorities of roles to be won are determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and according to the predetermined priority, The drawing stop control of the symbol with the highest priority is performed.

Further, the reel control unit 65 detects the order of pressing the stop switch 42 (operation order). When the player operates the stop switch 42, the reel control unit 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 has been operated.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By judging this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Replay" in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), the stop position determination table indicates what information is displayed. The stop position is determined in advance such that the movement of only the symbol is controlled (at what speed) and the symbol of the number is stopped at the lower left.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, in all the reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. Accordingly, the “replay” of all the reels 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, on the left reel 31, either one of “bell A” and “bell B” is arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
In the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “bell C” of the middle reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Further, on the right reel 31, four of "bell A" and "bell B" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "cherry" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, “Cherry” on the right reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
On the left reel 31, four of either "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of either "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the right reel 31, four of any one of "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “PB = 1” arrangement is obtained by adding these four symbols.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "Cherry" is arranged in the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and is not in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, for “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 are arranged in “PB ≠ 1”, and the right reel 31 is arranged in “PB = 1”.

Hereinafter, a stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and winning of the replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations does not stop on the activated line.

  The replay A table is used at the time of the replay A winning (single winning of the replay 01), and is controlled so that the replay 01 is stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. 31 stop positions. The symbols on the reels 31 relating to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 described later are arranged in “PB = 1” on all the reels 31. Therefore, at the time of the replay winning, the replay that has always been won (when a plurality of replays have been repeatedly won, any replay that has been repeatedly won) always wins.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line, and the first left stop At other times (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 01 on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay B1 table, at the first left stop, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, the “replay” stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the time of the third stop on the right, "Cherry" is stopped at the upper right. In this case, the “replay” stops at the lower right. As a result, “black 7 / watermelon” − “replay” − “cherry” stops on the activated line, and the replay 02 wins. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” are stopped in “upper left”, “middle middle”, and “lower right”.

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, during the middle first stop, “blue 7” or “cherry” is stopped at the middle middle stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, the “replay” is stopped in the upper middle section. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, the “replay” stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay” is stopped at the upper right (“PB = 1”). As a result, “black 7 / watermelon” − “blue 7 / cherry” − “replay” is stopped on the activated line, and the replay 01 wins. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” are stopped in “upper left”, “middle upper”, and “upper right”.

In a game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control is performed at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the middle first stop.
Further, the replay B2 table at the time of winning the replay B2 and the replay B3 table at the time of the winning of the replay B3 are controlled in the same manner as described above to win the replay 02 when the pushing order is correct and to win the replay 01 when the pushing order is incorrect.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 01 is stopped on the active line, and the first left stop. At other times (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the active line at the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, and the description is omitted.
In the game using the replay C1 table, at the time of the first middle stop, the “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage (“PB = 1”). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 stops, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops at the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, the “replay” stops at the middle right stage. As a result, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" are stopped on the activated line, and a prize of Replay 03 is won. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” stop in “middle left” − “middle middle” − “middle right”.

In a game in which the replay C1 table is used, the same control is performed at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the middle first stop.
Further, the replay C2 table at the time of winning the replay C2 and the replay C3 table at the time of the winning of the replay C3 are controlled by the same control as described above, so that the replay 01 is awarded when the pushing order is correct, and the replay 03 is awarded when the pushing order is incorrect. .

The replay D table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay D, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is determined. Replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
Further, the replay E table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay E, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the activated line. 31 stop positions. In this case, either “Replay 04” or “Replay 05” can be stopped by “PB = 1”.

  The small win A table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win A, and the reel 31 is stopped so as to stop the small win 01 on the activated line irrespective of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stop position is determined. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell C” − “replay”, and “PB = 1” on all reels 31. When "Black 7 / watermelon" stops at the lower left, "Bell A / Bell B" stops at the middle left. Furthermore, when “Replay” stops at the upper right, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the middle right. Therefore, at the time of the winning of the small role 01, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stop at "Middle Left"-"Middle Middle"-"Middle Right".

  The small win B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small win 01 is stopped on the activated line. Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), one piece of the winning combination (one of the small roles 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 at the time of the small role B1 winning) is included. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the reel 31 is stopped at an active line or one of the pattern symbols 01 to 03 is stopped.

The first left stop (when the push order is correct) in the game using the small win B1 table is the same as that of the small win A table, and thus the description is omitted.
When the following small win B2 table to small win B12 table are used, the same stop control as that of the small win A table is performed when the pressing order is correct.
Thus, when the small part A wins and the small part B group wins, at the time of the correct push order, the small part 01 always wins, and "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage""Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stop. Therefore, even if the small part 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small part A has been won or whether the pressing order in the small part B group has been won is correct.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small part A is won, if the instruction function is operated by the dummy as described above, it is determined whether the small part A is won or the small part B group is won. I do not know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning number of the small win A, so that it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of winnings of the small win A. However, if the stop rolls are the same when the small role A is won and when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won, only the winning number of the small role A cannot be counted. Can not be guessed.

Further, in a game using the small win B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, at the time of winning the small win B1, as shown in FIG. 14, seven wins of the small wins 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

The following method can be used as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small wins having different payout numbers are repeatedly won.
As a first priority, when all of the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination in the activated line” (when it is not possible to adopt the first priority), the “number priority” is set as the second priority. ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 constituting the combination of the symbols with the largest payout number among the combinations of symbols that have been repeatedly won are preferentially stopped (pulled in) on the activated line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (9).
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the activated line is maximized.

  For example, when the small win B1 is won and the first stop is the middle stop, all of the middle reels 31 related to the winning hand cannot be simultaneously stopped on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols of the winning small reel 31 and only one activated line, so that only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line.

Therefore, at the time of winning the small win B group, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is incorrect. When the reels are stopped and controlled with the number priority, the small win 01 (9 wins) is configured to be able to win one win without winning the win (there is a case where the win is missed).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42, such as giving priority to the number of sheets in a specific pressing order (correct answering order in this embodiment) and giving priority to the number in another pressing order (incorrect answering order in this embodiment). Priority or number priority is performed according to.

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), if either "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the active line, the stop is at the active line. The number of possible symbol combinations is two, which is the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 11 can win. “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols, so when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is always stopped. Can be done.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small win 03 or 11 can be awarded at this time.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, “Bell A” is arranged at No. 15 and No. 0, and “Bell C” is arranged at No. 18. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 are the eleventh to nineteenth and the zeroth at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, “Bell A” or “Bell C” can be stopped at the activated line, If the number is 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped at the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. In particular, in this embodiment, since "bell A" can be stopped without stopping "bell C", the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are numbered 11 to 19 and 0. , "Bell A" is always stopped at the active line.
In this manner, the reason why "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C" is that when a winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop, a pattern symbol described later can be displayed. This is because pattern symbols cannot be displayed if "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the "bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon” among the pattern symbols of which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”. Since “PB = 1” for “Black 7” or “Watermelon” of the left reel 31 in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". .
Further, if "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" before the third stop on the right, "Bell A" can be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Bell A is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13, "Bell A" is stopped. The “bell A” cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" are obtained, and the small role 03 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is changed to the active line. Stop ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “bell A” − “bell A” − “cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell A” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped in the activated line at the time of the first stop during the winning of the small role B1 (when the pushing order is incorrect). In this case, the small win 10 or 18 can be awarded at this time.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7" which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 18 in the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, “Bell B” is arranged at No. 5 and No. 10, and “Red 7” is arranged at No. 7. For this reason, when the symbols of the left reel 31 are the first to tenth symbols at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, “Bell B” or “Red 7” can be stopped at the active line. In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming for a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. In particular, in this embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10 Always stops "Bell B" on the active line.

  On the other hand, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, control is performed so that any one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” for “Black 7” or “Watermelon” of the left reel 31 in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". .
Furthermore, if "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" before the third stop on the right, "Bell B" can be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Bell B "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" on the active line, the pattern of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 14 to No. 18 or No. 19 to No. 3. In this case, "bell B" can be stopped, and "bell B" cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops on the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" are obtained, and the small combination 10 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", if "bell B" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is switched to the activated line. Stop ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “bell B” − “bell B” − “cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

As described above, at the time of the first stop in the middle of the small role B1 winning, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one sheet role with “PB = 1”, and the left and right reels 31 / 2 ”can be stopped at a probability of one sheet. Further, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-piece combination, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-Piece: Wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 10)
Will be one of

Next, a description will be given of the case of the right first stop at the time of winning the small part B1. When priority is given to the number when stopping the right reel 31, if either "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the activated line is two. It becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 19 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" of the right reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, "Bell A" or "Bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that “Bell A” is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small win 03 or 19 can be won at this time.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C", which is a symbol related to the small role 03 or 19, on the activated line. Here, similarly to the above, priority is given to stopping "bell A". “Bell A” can be stopped with a probability of “１ ／”. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A". .
Further, if "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" before the middle third stop, and "bell A" can be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, " Bell A is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 5 to No. 14, "Bell A" is stopped. The “bell A” cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" are obtained, and the small win 03 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", if "bell A" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, "blue 7" or "cherry" Is stopped at the activated line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). Thus, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped on the activated line (“PB = 1”). ). Thus, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the active line.

It is also assumed that “Bell B” has been stopped in the activated line at the time of the first stop of the right reel 31. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be awarded at this time.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 26, on the activated line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B". .
Further, if "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" before the middle third stop, and "Bell B" can be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, Bell B "is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" are obtained, and the small part 10 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” Is stopped at the active line ("PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols). Thus, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thus, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the active line.

As described above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the single role with "PB = 1", and both the left and right reels 31 have the symbol "1". / 2 ”can be stopped at a probability of one. Further, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-piece combination, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-Piece: Wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 10)
Will be one of
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbol are the same as those at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Therefore, when the small win B1 is won, the small win 01 is won with "PB = 1" at the first left stop (when the push order is correct). On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or right (when the push order is incorrectly answered), in each case, one winning combination wins with a probability of "1/4" and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". .

At the time of winning the small part B2, the small part B2 table is provided similarly to the case of the small part B1 winning. Winning roles included when winning the small role B2,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first stop in the middle, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" can be stopped, so "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "right B" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a winning combination of the small role 04 is obtained. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped. Therefore, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell A" is stopped when stopping "bell A" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 09 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the active line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” can be stopped, so “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

If "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped at the time of intermediate stop, if "Bell B" can be stopped. As a result, a small part 09 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" can be stopped, so "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" is stopped at the time of intermediate stop if "bell A" can be stopped. As a result, a winning combination of the small role 04 is obtained. If "bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell B”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of winning the small role B2, when the push order is incorrect,
1-Piece: Wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (Small role 09)
Will be one of

At the time of winning the small win B3, a small win B3 table is provided similarly to the win of the small win B1. The winning role included when the small role B3 wins,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first stop in the middle, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7" in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible at the right stop. Thereby, a small part 08 wins. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C" in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell A" is stopped when stopping "bell A" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 05 wins. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the active line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible during intermediate stop. As a result, a small part 05 wins. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped at the time of middle stop, if "Bell A" can be stopped. Thereby, a small part 08 wins. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell B”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B3, when the push order is incorrect,
1-Piece: Wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Small role 08)
Will be one of

The small win B4 table is provided for the small win B4 as well as the small win B1 win. Winning roles included when winning the small role B4,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small part 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first first stop, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7", but here, similarly to the above, Stop "Bell B". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" is stopped when stopping "bell A" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 07 wins. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 06 is won. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small part B4 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

If "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when stopping "Bell A" is possible during intermediate stop. As a result, a small part 07 wins. If "bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible during intermediate stop. As a result, a small part 06 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell B”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B4, when the push order is incorrect,
1-Piece: Wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 07)
Will be one of

Hereinafter, a detailed description of the small win B5 table to the small win B12 table at the time of winning the small wins B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small win B5 table used at the time of winning the small win B5, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the push order correct answer, and the small win 03 or the small win with a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. The role 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B1 is won.
In the small win B6 table used at the time of winning the small win B6, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. In other words, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small win B7 table used at the time of winning the small win B7, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. 05 or small win 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B3 is won.
Further, in the small win B8 table used at the time of winning the small win B8, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop which is the correct answer of the pushing order, and the small win 06 has a probability of “１ ／” when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B4 is won.

In the small win B9 table used at the time of winning the small win B9, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small win 03 or the small win has a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. The role 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B1 is won.
In the small win B10 table used at the time of winning the small win B10, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop, which is the correct answer of the pushing order, and the small win 04 has a probability of “１ ／” when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. In other words, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small win B11 table used at the time of winning the small win B11, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small win has a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small win 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B3 is won.
Further, in the small win B12 table used at the time of winning the small win B12, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B4 is won.

  As is clear from the above, one winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect in the winning of the small win B group is small win 03 to small win 10. Therefore, small wins other than those described above included in each condition device do not win. The setting in this way relates to a single winning combination that can be won at the time of winning a small winning combination C group described later.

  The small win C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small win 02 is stopped on the activated line. Except at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), one of the winning combinations (or any of the minors 03 to 10 when the small role C1 is won) is stopped on the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  At the time of winning the small win C1 (the same applies to the small wins C2 and C3 described later), when the push order is correct, the small win 02 (three wins) is awarded by priority to the number of sheets as in the win of the small win B group. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role 02 is “bell A / bell B” − “blue 7 / cherry” − “watermelon”, and “PB = 1” for all reels 31. . Therefore, it is possible to always win the small win 02 when the pushing order is correct.

  Further, at the time of winning the small win C1, when the push order is incorrect (in the middle or right first stop), control is performed such that one winning combination (small wins 03 to 10) wins with priority on the number. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10, in any of the reels 31, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B", and any one of "bell A" or "bell B" Even if stopped, the condition of number priority is satisfied. In particular, when the small combination C2 and the small combination C3 are won, the small combination 21 and the small combination 22, respectively, are included. Even if these small combinations are included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of the symbol having the number priority. In all the reels 31, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is “PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols. Therefore, any of the small wins 03 to 10 can be always won.

  As described above, at the time of winning the small part C1, when the pushing order is correct, the small part 02 (three pieces) wins (“PB = 1”), and when the pushing order is incorrect, one of the small parts 03 to 10 (1) The winning combination) wins (“PB = 1”), and the dropout (stop of the pattern design) as in the case of winning the small winning combination B does not occur.

  The small win C2 table and the small win C3 table used when the small win C2 wins and the small win C3 win respectively are the same as the small win C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small role C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct answer pressing order, and when the small role C3 is won, the right first stop is the correct answer pressing order. The stop control for winning the small win 02 or the small wins 03 to 10 is the same as that at the time of winning the small win C1, and therefore the description is omitted.

  Therefore, a single role (Small Role 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the pushing order is incorrect when the small role B group is won, and a single role that can be stopped when the pushing order is incorrect when the Small Role C group is won ( The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. Thus, it is not possible to judge whether the player has won the small win B group or the small win C group in the game just by watching the winning combinations of the small wins 03 to 10.

  The small win D table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win D, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 35 stops on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small win D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of the symbols of the small combination 35 is "watermelon". “Watermelon” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB = 1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small win D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when “watermelon” stops at the active line, “watermelon” stops at the active line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, the “watermelon” does not stop on the active line and the small role 35 is missed.

  The small win E1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win E1, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 36 or 38 stops at the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, so-called middle cherry stop mode (so that “Cherry” stops in the middle left corner). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

  The winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (and further includes the small role 37 at the time of the small role E2 winning, which will be described later). The number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by an arbitrary predetermined stop control. For this reason, control is performed such that the winning of the small role 36 is prioritized when the left or middle first stop is performed, and the winning of the small role 38 is prioritized when the right first stop is performed.

  In FIG. 5, "Cherry" of the left reel 31 is No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 ("PB @ 1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped in the active line at the bottom left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small role 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the seventh "Red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first stop on the left ("Cherry" stop at the left middle stage), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, select one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” (“PB = 1)) is stopped at the active line. As a result, a small part 36 wins.
Also, when the second or twelfth “blank” is stopped at the lower left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped (the “cherry” stop at the left middle stage), the same as above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped. “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is stopped at the activated line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7”, or “Blank” is stopped at the activated line. . As a result, a small part 36 wins.

At the time of the middle first stop, stop control is performed in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have the symbol "PB = 1" and the symbol related to the small role 36 stops, and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop ( "PB @ 1").
However, if "red 7" or "blank" cannot be stopped at the lower left stage during the first stop at the left or middle, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped at “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank", and the small role 38 wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small win E1 table is used, the winning of the small win 38 is prioritized at the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" stops, and the small role 38 wins with "PB = 1". .
Furthermore, at the time of the first right stop, even if “Cherry” can be stopped at the middle left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is not stopped at the middle left stage and “Bell A” or “Bell” is displayed at the bottom left stage. B "(in this case," Cherry "is not stopped in the middle left stage).

The small win E2 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win E1, and the reel 31 or the small win 37 (or the small win 37) is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, so that the reel 31 is stopped. The stop position is determined.
Therefore, the small win E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small win E1 table, so that the same stop position determination table can be used.

  Alternatively, in the case of the first stop on the left, only when the “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped at the lower left stage (when the middle stage cherry is stopped), “replay” is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. The right reel 31 may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped. Thereby, the small role 37 wins. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control can determine whether the small stage E1 has been won or the small stage E2 has been won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small win F table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win F, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small wins 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In the present embodiment, the small win F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
In addition, the small combination F table performs stop control with priority on the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, since the two symbols "Cherry" and "Bell C" are arranged in the "PB = 1" arrangement, the small role 39 wins with "PB = 1".

  The small win G table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win G, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small win 40 on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small wins 40 are composed of a combination of symbols arranged in “PB = 1” for all reels 31, the small wins 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when a game is won when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone is won) or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop. Within the range, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to combinations other than 1BBA is not stopped on the activated line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "red 7" on all the reels 31 (PB # 1), "red 7" cannot be stopped on the activated line without being pushed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the game when the character condition device number “2” is won (1BBB alone) or when the 1BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 is used. In the range of the stop control, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the activated line, and the symbol combination at the time of stopping the reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than 1BBB is not stopped on the activated line. The combination is determined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all the reels 31 similarly to 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” cannot be stopped on the activated line without being pressed.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or the replay are overlapped, or in the game in which the 1BB is won before the previous game and the small game or the replay is won in the current game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the winning small Stop control which gives priority to stopping a symbol or a replay symbol on an activated line is given. The stop control for stopping both the 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line is until the second stop. At the time of the third stop, the control is performed so that the 1BB or the small winning combination or the replay is won. Role does not win.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line. If both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the winning 1BB is selected. (Prior to the above) stop control giving priority to stopping the symbol in the activated line.

  Thirdly, while giving priority to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the winning symbol of 1BB on the activated line, stop control for stopping at that position is exemplified.

  When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and the small role or replay of “PB = 1” are repeatedly won (when they are simultaneously won), the winning 1BB symbol and the small role or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both the symbol and the activated line on the activated line, and it is also possible to perform control such that only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the replay symbol is stopped on the activated line. Accordingly, since the small wins E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small wins E1 and E2 are respectively obtained when the 1BBA and the small win E1 overlap in the present embodiment or when the 1BBB and the small win E2 overlap win. It is also possible to execute a stop control for winning.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations (whether any winning combination has been won). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines a symbol on the pay line by detecting, for example, an angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations by the winning determination unit 66, and when the winning combination is achieved. In accordance with the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as credit addition is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at the time of stopping each game and all the reels 31. If it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Things.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of this embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the type (number) of condition devices to be drawn and the probability of winning are different for each RT.

  In the present embodiment, the transition timing of the RT is set at the time of the stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of all the stops (when all the reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbols stop when all the reels 31 are stopped during RT1, the RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time of all the stops. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game that has won 1BB. Is also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game that has won 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. The inside middle game corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled so as to stay at RT3 as a control, but when the player presses the stop switch 42 in a wrong order, the player may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section in which the game is completed only by one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role group C, the replay group B, and the replay group C), it is not necessary to stay in the RT3. That is, at RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small win C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed, and the advantageous section may be ended. Of course, you may make it basically stay at RT3.

In non-RT and non-internal middle games of RT1 to RT3, lottery of the accessory condition apparatus is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
Further, when 1BB is won in the game that has won 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started at the time of all stoppages of the game this time, so that in this case, RT4 (internal middle game) does not pass.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When determining that 1BBA or 1BBB has been won at RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When the 1BBA operation is being performed, the operation is continued until the 1BBA operation end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set when the number of payouts exceeds 150.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the 1BBA operation end condition. Is determined to be satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation. When the operation shifts during the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not each game has paid out more than 200 medals. Control is performed so as to shift to RT1 from the next game.

  Note that the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation does not include replay. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, the player may win the replay D, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted as the payout number. Therefore, the number of games during 1BB operation increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It becomes larger than the expected value of the number of games played.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, the RB is continuously operated as described above. The RB ends when either one of two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after the completion, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small role E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The payout number when the small part E2 is won and the small part 36 or 38 wins is two. As a result, the setting 6 has a greater number of games before reaching the end condition (more than 150 cards) during the 1BBA operation than the setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, and the probability that the advantageous section is added is increased. Details on this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  When the RWM 53 is initialized, a game is started from a non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until a pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, the small win B group is drawn, and if one of the small win B groups is won and the winning small win is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions to RT2 from the next game.
At RT1, similarly to non-RT, RT1 is maintained until a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. At RT2, when the player wins the replay B group and wins the replay 02, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, at RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won, and the replay 03 continues until a prize is won. At RT3, when the pattern symbol is displayed or when the replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and non-inside), most of the time travels between RT2 and RT3, but the staying rate of RT2 is the highest in probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game shifts to RT4 (internal) as described above.

  In the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, the instruction function is performed at the time of winning the replay C group in order to maintain RT3. To display a correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01. This prevents falling to RT2. In addition, at the time of winning the small part B group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small part 01 is displayed. Similarly, at the time of winning the small part C group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small part 02 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to activate the instruction function at the time of the replay B group winning while activating the instruction function as described above, thereby winning the replay 02. The pressing order is displayed, and control is performed so as to shift to RT3.
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is performed. Is not activated in a game in which is enabled (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), and waits until a pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed on the non-RT or RT1, and when the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (including the standby section), a determination as to whether or not to end the advantageous section, an addition in the advantageous section, an operation control of the instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
In addition, in the advantageous section and the non-inside middle game, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 when a specific condition device is won, as shown in FIG. Decide to transition. In addition, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to the inside of the non-inside, and it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section from the normal section during the inside.

Further, as described above, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section according to the winning combination lottery result (the winning condition device), the winning of the condition device having a setting difference cannot be set as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there may be a case where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed on condition that the condition apparatus having the common setting is won.

  As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, there are cases where it is determined to shift to the advantageous section and cases where it is not determined to shift. When a random number value included in the range of the set number “20” is extracted from the set number “30” allocated to the single winning of 1BBA, it is determined that the operation is shifted to the advantageous section, and the set number “10” is set. When the random value included in the range is extracted, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section. "1BBA + Small win D", "1BBA + Small win E1", and the single win of the small win E1 are the same as above.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in any case. When these condition devices are won, it is also possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section, or to determine whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the addition of the advantageous section is uniformly performed.

When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of difference, the number of wins of the small role B group, the number of times of operation of the instruction function, etc.) may be determined. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition apparatus shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the processing shifts to the advantageous section in which the end condition is set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it is possible to determine as follows.
1BBA single winning (number "20"): the initial value is counted from the end of 1BB game, and shifts to an advantageous section of 100 games. 1BBA + small role D overlap winning (number "5"): initial value is 1BB Count after the end of the game and move to the 250-game advantage section. 1BBA + Small win E1 overlapping win (number set to “20”): Count from the end of the 1BB game and move to the 200-game advantage section. Small When role D alone is won (number of "50"): the initial value is 150 game advantage sections. When small role E1 is alone (number of "250"): the initial value is 100 game advantage sections or one small role. Any of the advantageous sections that are completed by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (any one of the advantageous sections may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, out of the number “250”, the number is included in the range of the number “120”). When a random value is extracted, the initial value is 10 (If the random number value included in the range of the number "130" is extracted as the advantageous section of the 0 game, the advantageous section may end with the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small role B group winning.)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of the winning of the small role D is reduced by a small amount in order to give a premium feeling when the small role D is won. It is set more than when winning role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small part E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small part D.
Also, when the condition apparatus shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is added by “30”, and when the small role E1 alone is won (number “250”). ) Adds the number of games by "50", and when the small part E1 is elected alone (number "750"), adds the number of games by "20", and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small win E1 alone is won, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “１ ／” (250 out of the total number “1000”). I do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small role E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Accordingly, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries. However, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined when the middle cherries appear is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, the player can be given the impression that there is a setting difference.
Note that, contrary to the present embodiment, the single winning probability of the small role E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability of the transition to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 alone is won, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small win E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries. However, the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherries appear is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, the player can be given the impression that there is a setting difference despite the fact that there is no setting difference in the probability of adding an advantageous section.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination having the same winning number setting (except when 1BBA and small winning combination D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a difference in the winning number setting.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the settings is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, it is possible to add the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBA. On the other hand, it is determined that when 1BBB having a setting difference during the advantageous section is won and the 1BBB is operating, it is not possible to add the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBB. It is determined that if 1BBA and small winning combination D having a setting difference during the advantageous section are over-winned and the 1BBA is in operation, the addition of the advantageous section cannot be performed during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when the setting 1 and the setting 6 are compared during the 1BBA operation, the winning probability of the small role A is lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1 and the winning probability of the small role E2 is 1 in the setting 6. Higher than. For this reason, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout exceeding 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if the setting is made to add an advantageous section at the time of winning the replay D, the expected value of the number of wins for the replay D during 1BBA operation is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the higher the setting, the higher the setting. Advantageous sections can be easily added.

Furthermore, during 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, it may be set so as to add an advantageous section.
As described above, during the 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games played during the 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
As described above, the 1BBA operation end condition is set to a case where more than 150 payouts have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected number of payouts per game during the 1BBA operation is about “8.664” for setting 1, and about “8.557” for setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of games at which the number of payouts reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, during the 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches the 18th game, for example, if it is decided to add the advantageous section unconditionally, the higher the set value, the more easily the advantageous section is added. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that the advantageous section is added every time a certain number of games elapses. Also in this case, the higher the set value, the more easily the advantageous section can be added.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during 1BBB operation.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the operation shifts to non-RT, and when the operation shifts to non-RT, stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed. Shifts to RT2. That is, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it does not go through RT1.

  On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until a pattern symbol is displayed. At RT1, the replay E is selected by lottery. As shown in FIG. 17, if the RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the additional probability of the advantageous section is higher than after the 1BBA operation is completed. By setting the number of additional games played in the advantageous section at the time of the replay E winning to an appropriate value, the balance between the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation can be balanced.

  Then, when the game shifts to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), and the pattern symbol is not activated. Wait until appears. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed at RT1 and the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When shifting to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small part B group, and the small part 01 wins a prize, and the pattern (unless there is a pressing order mistake). No symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the process shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to keep staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. Not until the end of the advantageous section, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role group B, and after the predetermined number of games, the game in which the instruction function can be activated until the pattern symbol is displayed ( For example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the instruction function may not be operated, and the control may wait until the pattern symbol is displayed.

Further, when it is determined that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until a predetermined timing comes, and the other than the advantageous section (normally). (The section or the standby section), the control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.
First, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 determines that the game has been decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the game (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game (after the payout) becomes possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) becomes possible when the player has a reserved medal. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped, Control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (only when a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, if the special role is a special role that does not carry the winning information to the next game, the winning is valid only for the game that has been won such as SB or CB. As in the case where the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the above, the advantageous section display LED 77 needs to be turned on until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game becomes possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is first set to “from the time of determining to shift to the advantageous section, Until the reel 31 stops and the payout is made (after the payout of medals), medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) and the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). ) ", The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the start of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when it is determined that the small win E1 (single) is won and the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the win of the small win E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that does not include 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, it is always applied.

Secondly, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB which can be carried over after the next game, a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and the small role E1 are over-winned, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on this over-win, the advantage section display is performed before the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, up to the moment when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing such as timing 1 may be used before that (for example, when a standby section is not provided).

  Therefore, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is uniformly displayed. In such a case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be set to be turned on. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role is made, the decision is made to uniformly transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device not including the special role. As before, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
When it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, other than the timing 1 and the timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game that has won the special role, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 are rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the role is won). It may be.

  In this case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends in the next game of the game selected as the special combination). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game in which it is possible to win the special role after the next game of the game which has won the special role, at least a part of the rotation of the reels 31 is performed. It may be the middle time, the time when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), or the like. In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the game in which the special role can be won). ).

Here, for example, when the small win E1 is won, the 59th “red 7”-“cherry”-“red 7” (FIG. 9) in the small win 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "red 7"-"rotating"-"red 7" is stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of 1BBA winning. Next, when the player aimed at "Cherry" when the middle reel 31 was stopped, but "Cherry" did not stop on the activated line (kick-off control was performed), the small role E1 was won in the game. You can see that it is not. Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that 1BBA has been independently won, and the 1BBA symbol is displayed in the next game of the game at the time of 1BBA winning. Can be pushed. That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a 1BBA winning notification. This is because it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section at the time of loss (at the time of non-winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, for example, there is a tendency that after performing a continuous effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not 1BB has been won), the 1BB winning notification is performed, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such a continuous production would be useless.
Therefore, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins. It was made to have.

On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small win E1”, if priority is given to winning of the small win E1 in the game, 1BBA does not win in the game.
On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small role E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small win E1”, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small win E1 At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been repeatedly won.

  Therefore, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + Small win E1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), The case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has elapsed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one to adopt is, for example, sorted according to the set number at the time of winning “1BBA + Small win E1”, or is an advantageous section at the time of winning “1BBA + Small win E1” (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section). A lottery (two-stage lottery) for determining whether or not to immediately turn on the display LED 77 (whether or not to provide a standby section) is given. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA has not been repeatedly won, and it is possible to continuously excite the player's sense of expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small win E1 is set to “PB = 1”, so that the small win E1 is always set to “1BBA + small win E1” or the small win E1 alone. The small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins in the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 to “PB ≠ 1”. Then, when the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 is set to “PB」 1 ”, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning“ 1BBA + small win E1 ”, the small win E1 At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. However, when the small win E1 does not win, it is possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the predetermined timing has elapsed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always provided by a predetermined timing. May be turned on (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be always turned on even after a predetermined timing has passed (as shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the small win D alone is won and when the small win E1 is independently won, the advantageous section display LED 77 needs to be turned on by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). ), So it is a so-called immediate notification, and cannot excite the player's expectations.
Therefore, as described above, at the time of winning the small win E1 alone, there are two advantageous sections: an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and an advantageous section that ends by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small win B group win. Provide a type. Then, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, until the first small win B group wins, an effect that fuels the expectation (as an end result, whether or not the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed). If the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to keep the player's expectations high. This is because, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it is not known at the time when the advantageous section continues until the predetermined section has been exhausted.

In addition, even when the small role E1 is won alone, when the transition to the advantageous section is not made, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up in the first place. Absent.
In addition, when the above condition device is won, instead of setting one small win B group (one instruction function operation game) or a predetermined number of games, an instruction function in the small win B group win is set. Can be determined by lottery, for example, within a range of 1 to 50 times.

  As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from “0” to “1”. Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by performing an OR operation on the previous segment data and “10000000” is stored as new data in the RWM 53. As a result, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to segment DP becomes “1”.

Further, as described above, the digit of the present embodiment includes a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and as a method of lighting these digits, control is performed as follows.
The main control board 50 executes an “interruption process” every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process, in addition to the “(game progress) main process” which is a process for repeating each game. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, drive control of the reel 31, transmission processing of an external signal, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed for the digits 1 to 9 in which one digit is turned on for each interruption process. For example, in this interrupt processing, only digit 1 is turned on, and in the next interrupt processing, digit 2 is turned on. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of one in nine interruption processes. Not limited to such dynamic lighting, static lighting in which a signal line is connected for each digit may be performed.

  Therefore, when it is time to light the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes due to the interrupt processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

  In a game in which the instruction function is to be activated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 operates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Press order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small part B1 is won, the pressing order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” in the present embodiment.

During the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game becomes
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small role C group is won (when the small role B group is won, the pattern function is displayed, so that the instruction function is not operated.)
2) RT2: At the time of winning the replay B group, at the time of winning the small role B group, and at the time of winning the small role group 3) RT3: At the time of winning the replay C group, the time of winning the small role B group, and the time of winning the small role C group. .

Further, as described above, when the small role A is won, the instruction function is operated as a dummy. At the time of winning of the small role A, the small role 01 wins regardless of the pushing order. Therefore, even if any of the pushing orders is designated, there is no disadvantage to the player. Will not harm the fairness of
Specifically, at the time of winning the small part A, selecting one of the pressing order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like can be cited.

  Further, when the player wins the small role E1 while approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small win E1 is elected, and the advantageous section is not added when the small win E2 is elected. Therefore, the small section E2 during the advantageous section is always elected. Displaying the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, when the small win E1 in the advantageous section is elected, the advantageous section is always added, so that the display of the middle cherry can give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle cherries in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small role E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, either the winning of the small role E1 or the winning of the small role E2 is performed. Also, the first right stop is displayed by operating the instruction function, and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. For this reason, for example, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes “1400 games” or more and the player wins the small role E1 (and E2), the first right stop is displayed by operating the indicating function. .
Note that, as described above, the “operation of the instruction function” in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the indicating function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order may be performed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games related to the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
When determining to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is consumed, and when the count value becomes “0”, the advantageous section ends. Note that the decrement may be performed from a game that has shifted to the advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games determined at that time (for example, “100”), and after the 1BB game is over. An initial value may be set.
Further, when an advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined that the advantageous section is to be added, and when the number of added games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to "55". 85 ”. Then, every time one game is consumed, "84", "83",... Are decremented by one game.

  When the 1BBA operation is being performed (excluding the one based on the overlapping winning of 1BBA and the small role D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when the 1BBB operation is being performed, the advantageous section counter 69a is operated. The counting by is interrupted. The reason for this setting is that, in the present embodiment, the addition of the advantageous section can be executed during the 1BBA operation (excluding the one based on the overlapping winning of the 1BBA and the small role D). Since no extra is executed, the above setting is made to balance the two (so that the player during 1BBB operation during the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player during 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued during the operation of either 1BBA or 1BBB, or the advantageous section counter may be maintained during the operation of either 1BBA or 1BBB. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside), respectively. When 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when the player wins 1BB, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is not changed until it is notified that the player has won 1BB. Alternatively, the game may be decremented by one game.

In addition, in the normal section, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB is won (for example, an overlap winning of 1BBA and the small role E1), and a transition to an advantageous section is made based on the winning of the condition device. In this case, the standby section is started from the next game (only when a standby section is provided) and the inside of 1BB is set.
On the other hand, when the condition apparatus in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won, the condition section is in the advantageous section and inside 1BB, and the addition of the advantageous section is not performed in 1BB inside the advantageous section.

Therefore, when the player has won the condition device including 1BB in the normal section and has not yet shifted to the advantageous section due to the shift to the standby section, a longer tantalizing effect (informing whether or not the player has won 1BB). It is considered that it is not disadvantageous for the player to output such an effect (for example, a continuous effect over a plurality of games). This is because, during the standby section, since there is no advantage section, the count (decrement) by the advantage section counter 69a and the count (decrement) of the upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the condition apparatus in which the 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won and the inside becomes inside, even after the inside becomes inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b to be described later are performed. Is counted (decremented). In this case, since an additional advantageous section cannot be added, it is preferable that the 1BB winning be notified early without performing an unnecessarily long stir-up effect.
More specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former fanning effect is set to four games, and the average number of games of the latter fanning effect is set to two games.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small win E1 is solely won and a transition is made to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of one small win B group win, the advantageous section counter 69a counts in the present embodiment. Do not set a value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small win B group is won. Then, when the player wins the small win B group and activates the instruction function, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the current game, and the advantageous section is ended.

  When the number of times of operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small part B group is previously provided as an end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small part B group is provided. “1” may be set. Then, once the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.

By providing an advantageous section flag or the like and setting it to “ON” during the advantageous section, it can be determined whether or not the current game is an advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 plays the role of an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section in the current game is satisfied, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”, the eighth bit in the digit data of the segment data of the digit 2 is set to “0”. Is performed.

  If it is decided to win the small win E1 alone and shift to the advantageous zone, the game shifts to the advantageous zone in which the number of games is fixed, or by the activation of the instruction function at the time of one small win B group win. A lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (a so-called fake-like advantageous section). Here, how the probability is assigned to the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small role E1 alone and decide to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect for stimulating which advantageous section has been shifted is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when the small role B group is won, if the instruction function is activated in the game, and if the advantageous section is terminated by one activation of the instruction function, the advantageous section is terminated with the current game (the advantageous section). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when shifting to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small win B group is won before the predetermined number of games is played from the start of the advantageous section.

  Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, or sets "1500" at the start of the advantageous section), and thereafter, the upper limit counter 69b performs the advantageous operation. Until the section ends, the count value is decremented by "1" for each game without interrupting the count in any case. Also, for example, the counting is continued even during the 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. Note that the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by “1” from “0” for each game.

  Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is a value exceeding “0”, the advantageous section controller 69 sets the advantageous section in this game to ( Forced) is completed (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to “0”), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (the 8th bit in the digit 2 segment data is updated to “0”). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section ends even if the 1BB operation is being performed.

Also, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least once the instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is three). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once at the time of winning of the small win B group. Even if the instruction function operation game has not been executed at the time of the winning of the group, or even if it has never been won in the small role B group, the advantageous section is (forced) ended in the current game and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, the number of remaining games or the number of digested games may be image-displayed on the image display device 23 with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to external central terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, and the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number at the time of the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes a different value according to the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, and the end of 1BB operation.

  Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. Then, after updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) required for the effect output from the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 1-bit data of 8 bits. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating a type of the control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. Further, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it is “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, the two-byte data "00110011/00000001"("/" indicates the space between the first control command and the second control command and is not actually present) obtained by combining them is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data, and the second control command is the RWM53, as in the case of the RT. Is the data stored in.

  The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. This is because, for example, when the pushing order bell is won, the correct answering pushing order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to improper conduct. On the other hand, there is no possibility of the above-mentioned misconduct regarding the accessory condition apparatus number. Therefore, for example, when the 1BBA has been won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

When the player wins the condition device having the correct pushing order during the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pushing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, at the time of winning the condition device in the advantageous section that does not have the correct pushing order, the acquisition of the pushing order instruction number and the storage in the RWM 53 are not performed. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after the clear is “A0”. Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except during the winning of the condition device having the correct answer push order in the advantageous section.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is won, the pressing order instruction number is not obtained or stored in the RWM 53.

Then, at the time of winning the condition device having the correct answering push order in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 sends the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80.
The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information of “A0” as the pressing order instruction number except during the winning of the condition device having the correct pressing order in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when it is not during the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. Note that when it is not in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 may uniformly transmit the pushing order instruction number of “A0”. The number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as an RT number, a pressing order instruction number, an effect group number, and an accessory condition device number. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 or each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21) , What kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22, and what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23) are determined by lottery.

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games) and the like are displayed as images. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when the player wins the small role B1 in the game during the advantageous section and receives the control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", the correct pressing order is "left first stop" or "1-O". For example, the content which the player can easily know the correct push order, such as "-O", is notified. Note that, when the push order instruction number of “A0” is received during the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

  Furthermore, the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device was actually won, but it can be said that rough control information is included. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number “5” is received, the sub-control board 80 cannot know which of the small combination A, the small combination B, or the small combination C has been won. . However, it can be known as to which of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group has been won. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow" which is a color corresponding to "bell".

Here, when the small role A is won, the small role 01 always wins, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before is operated.
On the other hand, when the small portion B or the small portion C group is won during the normal section, a bell (yellow) effect may be performed when the winning of the small portion 01 is determined, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the second stop switch 42 or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

However, if the output timing of the effect at the time of winning the small part A and the output timing of the effect at the time of winning the small part B group or the small part C group are different, based on the difference in the timing, the small part A Since it is possible to determine whether the winning combination or the small combination B group or the small combination C group is won, it is possible to count the number of wins of the small combination A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small role A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the push order is correct in the small role B group or the small role C group, for example, immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated. In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group is won, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . As described above, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group are set to the same ("5"), and the sub-control board 80 that has received the direct play group number has, for example, a first stop switch. If the effect is designed to be output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are different (“5” to “7”). Design that is more efficient than the previous case (in the latter case, when an effect group number of any of "5" to "7" is received, an effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example). Must be designed so that the efficiency is low).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control commands for the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (on the main side). 2 is a time chart showing notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Also, during the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a control command of the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. If the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, during the advantageous section, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number by operating the instruction function.

  In “Example 1” of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, first, the instruction function is operated by the main control board 50 to display the push order instruction information. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition apparatus number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the accessory condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  When the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices (first stop) as in the present embodiment, the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated by the image display device 23 to notify the correct answer pressing order. Until the end. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is a so-called six selection, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is performed until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. As in the present embodiment, even when the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, and the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 ends. It goes without saying that effects other than the correct pushing order, for example, display of an image (character display or the like) unique to the advantageous section are continued.

Further, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 is performed until the winning determination is performed on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the correct answer order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the indication of the order information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquired number display LED 78 after the display of the push order instruction information is “00” (the upper digit and the lower digit indicate “0”), “* 0” (the upper digit is turned off (*), and the lower digit is “ 0 is displayed), "**" (the upper and lower digits are turned off), "-" (in both the upper and lower digits, only the segment G is turned on) and the like.

  In “Example 2” of FIG. 24, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80, the activation of the instruction function causes the acquired number display LED 78 to display the pressing order instruction information. The number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. After receiving the effect group number and the accessory condition apparatus number, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order.

  In “Example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition apparatus number, the sub control board 80 determines the correct pressing order on the image display device 23. Then, at the moment (or immediately before) when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed, the main control board 50 displays the pushing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In the above Examples 1 and 2, the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at a timing earlier than the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the activation of the instruction function (display of the push-order instruction information) by the main control board 50.

  In “Example 4” of FIG. 25, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80 are performed at substantially the same timing. . In the case of controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after a lapse of “N” ms after transmitting the push order instruction number or the accessory condition apparatus number from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction The display of the information is started), and the sub-control board 80 controls to start the notification of the correct answering order after the elapse of “N” ms after receiving the pushing order instruction number or the accessory condition apparatus number. It is mentioned.

24 and 25 show four examples, it is preferable that the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) be performed after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . After the main control board 50 activates the instruction function, it is preferable that the sub-control board 80 notifies the pressing order. By setting in this way, when the main control board 50 transmits an erroneous push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 reports a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the pressing order instruction information has already been displayed by the main control board 80, the player notices an error in the notification by the sub control board 80, and the player may not be disadvantaged. Absent.
The operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed until the winning determination, but may be performed until the third reel 31 stops.

  Subsequently, the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the case of notifying the correct pressing order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from the top to the bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and an example of notification of the image display device 23. Note that the example in FIG. 26 is a timing corresponding to “Example 1” in FIG.

In the instruction function operation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small win B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which “1OO” is displayed.

Next, when the first (initial) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the answer is the correct push order, the image display device 23 produces an effect that the push order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display in the correct pressing order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, since the pressing order correct / incorrect is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, the notification (image display) on the correct pressing order is terminated when the first stop switch 42 is operated. In the case of six choices, it is possible to keep informing the correct answering order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  In the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is continued until a winning determination is made (the same applies to Example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, when the incorrect answering order is entered, the operation of the indicating function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be ended similarly to the notification of the correct answering order by the image display device 23. . Also, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, an instruction is issued (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable that the operation of the instruction function be terminated after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the pressing order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, needless to say, the operation of the instruction function may be ended at the same time as the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

It should be noted that, even if the push order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to report the correct push order.
However, if the pressing order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 stop, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small role 01 wins and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 indicates that nine medals have been paid out from the display “= 1” of the pressing order instruction information. It changes to “09” as shown. When one winning combination is won due to a pressing order error or the like, "01" is displayed, and when a winning combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. Note that, from the display of the pressing order instruction information “= 1” to the display of the medal payout number “09”, “= 1” → “00” (“00” is displayed to temporarily reset the display. ) → “09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper and lower digits are turned off to reset the display once) → “09”.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or cares and inserts medals to bet medals, the display content is changed to “00” in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (May be "**").

In FIG. 1, a management information control unit 72 is a unit that controls (stores, calculates, displays, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is:
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Ratio of consecutive characters (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Characters ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Ratio of consecutive characters (cumulative)
(5) Ratio of official goods (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, the "advantageous section ratio (advantaged section stay ratio)" refers to the ratio of the advantageous section to the entire game section (normal section + standby section + advantaged section) (i.e., staying in the advantageous section for all game sections). Percentage). For example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is "7000" in the game section having the number of games of "10000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)".
In this embodiment, one set is set to “400” game times. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, “6000” game times is set as “total”, and each ratio at “6000” game times is calculated.

  Furthermore, the “total” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, is counted for at least “175000” or more game times. When the total is less than "175000" games, the cumulative value is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when it is "175000" or more games, the total is displayed by lighting display. Even after the total number of games reaches “175000” or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

The “continuous bonus ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the first special bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “the number of obtained medals during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of obtained medals is indicated.
For example, when the number of obtained medals in the number of games “6000” is “2000”, and among them, the number of obtained medals when the “first-class special role (RB)” is activated is “500”, The object ratio (6000 games) "is" 25 (%) ".

Further, the “principal ratio” indicates a ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Here, the "casings" include the second-class special services (CB), 2BB (second-class-cassette continuous operation device, CB continuously operated), SB, in addition to the first-class special services described above. (Single bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the accessory ratio has the same value as the continuous accessory ratio.

  FIGS. 27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, a 4-digit numerical value starting with “F” indicates the address of the RWM 53. A buffer (storage area) for 1-byte (8-bit) data is provided for each address.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to an advantageous section. As information on the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of an advantageous section game number corresponding value, a total number of games, and an advantageous section ratio. The storage area for the value of the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes (“F004” to “F001”), and the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes (“F007” to “F005”). Is 1 byte (“F008”).

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is consumed.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, each time one game is consumed, the value of the number of times of the advantageous section game is multiplied by 100 (referred to as “advantageous section game number corresponding value”) so as to be updated. For this reason, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

In the present embodiment, an object is to store at least “175000” times or more as the total number of games. This is for displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio when the total number of games is “175000” or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in a binary number, it can be stored in three bytes of "24" digits.

Also, assuming that all of the total number of games “175000 (D)” is an advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “175000 × 100” (D), which is “25 digits” in binary. , Three bytes of "24" digits are not enough, but four bytes of "32" digits can be stored.
For the above reasons, the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous sections is 4 bytes.

The total number of games is incremented by "1" for each game, but is not limited to this, and a value other than "1" (a value corresponding to the total number of games) is added. Is also good.
On the other hand, since the maximum value of the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)”, the value is a binary number of “7” digits, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

When the total number of games continues to be updated for each game and the number of games, when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, “FFFFFF (H)”, approximately 16.78 million in decimal notation), At this point, the counting ends, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "+100" added for each game during the advantageous section. Even if all games are assumed to be advantageous sections, the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. It is possible to count up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is completed, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also completed.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by “advantageous section game number corresponding value / total number of games” (as will be described later, actual subtraction is performed and division is not performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 100 times the number of advantageous section games, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. The calculation is made possible by
In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio stores an integer, and the fractional part is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is “1100 (D)” and the value of the corresponding value of the advantageous section game is “56000 (D)”, the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, and “F008” includes “ 00110010 (B) ”is stored.

  Also, the advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, but, for example, when there is a display request of the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total number of games, It may be stored in “F008”. Then, a decimal number based on the value stored in “F008” is displayed as an advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a buffer that stores data on the total number of payouts. When a medal is paid out by winning a small role, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas (01 to 15 sets) each including 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts for 400 games. For example, when a winning combination of nine is awarded and nine payouts are made, “9 (D)” is added to the total number of paid outs.
Here, in the slot machine according to the rules, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be “15” or less, and assuming that 15 payouts are made in each game, “400” games are required in 400 games. Becomes Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in a binary number, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, when a payout is made from the first game to the 400th game, the payout number is stored in the 01th set (“F012” and “F011”). From the next 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02th set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

Further, a storage area (3 bytes) of the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 payouts have been made in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is a 17-digit binary number, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, the total number of payouts in the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in “F031” to “F02F”.
When the game reaches the 6000th game, the number of payouts for the number of 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (each 2 bytes). In addition, the total value is 6000 games.
Next, when the game shifts to the 6001th game, the 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) of the 01th set is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer. Go. From the 6000 game to the 6399 game, the total payout number (3 byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

When the addition to the 2 byte data of the 01 set is completed, the total payout number of 15 sets is calculated (adding each 2 byte data of the 01 set to the 15 set), and The calculated total payout number of 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above, at the 6401 game and thereafter, when shifting to the 6401 game, the 02th set of 2-byte data (“F014” and “F013”) is cleared, and the 6401 game to 6800 game are stored in this buffer. The total payout number up to is stored.
In the above method, the total payout number of the 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all the 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number of the 15 sets is calculated. It may be updated to that value.

The total number of payouts (total) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The reason why the total number of payouts is obtained is to calculate the respective ratios (such as the later-described continuous bonus item operation ratio) when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the total number of payouts is kept stored after the elapse of 175,000 games, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of the three bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 155,000 medals have been paid out for each game of 175,000 times, the number is 22 in a binary number, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a buffer of the RWM 53 that stores data on the number of payouts related to the continuous bonus item.
As shown in FIG. 29, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01th set is “F043 (most significant digit)” to “F041 (least significant digit)”. .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the number of paid-out medals at the time of the continuous accessory operation by 100 (referred to as a “paid-out number corresponding value”). For example, when 10 winning combinations are won and 10 winnings are paid out when the continuous winning combination is activated, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
Note that storing the value multiplied by 100 instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of times of the advantageous section game. This is for the purpose of calculation.

Further, in each 3-byte data, a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of operating the continuous character during 400 games is stored. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01st set (“F043” to “F041”). I do. From the next 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02th set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in a row of 400 games, the payout number corresponding value is "600000 (D)", which is 20 digits in a binary number. Can be stored.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the continuous bonus actuation of a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a payout number corresponding value between 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in the 6000 game, the payout number corresponding value is "9000000 (D)", which is 24 digits in binary, and is therefore 3 bytes. It can be stored.

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the number-of-payout-corresponding-number-of-payments-for-continuous-cassette-actuation operation with less than 6000 games. Then, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value between the 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (each 3 bytes). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the continuous bonus item operation of the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is a total value for 6000 games.
When the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) of the 01th set is cleared, and the number of payouts in the buffer during the continuous character operation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is cleared in this buffer. The corresponding values are stored. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15 consecutive sets is maintained without being changed.

  Then, when the three-byte data of the 01 set is determined and the 6400 game game is determined, a total of 15 sets corresponding to the payout number at the time of the continuous character actuation for the 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data of the 01 th set to the 15 th set is calculated). Addition), and the calculated value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15 consecutive sets is updated.

Similarly to the above, at the 6401 game and thereafter, when shifting to the 6401 game, the 02th set of 3-byte data (“F046” to “F044”) is cleared, and the 6401 game to 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Up to this point, the 3-byte data of the 02th set is updated.
In addition, in the above method, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15th set is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the continuous value of the total of 15 sets is continuously updated. The value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative number of consecutive payouts when operating the successive bonuses (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative value of the number of payouts when the continuous bonuses are activated. This is for calculating the continuous accessory operation ratio when the number is 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative payout amount corresponding to the number of consecutive bonuses is kept stored even after the 175,000 game has elapsed, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 15 medals are continuously paid out in each game, each game "1500 (D)" is continuously added, so that 4 bytes can store up to about 2.86 million games.

  In addition, the continuous bonus item operation ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is “continuous bonus item operation payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (“ F070 ”to“ F06E ”) / total number of paid out 6000 games (FIG. 28). The buffer stores the values of “F031” to “F02F”.

Further, the continuous bonus character operation ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is calculated as “cumulative continuous bonus material payout amount corresponding value (“ F074 ”to“ F071 ”) / total total payout number (“ F034 ”in FIG. 28). ) To “F032”).
The above ratio stores up to the maximum value “100 (D)” in decimal, so that it can be stored in one byte.
It is also possible to update the continuous role actor ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role actor ratio (cumulative total) for each game. For example, calculation is performed when there is a display request for these ratios. Alternatively, the calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”) and the value thereof may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a buffer of the RWM 53 that stores data relating to the number of payouts of the special items. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the bonus, as well as the buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the continuous bonus, is provided. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the bonus has the same configuration as the buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the continuous bonus.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing each 3-byte data as a value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated, and a value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated for a total of 6000 games (15 sets) are set. It has a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing a total value of the number of coins to be paid when the accessory is activated. Further, two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing the operating ratio of the accessory are provided, one for 6000 games and the other for accumulation.
The method of storing in these buffers is the same as in the case of the continuous accessory operation, and a description thereof is omitted.

In addition, since a continuous bonus item corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, if a medal is paid out during 1BB operation, the medal is paid out in the continuous bonus item operation payout number corresponding value shown in FIG.
In addition, when a medal is paid out during the operation of all the bonuses including the consecutive bonuses, the bonus is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated shown in FIG. 30.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous accessory, is provided as an accessory. In such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. Are the same as the values stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer. In this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes for each of the 01st set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of the 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, the payout number corresponding value is stored in three bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from the first game to the 6000th game, as in FIG. 29.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total payout number from the first game to the 6000th game, the calculation is performed by adding each 3-byte data of 01 set to 15 sets.

Next, values corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the sixteenth set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
Then, at the 6401th game, the 01-set 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the payout number corresponding values from the 6401 to 6800 games are converted to the 01-set 3-byte data. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value of the total of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401 game items and the 6800 game items, the 3-byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets is added and calculated.
Further, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts of 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated at the time of the 6800 game, the 3-byte data of 1 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.
In this way, among the 16 sets, the 3-byte buffer of any one set is set as the currently updated 3-byte buffer, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout number corresponding value of the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Also, in the initialization of the predetermined storage area when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared), the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. You. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 while the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Can be migrated. The above-described initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change is executed before the set value can be changed based on the operation of the setting switch 13 (setting change mode).

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized and is maintained.
Here, the “unrecoverable error” refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed. For example,
1) When the read set value is not in the range of the settings 1 to 6 (abnormal set value),
2) As a result of determining the stop symbol, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed (a symbol combination error),
3) Abnormal update of random numbers determined for each interrupt process,
4) When the power-off recovery data is not a normal value.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. This clears the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data of each buffer, set value information, RT information, and winning condition device information in FIGS. 27 to 30). Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11. For example, there are a medal clogging error, a medal retention error, a medal illegal passing error, an abnormality of the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality of the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality of the payout sensor 37, and an abnormal medal insertion error.
When a recoverable error occurs, the contents of the error are displayed, and the main processing is stopped. If it is determined that the error has been resolved, the process is restarted.

Subsequently, an update process of the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number will be described. In the following flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is abbreviated as “advantageous section corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 is an example in which the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are updated using a register. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 1 of a portion surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by a dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 of a part. FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are updated without using a register.

  FIG. 32 is executed at the end of each game, for example, at the end of the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes, the total is 7 bytes, which is usable. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (the data of “F007” in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes (the data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower two bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2 byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding “1” in step S105. For example, if the data of the lower 2 bytes is “FFFF (H)” before the start of this flowchart, overflow occurs due to the addition of “1” in step S105 (the flag register (F register built in the main CPU 55). ) Becomes "1"). If it is determined that overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step S107. If it is determined that overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding “1” in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether or not an overflow has occurred. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the overflow occurs is “0”. It has become.
In this embodiment, the “0” bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry-down or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the total game count upper byte register, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in the present embodiment is counted by 3 bytes, when the 3 bytes are full, specifically, when the value becomes “FFFFFF (H)”, no further addition is possible. Is determined to have reached the upper limit. After adding “1” to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when an overflow actually occurs in the A register value (when the carry flag = “1”). is there. It can be rephrased as when the A register value is “0” (when the zero flag is “1”). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games in the present embodiment becomes full of 3 bytes and becomes approximately 16.78 million decimal numbers, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed for each game, but for each game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. It is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on or off. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is “1”, thereby determining whether or not the data is in the advantageous section. It is.
If it is determined in step S109 that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110. If it is determined that the vehicle is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S114 without updating the value corresponding to the number of times of the advantageous section game.

  In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2 byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, since “100 (D)” is added at a time, overflow occurs in two bytes only when “100 (D)” is added to “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))”. )) Is added to become “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. If it is determined that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112. If it is determined that overflow does not occur, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, "1" is added to the upper two-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in “F004” to “F001” in FIG. As a result, the advantageous section game number corresponding value (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in “F007” to “F005” in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not become 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted about 167.8 million times, but assuming that all of the total number of games is an advantageous section, even if the value of about 167.8 million is multiplied by 100, This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, in step S112, even if "1" is added to the upper two-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, correct calculation processing can be realized without determining whether overflow has occurred. And simplification of the arithmetic processing can be realized.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is The process according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in “F007” to “F005” of the RWM 53 remains “FFFFFF (H)”, and before and after the start of this flowchart. No change occurs in the data of the total number of games.

Next, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

When the process proceeds to step S121 after step S112, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to “F004” and “F003” in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to “F002” and “F001” in FIG.
Next, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated collectively by 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in “F007”, “F006”, and “F005” in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
When the process proceeds to step S131 after step S112, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated by 4 bytes at a time. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001” in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated collectively by 3 bytes, as in the specific example 1.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 35, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that the process proceeds to step S131 even when it is determined in step S109 that it is not during the advantageous section, and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of times of the advantageous section game is not added by “100 (D)”, but is based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in steps S103 and S104 in FIG. 27, "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 described above are examples in which the total game count and the advantageous section game count corresponding value are updated (used) via the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games is updated without going through a register.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower two bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, in FIG. 27, “1” is added to the data of “F006” and “F005”.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005", it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1". The determination may be made based on whether or not the data of “F006” and “F005” has become “0000 (H)”. If it is determined that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203. If it is determined that overflow does not occur, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, “1” is added to the upper one byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, “1” is added to the data of “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is that adding "1" in step S203 causes overflow in "F007", and determines whether the carry flag has become "1" and determines whether the carry flag has become "1". It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that it may be determined whether or not the data of “F007” has become “0 (H)”, and if the data has become “0 (H)”, it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper one byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, an overflow also occurs in the high-order byte in the addition in step S203, which is "0 (H)". By subtracting "1" from this value, The data before adding “1” is returned to “FF (H)”.
Next, proceeding to step S206, "1" is also subtracted from the lower two bytes of the total number of games. Accordingly, the values of “F006” and “F005” become “FFFF (H)”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. When it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to the present flowchart ends because there is no need to update the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, “100 (D)” is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, ie, “F002” and “F001” in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of “100 (D)” to the RWM 53, first, the data of “F002” and “F001” are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" are updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

  In the next step S209, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the calculation in step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become “1”, and when the carry flag has become “1”, it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that an overflow has not occurred, the process according to this flowchart ends. In step S210, “1” is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, ie, “F004” and “F003” in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of times of game and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored, to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply use the value of “number of advantageous section game times 回 数 total number of games”. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only perform an operation in two bytes, and cannot execute a division of a numerical value of two bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games = x and the total number of games = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
by = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
As described above, the number of times “> 0 (greater than“ 0 ”) is obtained as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y is“ 3 ”, and the quotient of“ x ÷ y ”is“ 3 ”. It can be calculated that there is. Then, in the present embodiment, the fraction below the decimal point is rounded down, so the advantageous section ratio is calculated as “3” in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section ratio calculation process.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in the register. As described above, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores data of “F007” D register: Stores data of “F006” E register: Stores data of “F005” B register: Stores data of “F004” C register: Stores data of “F003” H register: Stores data of “F002” L register: Stores data of “F001”

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, in which the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. This processing clears the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 (to “0”).
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, where the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games), and the operation result is calculated. Store in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S304, in which it is determined whether a carry-down has occurred. As a result of the operation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), when the carry flag is not raised (when the carry flag ≠ “1”), it is determined to be “No”.
If it is determined that the carry flag is raised (there is a carry), the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. If it is "0", subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the operation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the value of the A register (the upper one byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the value of the BC register (the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than “0”, that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. When the carry flag is set, "Yes" is determined in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in “F008” is stored in the HL register, and “1” is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above processing (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section ratio calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value stored in “F001” to “F007” and the total number of games is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, each time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed once, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by “1”. That is, the number of executions (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is an advantageous section ratio.

  In the above description, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (the value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and defined as the advantageous section ratio (%). By repeating (subtraction), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated. be able to.

  More specifically, the value of the number of consecutive payouts during the operation of the 6000 games (15 sets) (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts of the 6000 games (15 sets) (FIG. 28) , "F031" to "F02F"), and by repeating the same subtraction as above, the quotient of "the value of the number of consecutive payouts at the time of activation of the 6000 game / the total number of payouts of the 6000 game" is calculated. The value is stored as “F075” in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, based on the total number of consecutive payouts corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “ The quotient of “cumulative number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the consecutive bonuses ÷ total number of payouts of the cumulative total” is calculated, and the value is stored in “F076” in FIG. 29 as the continuous bonuses operation ratio (cumulative).

  Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the actor's operation of the 6000 game (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of the 6000 game (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28) Calculate the quotient of “a value corresponding to the number of payouts of the 6000 game during the operation of the accessory” ÷ the total number of payouts of the 6000 game ”, and store that value as“ accessory operation ratio (6000 game) ”in“ F0B5 ”in FIG. .

  In addition, the total number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28) are used to calculate the “total”. Calculate the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory / the total number of payouts of the total, and store the value as “accessory operation ratio (total)” in “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, the “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, the “principal ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, and the “continuous bonuses” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of "ratio (cumulative)" and "accessory ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by an information type and a numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
The five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these pieces of information. Other pieces of information may be displayed, or some of the pieces of information shown in FIG. Only the information may be displayed. Further, the display is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason why the management information is displayed as described above is as follows.
For amusement machines, those that conform to the type test specified by the Futen Law are allowed to install a hall. Here, in the type test, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio at the time of executing the 6000 game do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the role ratio and 60% for the continuous ratio). There are certain rules.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of bonuses and the ratio of consecutive bonuses for the amusement machine applied shall be attached. May be required).

In this case, the clerk of the hall or a third party can easily confirm whether the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specification as the compatible gaming machine (whether or not it is illegal). It is desired to.
For example, a gaming machine that has a numerical value that deviates from the compatible gaming machine may be different from the compatible gaming machine.In this case, request the manufacturer to check the gaming machine, etc. Thus, fraud and the like can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function of calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily and surely confirm whether or not the management information matches the management information.

  In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on), the setting key is inserted, and the setting key is turned 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is so-called setting confirmation. For this reason, the set value display LED 73 displays the current set value. During setting confirmation, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated, since it is different from during setting change.

Then, in this embodiment, if the setting switch 13 is pressed once during the setting confirmation, the “advantageous section ratio” is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, digits 6 and 7 display information types. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is “50 (%)”, and “50” is displayed on digits 7 and 8. Therefore, “U750” is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
When the numerical value of the management information is displayed, it is expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of “continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is set to “45”. (%) ".
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of “accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and the type of this information is displayed as “y7”. In this example, the ratio is set to “60 (%). ) ".

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of “continuous accessory ratio (total)” is displayed, and “A6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “48 (%)”. it's shown.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of the “accessory ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “52 (%)”. it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display, and the advantageous section “U750” is displayed.
Further, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the first display, the advantageous section ratio “U750” is displayed.

Further, while the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the management information is continuously displayed (the digits 6 to 9 are continuously lit), and the closing of the front door is detected by the door switch 15. At this time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on. When the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on only when the opening of the front door is detected, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed.

Also, regardless of whether the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected or not, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is 1500 interrupts) 38), the display contents described in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information in which the ratio depends on the set value such as the continuous character ratio.
On the other hand, while the hall is open (when the player can play), the possibility of opening the front door is high.
a) an error that occurs when the medal in the hopper 35 is determined to be empty,
b) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have stayed in the medal selector,
c) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have stayed in the payout port of the hopper 35,
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-housing provided next to the hopper 35 and for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full). Error belonging to an error).

When such an error occurs, if the person in charge of the hall opens the front door, the player may be able to see the management information and guess the set value. In order to solve such a problem, when at least one of the errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occurs, the lighting display by the management information display LED 74 is not performed. It is desirable to be configured so that it is turned off. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned errors a) to d), and it is also possible to configure so that the illumination display by the management information display LED 74 is not performed when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned irrecoverable error occurs, the credibility of the management information to be displayed is suspected, and after the irrecoverable error is cleared, the data on which the management information to be displayed is based is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door opening error always occurs. You can display the information.

The information types “U7”, “y6”, “y7”, “A6”, and “A7” are examples, and an arbitrary display is performed using a two-digit alphabet, a symbol, a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Further, in the above example, the numerical value example is different between the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, but when only the continuous accessory is provided as in the present embodiment, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio have the same value. Becomes

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode is shifted to the management information display mode and “U7 (advantage section) Is read, and displayed on digits 6 and 7. More specifically, if “U7” is displayed, the segment data is “00111110 (B)” and “00100111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value, for example, in the case of an advantageous section ratio, the data of “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, the data stored in “F008” is “00110010”. When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)”.

  Also, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio flashes. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. As described above, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 games”.

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, display is performed in a pattern in which light-off and light-up are repeated at intervals of "0.5 seconds", or light-off time is repeated "0.5 seconds" and light-up time is repeated "1 second". Display in a pattern. When the lighting time is set longer than the lighting time, the display time of the management information can be extended and the lighting of the hall or the like is dim compared with the case where the lighting time is set to the same time as the lighting time. The visibility can be improved even under the circumstances.
Since the display pattern may be made different so that it is possible to determine whether or not the game has reached the "175000" game, not only the blinking or the lighting but also the display of the information type "U7" may be changed to "U7"(" A display different from “175000” game or more ”, for example,“ U1 ”(less than“ 175000 ”game) may be displayed. Alternatively, if the game is less than "175000", "U7" may be displayed blinking, and the numerical value may be displayed lit.

In the same manner as described above, when displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games does not reach the “6000” game, the continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio are respectively displayed. The numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the “6000” game, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, in the case of displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the game has reached the "6000" game, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Further, similarly, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), respectively. The numerical value of the ratio (cumulative) of the accessory is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical values of the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are illuminated.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. 27 is read, and the “175000” game is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display pattern has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio in a distinguishable manner (e.g., different display modes) as to whether or not the number is 6000 games or more and 175,000 games or more. Has the following advantages.
For example, when judging whether or not an unauthorized gaming machine is based on management information on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio, the management information indicates how many times the game has been played. , It is possible to more accurately determine whether the game machine is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in the 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 175,000 games or more and the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%), the determination as to whether or not the illegal section is illegal is different. . It is sufficiently possible that the value of the advantageous section ratio in the 1000 games has not converged yet. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in the 175,000 game is a value for a sufficient number of games, and it is considered that the value converges. Therefore, the latter can be determined to have a high possibility of fraud.

In this way, even if the values are the same, as the number of games increases, the value converges to the design value. More accurate judgment can be made.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the display is blinking, and when the total number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display is lit. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the total number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, a blinking display may be used.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. With this setting, there is no need to separately provide the digits 6 to 9, so that the cost can be reduced.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the stored number display LED 76.
The example of FIG. 39 shows an example having nine medals as credits. Therefore, initially, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “09”.
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the stored number display LED 76 does not change (because the door open error is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

  Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the stored number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)”. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “45” of the “continuous bonus ratio (6000 game)” is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Note that, in the example of FIG. 39, the arrow is shown so as to shift from the display of “50” to the display of “y6”. Of course (the same applies to other figures).

  Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y6” or “45” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y7” indicating that the ratio is “government ratio (6000 games)”, When the predetermined time has elapsed, a numerical value “60” of “combination ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "y7" and "60" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y7” or “60” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A6” indicating “continuous agent ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “A6” or “48” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A7” indicating that it is the “accessory ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "52" of the "accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed in this state, the display returns to the initial display of the advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the display as described above, the display is switched to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the acquired number display LED 78.
The example of FIG. 40 shows an example in which “09” is displayed as the acquired number.
When the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. Accordingly, “dE” indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays “U7” indicating that the ratio is the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, "dE", which is the error content, is displayed again (the door open error is not eliminated only by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate the error display, an error release operation is performed. For example, an error is released by inserting a door key into a key hole provided in a front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this manner, the acquired number “09” before “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 again.

  In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games “6000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are less than the total number of games "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked.

<Second embodiment>
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) is always turned on. , In a lighting state.
When constantly lit, there are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38. For example, updating the management information to be displayed every 5 seconds is mentioned. Specifically, “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “y645” (displayed for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) →. It is mentioned. A digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base unit 1 using the “front door opening / closing axis” (the left side in the figure) as a support axis in FIG. Although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is the same as that of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including the power switch 11, a medal payout device including the hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are accommodated in the base unit 1.
The sub-control board 80 is attached to the inner left side of the base 1. On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 housed inside the board case 16 are attached to the inner rear surface of the base 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the symbol display device, so that when the front door is opened, the state of the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily checked visually. For this purpose, it is attached at a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the system in which the medals in the hopper 35 are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, the hall clerk opens the front door every time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, since the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 when the front door is opened, the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the ratio of the advantageous section of the table where the player is currently playing, the ratio of the consecutive bonuses, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is not easily seen by the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating the board case 16 and the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that it is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the open / close axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. , It is difficult for the player to see.

  In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but is located to the left in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. In FIG. 42, when the position of the management information display LED 74 is set to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (similarly in FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a Is the right end of the board case 16.
In this way, even if the caulking portion 16a is destroyed and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 may be damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. Can be more effectively prevented.

  The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the board case 16 is opened. In addition to the caulking portion 16a, a body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the game machine and the board case 16 is provided. You may have. At this time, when the board case 16 is removed from the gaming machine, it is necessary to break the caulking portion of the main body. Also in this case, similarly to the caulking portion 16a, the position where the main body caulking portion is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the main body caulking portion is broken. In the case of the position (for example, the upper end portion of the board case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is set to the second position (for example, the lower portion, the right portion with respect to the center portion of the main control board 50) away from the first position. Or the left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged. it can.
Although the position of the caulking portion 16a is set at the right end, the position is not limited to this, and for example, it may be designed as the upper end. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is a lower part, a right part, or a left part with respect to the center of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the caulking part 16a is broken. Or breakage can be prevented.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said Embodiment, For example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 times, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set using variables other than the total number of games, such as 100 games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) Although the advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, the invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (such as an LED) for displaying whether or not the section is an advantageous section may be provided. However, as in the above embodiment, if the existing LED can cover the cost, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. For this reason, the lamp for displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as the lamp is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured from the segment DP of the digit 2 in the stored number display LED 76, but may be configured from the segment DP of the digit 4 in the acquired number display LED 78, for example.

  Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging the advantageous section display LED near the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player aware at the end of the game that the player is in the advantageous section. For example, even if a stored number display LED 76 (segment DP of digit 2 is set as an advantageous section display LED 77) or an acquired number display LED 78 (a segment DP of digit 4 is set as an advantageous section display LED 77) near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous zone display LED 77 near the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player does not notice the shift to the advantageous section without the menu button 25. (Displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)) can be prevented.

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns on / off the power supply. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when the store closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 turned on in the hall, or when it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business on the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). It is mentioned. By performing the setting change, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (data of the advantageous section) of the stored number display LED 76 is also initialized. ".

  (4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in a game that has won the condition device capable of operating the instruction function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even if the game is a condition device that can activate the instruction function during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the operation of the instruction function is “possible”. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, and the number of games of the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed by the determined number of games. Is also good. Then, even if the number of games ends, if the continuation condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game again by lottery or the like. It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is determined based on winning in each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of the small role D or the small role E1). To decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100 is stored as the advantageous section number of games corresponding value. Similarly, the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of the continuous accessory operation and the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of the accessory operation respectively stored a value obtained by multiplying the payout number by 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio, the number of games itself and the number of payouts can be stored without being multiplied by 100. It is not necessarily limited to storing a value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games stores the number of games per se, but is not limited to this, and depending on computational convenience, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value multiplied by a predetermined value (total number of games) (A value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated, the data of the storage area in which the number of games itself and the payout number itself are stored is multiplied by 100, and the above-described subtraction process is repeatedly executed. By executing the processing (for example, FIG. 37), the calculation can be performed.

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous character operation ratio, and the character operation ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games, regardless of whether the management information is displayed, and are stored in predetermined regions of the RWM 53, respectively. You may leave. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory actuation ratio, and the accessory actuation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when there is a display request), the calculation results are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and the calculation is performed. The result may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch, for example, a bet switch 40, or a switch dedicated to display management information may be separately provided.
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are configured as one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by operating the setting change / reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the mode is shifted to the management information display mode on condition that no error occurs.
For example, if a medal staying error in the medal selector has occurred among the recoverable errors, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

  In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed. That is, after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases his / her hand from the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, “U750”, which is the first management information, is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). 9 is turned off). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, "y645", which is the second management information, is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. When the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as above can be performed.

As described above, there are various variations on which switch is used to display the management information and how the operation of the switch displaying the management information is related to the display pattern (display time). However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display pattern of the management information is as follows.
a) a display pattern for constantly displaying management information b) a pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) a front door opened and a predetermined switch D) A pattern in which the management information is displayed when the user operates the button d) A pattern in which the front door is opened, the setting key is inserted to turn on the setting key switch 12, and the management information is displayed when a predetermined switch is operated. Can be
However, when the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed and the operation shifts to the setting change mode, the operation is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the count of the total number of games is executed until the count value of the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the storage capacity has not reached the upper limit.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and the counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The same applies to the total number of payouts.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed such that the advantageous section ratio is equal to or less than “70” (%). For this reason, it is not assumed that the advantageous section ratio in the market exceeds “70” (%). However, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) cannot be denied, for example, when a goto action or the like is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of “F008” storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds “70 (D)”, some warning is output or the display of the advantageous section ratio is performed. That is to make it different from the normal time (display that it is abnormal). For example, in the display of the information type “U7” of the advantageous section ratio, there is a method of alternately flashing the upper digit “U” and the lower digit “7” at high speed.

Similarly, in the case where the design value upper limit is set to, for example, “60 (%)” for the continuous character ratio and the character ratio, if the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, some value is set. A method of outputting a warning or displaying the information type in the same manner as described above may be used.
Alternatively, information on the advantageous section ratio or the like is transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmitting means 70, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%), information on a warning may be transmitted. No.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be “70” (%) or less with respect to all game sections, the other sections can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than “1/32”.
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be always activated when the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery for activating the function is won. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, whether to set the advantageous section to always activate the instruction function, or to set the advantageous section to activate the instruction function only when a lottery to win whether to activate the instruction function is won. , Lottery or the like.

  Further, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (the end of the advantageous section) may be performed when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted at the transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be determined. Alternatively, a transition (fall) lottery from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the lottery is won, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, control is performed such that the advantageous section is unconditionally terminated and the normal section is started.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of two digits, for example. When the setting switch 13 is pressed, for example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, an information type “U7” is displayed, a numerical value “50” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and thereafter, a predetermined time is displayed. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed every time the time elapses.

(12) As the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated by truncating decimals, accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In this sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are values corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, values corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous accessory ratio, and corresponding to the accessory ratio, respectively. ).
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are not limited to numerical values rounded down to the decimal point, but are rounded down to the decimal point, rounded up to the decimal point, and the last digit is `` 5 '' or `` It may be a numerical value or the like that is converted into increments of “10”.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols stopped on the active line is the same when the small win E1 is won and when the small win E2 is won. For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle stop is stopped, the stop appearance of the middle cherry (winning of the small role 36) becomes possible, and at the time of the first stop right, the stop appearance where the middle cherry does not appear. (Small role 38 prize). Therefore, it was not possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and E2 was won, regardless of the presence or absence of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle cherries do not appear, the stop roll may be changed instead.
For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop is made, the middle cherry is made to appear, and when the middle cherry is made, the player determines which of the small roles E1 or E2 has been won. Make it impossible.

  On the other hand, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the right first stop is performed, the middle cherry is controlled so as not to appear as described above, and instead of the middle cherry, the small cherry E1 or E2 is not played. The appearance of a stop roll that allows the player to determine which one has been won can be mentioned.

Specifically, for example, control is performed as follows.
First, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
Then, at the time of the first or left stop of the small win E1 or E2, the small win 36 (middle cherries) can be stopped at the first stop, and at the first right stop of the small win E1, the small win 38 is stopped. On the other hand, the small role 41 is stopped at the first right stop when the small role E2 is won.

  The combination of the symbols of the small role 41 is, for example, "bell A / bell B"-"replay"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank". As a result, the symbols on the middle reel 31 differ between when the small win 38 is stopped and when the small win 41 is stopped. When the small win 38 stops, the “replay” does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when the small win 41 stops, the “replay” always stops on the middle reel 31. As a result, it is possible to determine the winning of the small win 38 (small win E1) or the small win 41 (small win E2).

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 38 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small role E1 is won, and the small role 41 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small role E2 is won. You may. In this way, it is possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and the small wins E2 has been won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped, even at the left or middle first stop.

In addition, for example, the following method can be used.
The small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Also, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36, the small wins 37 and 38 as in the above embodiment. At the time of the first or left stop of the small role E1 or E2, the small role 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the first stop of the small role, and at the time of the first right stop of the small role E1, the small role 38 is operated by the operation timing of the stop switch 42. At the time of the first right stop in the small win E2 winning, the small win 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
Then, when the small win 38 is missed at the time of winning the small win E1 or E2, a combination of different symbols is stopped. In this way, it may be possible to determine whether the small win E1 or E2 has been won.

  (14) When winning the 1BBA + small role E1 and lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 until a predetermined timing of the next game comes, an effect (such as a continuous effect) of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. Is preferred. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that the player knows that the game has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output a continuous production of whether or not a 1BBA (special role) has been won. In addition, when it is determined that the player wins 1BBA + small win E1 and shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after a predetermined timing (see FIG. At timing 2) indicated by 23, the advantage section display LED 77 is turned on until the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small part E1 has won, so that the small part E1 is independently elected and enters the advantageous section. Since it can be seen that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like that fuels whether or not 1BB has been won.

(15) In the present embodiment, when the pressing order is incorrect in the small role group B winning, one winning combination can be won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of small wins that can win a prize at the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order when winning the small win B group may be used. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drop-out rate at the time of incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small part B group is set to 75%, but is not limited to this, and can be set variously, such as 50%.
Further, even when the pressing order is incorrect in the small part C group winning, it is possible to set so that the winning combination is dropped with a certain probability, similarly to the small part B group winning.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of the setting 6 is set to be larger than that of the setting 1, and for example, when the number of games during the 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number, it is advantageous. Added section addition.
However, conversely to the above, during the 1BBA operation, the winning probability of the small win A of the setting 6 is increased and the winning probability of the small winning E2 is reduced with respect to the setting 1, so that the game of the setting 6 is smaller. The number of times (expected value) may be used. In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an additional advantageous section may be added.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a condition device that does not include a special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, when the small combination E1 is independently elected, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantage is set by a predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing described in the above embodiment, and various settings can be made. For example, in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, when the winning determination is completed, when the medal is paid out in the game, when the payout of the medal is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although this does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the replay has been won, the automatic bet is terminated based on the winning in the replay, or the next game (re-game) is started. For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

(18) When "1BBA + Small win E1" is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, the small win 36 can be won, and the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small role E1, the middle cherry can appear, and when the 1BBA winning flag is also standing, the middle cherry does not appear in any pushing order (all win the small role 38). Stop control may be performed as follows.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that the middle cherries cannot be displayed and the player cannot be instigated even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when "1BBA + Small win E1" is won.

On the other hand, even when the player wins the small win E1 alone after the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is “1BBA + small win E1”, so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in the inside, even if the player wins the small role E1 and learns the middle tier cherry after knowing that the player is in the inside, I get the impression that I wasted money. On the other hand, if the above-described stop control is performed, the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, so that it is not necessary to give the player the impression that he / she has been wasted.

In particular, as a combination of symbols of the small role 38, there is "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" (FIG. 11). The pattern 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B" is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above symbols of the small role 38 to appear, it is possible to make it look like a drop-off when the small role B group is won (not a rare role).
The same applies to the case where the player wins "1BBA + Small Winner E2", is inside the 1BBB, wins the small win E1 alone, or goes inside the 1BBB, and wins the small win E2 alone. It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, the non-RT and RT1 have the same replay winning probability (the number is "8978"). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

  (20) In the present embodiment, the process is shifted to RT1 after the end of the 1BBB operation, and a replay E lottery is performed at RT1, and an advantageous section is added by winning the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section to an additional specialization zone (a state where the frequency of addition is high, and a state where the number of additional games is large). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, and the additional specialization zone is continued until the process shifts to RT2. Every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of the replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. Is also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of shifting to a different RT as described above, the same RT may be shifted. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after the end of 1BBB operation. In this case, after the end of the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section to the special zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games and the cumulative total), and the bonuses ratio (6000 games and the cumulative total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, for example, a payout rate.
As a calculation method of the payout rate, for example, the following method is used.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" / "Total number of games excluding replays after replay winning"
b) “(Total number of payouts + number of replay winnings × 3) × 100” ÷ “total number of games”
When a) is adopted, each buffer for storing “total payout number × 100” and “total number of games excluding replays after a replay winning” is provided. When b) is employed, a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning number × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that buffers for “total payout number × 100” and “replay winning number × 300” may be separately provided, and the values of both may be added.

It should be noted that “3” of “the number of times of replay winning × 3” means the number of bets of the game when the replay has won. For example, when the number of bets fluctuates depending on a game state or the like, the value is not limited to “3”, but may be a value (for example, “2” or “1”) bet on the game when a replay wins. There may be games to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, and the number of replay winnings itself (or “the number of replay winnings × the value bet on the game when the replay wins”) may be provided. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Further, as for the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating the subtraction is adopted as in the above-described calculation method.
Then, the payout rate is displayed as one of the management information, and if the payout rate is compared with the payout rate in design, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine. Further, also in this case, if the lighting mode is changed depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more or 175,000 games or more, it is more accurate whether the game machine is a fraudulent game machine. Can be determined.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as “P.” and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. Is used to display the payout rate (a three-digit number).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, when an increment counter is used as the upper limit counter 69b, the following merits are obtained.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit value, for example, when the count value is "1500" in the case of an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Initialized value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of games of the instruction function operation game (when the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role group B), and the like. The value at the time of initialization is optimally “0”. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 that store parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, “F100”, “F101”, “F102”,...

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 accompanying the setting change, and the initialization can be performed by repeatedly performing the process of putting “0” in the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range while shifting the address by one. This is because it can be executed in a simplified process. Note that the parameters that are cleared when the advantageous section becomes the upper limit value are also initialized when the setting is changed.
Note that the address of the RWM 53 that stores parameters to be initialized is regularly assigned (for example, “F100”, “F102”, “F104”,...), And “0” is assigned to the address. Even when initialization is performed by repeating the process of shifting the address while shifting the address by a predetermined value (in the above case, “2”), the process can be executed by a simplified process.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and the count value is “0”, it may be “0” due to the initialization, or the advantageous section may have the upper limit value (1500 game play). ) Is not known from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous section is based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and the data indicating whether or not the advantageous section is present (in a predetermined area of the RWM 53). Must be performed on the basis of the stored information).
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the upper limit only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processing of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of the game of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination processing. .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is continuously displayed, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times during one game. .
Then, it is conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio or the like each time it is displayed.
As described above, the same management information (for example, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times during one game.
(25) The above-described embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Subsequently, a third embodiment and the subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The “instruction game section” refers to a game section in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section.
The “instructed game section” is similar to a conventional AT (abbreviation of “assist time”; “ART” when an AT is executed at an RT having a high replay winning probability). In the following description, the “instructed game section” will be referred to as “AT” as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function operation game" refers to a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, at the time of the replay B group winning, the replay C group winning, and the small role B group winning of the embodiment. , And when the small role C group is won, the instruction function is always activated.
Note that the AT of the present embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (high replay probability), and thus is basically "ART". However, the AT may fall to RT2 due to a mistake in the operation of the stop switch by the player. Even if the vehicle falls from RT3 to RT2, AT is continued. Further, there is a case where the AT is executed at RT other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, an AT at an RT that does not have a high replay probability, such as RT3, is not strictly “ART”. Further, when the vehicle falls from RT3 to RT2 during the AT, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay B group, so that the instruction function is operated to display the correct answer order in order to return to RT3.

On the other hand, "increased the execution frequency" means that the instruction function is not operated at "100%", for example, at 95% when the small role group B or small group C is won. This is a concept that includes
As will be described later, during the designated game period, at the time of winning the small role B group, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. In such a case, it does not mean that the instruction function is always activated, and therefore the provision is made that the execution frequency is increased.

As described above, the designated game section is a game section in which the designated function operation game is executed. Therefore, it is necessary that the designated game section be an advantageous section as a premise. Therefore, the designated game section is always an advantageous section, and the designated game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section are sometimes collectively referred to as “non-advantaged section”). There is no.
In addition, the start and end of the designated game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the designated game section may be started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is started, the designated game section is not immediately started, and the designated game section is started when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the end condition of the indicated game section may be determined at the start of the indicated game section, or the end condition may not be determined at the start of the indicated game section.
In the case where the termination condition of the designated game section is determined before the start of the designated game section, the designated game section may be extended after the designated game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) for determining the designated game section can be cited. For example, firstly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games in the designated game section is set to, for example, “50” games or “100” games.

  Second, there is a case where the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of payouts. If set in this way, the end condition is the same as in the special game. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to, for example, “the number of payouts exceeds 300”.

Thirdly, setting the end condition of the designated game section by the difference number of sheets may be mentioned. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to “the difference number exceeds 200”.
Fourth, the end condition of the designated game section may be set by the number of times of operation of the designated function at the time of winning the small combination B group and the small combination C group (or the small combination B group only). More specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to “the number of times the designated function is activated at the time of winning the small combination B group and the small combination C group is 50 times”. Terminating the designated game section.

When the designated game section is extended in the designated game section determined as described above, the parameters defining the designated game section are changed (also referred to as “extension”, “addition”, and “addition”).
For example, in the designated game section of 100 games, the designated game section is extended at the 50th game, and when the number of games added is 30 games, the remaining number of games in the designated game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
Similarly to the above, when the designated game section is set by the number of payouts, the number of payouts, or the number of times the designated function is activated, when extending the designated game section, values to be added to these parameters are determined, and the remaining parameters are determined. The added value is added (added).

Further, the designated game section (AT) may be started and ended based on the transition of the game state.
Here, the “game state” includes a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the RT (lottery state) described above. That is, the gaming state is a concept including both the lottery state and the control state.
The “control state” is a game state that can be determined independently of the RT (as described later, there may be a control state linked to the RT).
Examples of the control state include concepts such as precursor, CZ (abbreviation of “chance zone”), AT, and normal. More specifically, as a control state performed in the advantageous section, a state in which the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) is high (high-probability state) or low (low-probability state), or a designated game section (AT) is determined. As the control state, there are various control states in consideration of playability, such as a state in which the additional winning probability of the designated game section (AT) is high (an additional specialization zone or the like) and a low state.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, the control state is changed from “normal” to “ahead” at the same time as the shift to the advantageous section. This precursor includes a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of normal transition (fall). If the condition for shifting to CZ is met during the precursor, the process shifts to CZ, and if the condition for shifting to normal is satisfied, the process shifts to normal.
Further, when shifting to CZ, there is a case of shifting (promoting) to AT and a case of shifting (falling) to a precursor or normal. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the process shifts to the AT, and when the condition for shifting to the precursor or the normal is satisfied, the process shifts to the precursor or the normal, respectively.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the AT is performed, when performing the same RT transition (FIG. 22) as in the first embodiment, the control is performed so as to stay at the RT3. For example, when it is determined to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed. Further, after shifting to RT3, in order to prevent the player from falling from RT3, at the time of winning the replay C group, the correct answer pressing order for maintaining RT3 by operating the instruction function is displayed.

In addition, for example, a finite RT is provided, and an AT is set during staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT ends when transitioning from the finite RT to another RT.
The “finite RT” means that the player stays at the RT until the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, and when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, satisfies the end condition of the RT and shifts to another RT.
For example, when shifting to the finite RT after the end of the special game, the AT may be executed at the finite RT. When the predetermined number of games is exhausted by the finite RT, the process proceeds to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and the AT, that is, the designated game section and the advantageous section are completed.
Further, in the case where the special combination is won and the transition to RT4 (internal RT) is made as in the first embodiment, for example, when the special combination during the limited RT is won, the RT transition may be performed. In this case, the finite RT is ended by the winning of the special role, and after the end of the special game, it can be started from a predetermined RT different from the finite RT (for example, a non-RT in FIG. 59).
On the other hand, in the case of the specification that does not shift to RT by winning the special role, even if the special role is won during the limited RT, the limited RT does not end, and after the special game, the game is being executed until then. It is possible to restart from the middle of the finite RT.

  In addition, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, whether or not to activate the indicating function is optional. However, since it is during AT that the indicating function is always or frequently operated, the indicating function is not operated as much as during AT during a precursor or CZ. During the aura or during the CZ, the instruction function may be activated at a small rate, or the instruction function may be activated only once. Note that in a specification in which a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section is made and a transition is made from normal to an aura, and before the transition from the aura to a CZ or AT, the vehicle may fall to a normal (ordinary section), the precursor or the CZ (the advantageous section) is used. During the section), it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once.

In particular, when shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first small role B group winning in order to early achieve "execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section". .
Further, since the AT is assumed to be an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, the AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when the game has the remaining number of games in the AT and reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended.

The term “freeze” refers to delaying the progress of the game by suspending the game for a predetermined period of time. (Reception of the stop operation of the reel 31). Such a freeze may be performed, and various effects may be output during the freeze period.
The freeze is executed at the end of the AT, for example. On the other hand, after shifting to the advantageous section, if only CZ is executed (when AT is not executed), no freeze is executed. Therefore, there is a case where the freeze is executed and a case where the freeze is not executed at the end of the advantageous section after the transition to the advantageous section.

<Third embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be added.
As described above, there are various parameters of the AT, but in the third embodiment, the termination condition of the AT is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Also, examples 1 (FIG. 53) and 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
In the following example, the AT starts at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of the AT. That is, "AT = advantageous section" is set.
However, as in the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described later, it is a matter of course that there is a case where the zone is a non-AT period (for example, a precursor, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc.) although it is an advantageous section. (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Further, in Examples 1 to 10 below, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous section counter, and the like are provided (in all examples, these three counters are not always provided).
Note that, in the flowcharts of FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10), the same processes are denoted by the same step numbers. The description of the same step numbers as those already described is omitted as appropriate.
The count value of the counter is abbreviated as “counter value”.
Furthermore, “clearing” the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to “0” in the increment counter).

In the third embodiment, when the player wins a condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment during the AT, the number of games played by the AT is added. The number of games to be added may be determined in advance according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the condition device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when the small part E1 with the number of “250” is won, the number of additional games is determined to be “50” (50%), “100” (40%) or “200” (10%). It is mentioned. In addition, when the small part E1 of the set number “750” is won, the number of additional games may be determined to be “30” (50%), “50” (30%) or “100” (20%). Can be
Also, regardless of the above example, it is possible to determine in advance the number of additional games of AT based on the control state and the condition device, or to randomly select the number of additional games of AT based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, for example, even if the same condition device is won, the number of additional games determined or drawn by the control state being executed can be made different.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” as described above, and the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500 games, as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the maximum AT is also 1500 games.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the number of games played by the AT is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of games played by the AT is added according to the winning condition device.
When the number of AT games is added, the total number of AT games (meaning the sum of the number of digested AT games and the number of remaining games; the same applies hereinafter) is unlimited regardless of whether or not it exceeds “1500”. There is a case where the additional is executed and a case where the additional exceeding “1500” is not executed.
Even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" as a result of adding the number of AT games, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to "1500".

Furthermore, when the number of games is added during the AT, from the beginning to the end, a method of executing the addition under the same condition, and making the addition harder as the upper limit of the 1500 games is approached (the expected value of the number of additions becomes smaller) ) Methods. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of games played by the AT is, for example, “100” and no additional equipment is performed, when the first condition device to be added is elected, for example, 80 The additional number “100” is selected with a probability of%, but when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1000” or more, if the same condition device as above is won, for example, an additional 80% is added. This is the case when the number “50” is selected.
Also in the case of such control, there are a case where the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” and a case where the addition is stopped.
Further, when the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds "1500", a method of storing the value even when the value exceeds "1500" is stored. Is a method of clearing the value.

The following FIG. 43 (Example 1) is an example in which even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total number of games), the addition is executed without any limitation (added to the counter).
44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4) are examples in which the additional game is not executed (not added to the counter) when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. In this case, the additional lottery itself is not executed, and the additional lottery itself is executed. After the additional lottery, it is determined whether or not the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. Clearing the additional lottery result. In FIG. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4), the latter is adopted.

In addition, when it is decided to add, a freeze may occur. This is because a freeze is generated and an additional effect (the number of games to be added) is output during the freeze.
However, if it is determined that the number of games is to be added and a freeze is generated, the additional number is cleared because the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. That is not done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition apparatus to be added in the current game and performing an additional lottery, it is decided to add, and after it is determined that the additional number is added to the remaining number of games of the AT, For example, in the next game, there is a control for generating a freeze together with an additional effect.

  Furthermore, FIG. 47 (Example 5) to FIG. 49 (Example 7) show that when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when it approaches the upper limit “1500”), the expected value of the additional number is reduced. Here is an example. Here, when the expected value of the additional number is reduced, lowering the winning probability of the additional number, reducing the additional number, and executing both of them are mentioned.

Further, FIG. 50 (Example 8) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) show that when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when it approaches the upper limit “1500”), the winning combination (winning condition device) This is an example in which a lottery is performed with a lower grade. Here, "reducing the grade of the winning combination" is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, a small win E1 with a set number of “250” and a small win E1 with a set number of “750” are provided as condition devices to be added to the lottery. It is assumed that
Here, the small win E1 with the numeral “250” is a condition device that is less likely to win because of the smaller number of the small wins E1 with the numeral “750”. In such a case, the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 with the set number “250” is won is x1, and the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 with the set number “750” is won is x2 ( x2 <x1).
In addition, as an example of changing the expected value of the additional number, a method of providing a plurality of types of lottery tables in advance and changing the lottery table used in the additional lottery is adopted.

When the total number of games played by the AT is less than “1000”, when the player wins the small part E1 of the set number “250”, the lottery is performed by adding the expected value x1, and the small part E1 of the set number “750” is won. At times, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, both when the small part E1 with the set number “250” is won and when the small part E1 with the set number “750” is won, An additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small combination E1 with the set number “250” is won, the grade is reduced to the small combination E1 with the set number “750” and an additional lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, when the winning combination is “250”, a small lottery is performed with the expected value x2. At the time of winning, an additional lottery may be performed with an expected value x3 (x3 <x2).
The expected values x1 to x3 are assumed to be values exceeding “0”, but may be, for example, “0”. The additional lottery for the expected value of the additional number “0” includes, for example, setting the winning probability of the additional addition to “0”, or winning in the additional number “0” although the winning itself is performed in the additional lottery. .

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small part E1 is x11 and the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small part D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total number of games played by the AT is less than “1000”, when the small part E1 is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small part D is elected, the additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12. .
Next, in the case where the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, when the small win E1 is won, the small win D is replaced with the expected value x12 and an additional lottery is performed.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a lower-grade winning combination in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games of the AT at which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to “1000”. However, the threshold value is not limited to this, and is not limited to “500”, “800”, “1200”. , "1300", "1400", etc., can be set variously according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating Example 1 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digestive games during AT and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit game number “1500” of the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, at the start of the AT, “100” is assigned as an initial value (the number of games). Therefore, at the start of AT, "100" is set in the AT counter. Then, each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value "1500" at the start of the AT. Then, each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).
As described above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the end condition of the AT is satisfied.
Note that if 1BB is won during the AT, the AT counter is not updated until the 1BB game ends (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter updates the game every time even during the 1BB game. That is, since the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, after the 1BB ends, the AT counter value is restarted from the AT counter value at the time of the 1BB winning.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 in the first embodiment, and is set to “1” during the advantageous section and “0” when the section is not an advantageous section. Is set.

  In FIG. 43A, in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs a command transmission process to the sub control board 80 at the time of starting a game. This process is a process shown in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S402, in which control when the start switch 41 is operated is executed. In step S402, it is continuously detected whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is executed. This processing is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, the “addition” is an addition of the AT game count. Therefore, when the game is not in the AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but the non-AT), the additional lottery in step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery in step S404 is a process shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won, an additional lottery of the AT is executed.
It is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability are determined in a lottery table described later.

Next, proceeding to step S405, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in FIG.
In the next step S406, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, a variable update process is performed as a process at the end of the game. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds to step S401 in FIG. 43 (a), a game start command transmission process in FIG. 43 (b) is executed.
First, in step S411, an AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As the value of the advantageous section flag, “1” is transmitted when the section is in the advantageous section, and “0” is transmitted when the section is not in the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Through the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters of the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the value of the advantageous section flag to the sub control board 80.

When proceeding to step S404 in FIG. 43 (a), an additional lottery in FIG. 43 (c) is executed.
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in the ROM 54 in advance, and defines an additional number corresponding to a winning combination and its winning probability. Specifically, for example, when the small number E1 alone wins the number “250”, the probability of determining the additional number to be “50” is 60%, and the probability of determining the additional number to be “40” is. For example, it may be set to 40%. In addition, when the small number E1 alone wins the number “750”, the probability of determining the additional number to be “30” is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the additional number to be “20” is set to 50%. It is mentioned. For other condition devices, the winning probability and the additional number are determined.

  In the next step S422, additional lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result of the lottery in step S422 (the determined additional number) is added to the AT counter value. For example, if the AT counter value so far is "50" (the number of remaining games) and the added number is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S405 of FIG. 43A, the command transmission at the time of start switch operation of FIG. 43D is executed.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, at the start of the game, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. If it is not decided to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of AT games to be added is added, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. After receiving the AT counter value in step S411, the sub-control board 80 receives the AT counter value stored in the sub-control board 80 in step S431 when the AT counter value is received again in step S431. Rewrite with the AT counter value.
Before the step S431, it is determined whether or not the AT is added in the game, and only when the AT is added, the AT counter value is transmitted for the second time in the game in the step S431. Is also good.

When the process proceeds to step S407 in FIG. 43A, the variable updating process in FIG.
First, in step S441, the AT counter value is decremented by "1". Next, the process proceeds to step S442, in which the upper limit counter value is decremented by "1". In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. When it is determined to be “0” (that is, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit “1500”), the processing proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is “0” and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining number of games of the AT is “0”.
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more, for example, providing an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
The instruction function operation counter may be, for example, an increment counter that increments by “1” each time the instruction function is activated. It can be determined that the value is “1” or more.

  The instruction function operation flag is turned off when the instruction function operation game is never executed after executing the advantageous section and the AT, and is turned on (and thereafter) when the first instruction function operation game is executed. Is a flag. When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more.

  As described in the first embodiment, when the game shifts to the advantageous section, at least once, the instruction function operation game (the winning of the role with the largest payout number among the games having the advantageous pushing order of the stop switch 42) is performed. The game of the time. In the first embodiment, the game at the time of winning the small role group B. The same applies to the following.), The advantageous section cannot be ended. As described above, executing the instruction function operation game at least once during the advantageous section has priority over the AT termination condition.

  However, when the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 without executing the instruction function operation game, the advantageous section can be ended (refer to an eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) described later). ). Therefore, in the example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. If the upper limit counter value is “0”, the advantageous section and the AT are determined without performing the determination in step S444. To end.

  In step S444, when it is determined that the AT counter value is “0” and the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is “1” or more, since the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S445. move on. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in the step S444, the processing according to the flowchart is ended (the AT and the advantageous section are continued in the next game).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S446, where the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). The process further proceeds to step S447 to clear the value of the advantageous section flag (set to “0”). As described above, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating Example 2 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side. In the example 2 of FIG. 44, an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an additional counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) are provided as counters. . Further, an advantageous section flag is provided as in Example 1.
The add-on counter adds the added number every time the number of games is added during the AT.

44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 in FIG.
In addition, in the additional lottery process of FIG. 44C, after the additional lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to “1400”. That is, "100" is set as the initial value of the number of games played by the AT, and when the number of added games of the AT reaches "1400", the total number of games played by the AT becomes "1500" in total, and the upper limit of the advantageous section is set. To reach. For this reason, it is set so as not to add more than the number of games “1400”.

If it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number ("1400"), even if the additional number is determined in the lottery in step S422, the additional number is added. Instead, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the result of the lottery in step S422 (the determined additional number) is added to the additional counter value. The processing of the next step S423 is the same as in the above-described example 1. As described above, for example, when the AT counter value before the additional lottery is “50”, the additional counter value is “200”, and the determined additional number is “30”, the AT counter value after the additional is “80” and the additional The counter value is “230”.

In addition, in the command transmission processing at the time of operating the start switch in FIG. 6D, the additional counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in step S461. In the first example, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the second example, the additional counter value is transmitted. When the additional counter value has reached “1400”, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the additional operation has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.
Further, in FIG. 29E, steps S441 to S447 are the same as those in FIG. 43 (Example 1). After step S447, the process proceeds to step S471 to clear the additional counter value. This is for clearing all parameters related to the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 3 of FIG. 45, as a counter, an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and adds “1” each time the AT is played for one game) and an additional counter (an initial value “100”) , Increment counter) and an upper limit counter (same as in Example 1). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1500” which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In FIG. 9C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processing as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the additional counter value has exceeded a prescribed number ("1500"). The fact that the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number “1500” means in Example 3 that the total number of games played by the AT has exceeded “1500”. Therefore, when the additional counter value exceeds the prescribed number "1500", even if the additional number is determined in step S422, the additional number is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of an additional number to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games during the AT.

FIG. 40D shows the same processing as that of FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Further, in FIG. 11E, in step S481, "1" is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In the next steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether the AT counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of games played by the AT becomes equal to or greater than the number of added games, it is determined that the conditions for ending the AT and the advantageous section are satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. Then, when the number of AT games reaches “100” without adding any number of AT games, the AT counter value becomes “100”, the additional counter value becomes “100”, and the “AT counter value” .Gtoreq.addition counter value ". If “Yes” is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined to be “No”, since the conditions for terminating the advantageous section and the AT are not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. If it is equal to or more than “1”, the condition for terminating the advantageous section and the AT is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not equal to or more than “1”, the processing according to this flowchart ends because the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section.
The processing after step S445 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating Example 4 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is an additional counter (increment counter set to an initial value “100”), an advantageous section counter (set to an initial value “0”), and during AT and during the advantageous section, An increment counter that increments by “1”.
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games played is counted by the advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. The prescribed number is “1500” as in Example 3.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c), and (d) are the same processing as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
In FIG. 8B, when step S401 is started, an advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 50, as in Example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 11E, in step S501, “1” is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is “1500” or more. If it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", it means that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, and the process proceeds to step S504 to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not equal to or greater than "1500", the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. As in step S482 of FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the advantageous section counter value becomes equal to or greater than the additional counter value, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. If “Yes” is determined in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483, and if “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart ends (the next game also continues the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is a process similar to that of FIG. 45 (example 3). If “Yes” is determined in step S483, the process proceeds to step S504. If “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The following steps S447 and S471 are the same processing as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Example 5 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is an AT counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “100” and decrements by “1” during the AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “0” is set and added). An increment counter that adds an additional number for each game, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “1500” and is decremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000”.

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Also, in FIG. 9C, two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the additional number. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high accuracy, high accuracy, normal, low accuracy, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability of adding the number of games of the AT is set to the normal probability or the high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of games played by the AT is added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
Not limited to this, the lottery table A may have the expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Further, by combining both, the lottery table A has a high additional winning probability and the expected value of the additional number is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low additional winning probability and the expected value of the additional number. It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 13C, first, in step S511, a lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a prescribed number ("1000"). When it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this processing, when the added number is less than “1000”, the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the added number is “1000” or more, the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the easiness of addition is changed with the addition number “1000” as a threshold.
The processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example) 2. 44 (d) and (e) show the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating Example 6 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and adds “1” at a time during AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “100” is set and added). An increment counter that adds an additional number for each game, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “1500” and is decremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).

When Example 6 in FIG. 48 is compared with Example 5 in FIG. 47, the following points are different.
Since the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value “0”, as in FIG. 45 (Example 3), the additional number is not added to the AT counter when an additional lottery is performed.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processing as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In addition, in FIG. 48C, after the additional lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, where the additional number is added to the additional counter value, and the process according to this flowchart ends (step S423 in FIG. 47 (Example 5)). No processing is done).
FIG. 47D shows the same processing as that in FIG. 47 (Example 5). FIG. 29E shows the same processing as that of FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating Example 7 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter, but is an increment counter (initial value is set to “100”, and the increment is added each time the counter is incremented), similarly to FIG. 46 (example 4). Counter) and an upper limit counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and is incremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also plays a role of an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of times of playing the AT).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processing as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). FIG. 47C shows the same processing as that in FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Further, in FIG. 11E, in step S521, “1” is added to the upper limit counter value. Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “1500” or more. If it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", the process proceeds to step S446 to end the advantageous section and the AT because the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached.

  On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds each game “1” during the advantageous section, while the additional counter is a counter that adds an additional number as an initial value “100”. When “≧ addition counter value”, it means that there is no remaining number of games of AT. When "Yes" is determined in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483, and when "No" is determined, the processing according to this flowchart ends because the AT is continued in the next game.

In step S483, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been executed one or more times. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in the step S483, the AT is continued in the next game, so that the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processing of steps S446, S447, and S471 is the same processing as in FIG. 47 (Example 3). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating Example 8 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 in FIG. 50, the counter includes an AT counter, an additional counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 44 (Example 2). The specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In the example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery in step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and the condition device group set processing is performed. The other processing of (a) is the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
FIG. 47B shows the same processing as that in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the condition device group setting process in step S531.
First, in step S541, “0” is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number assigned to each of the plurality of condition devices to be subjected to an additional lottery among a plurality of condition devices to be drawn in the internal lottery, and assigned to each group.

In this example, two “0” and “1” are illustrated as the condition device group numbers. Further, a lottery table for additional lottery is provided for each condition device group number.
Further, the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “0” is referred to as a lottery table A, and the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “1” is referred to as a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the additional number is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 is independently elected is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the added number when the small part D is elected is set to “x2”. It is assumed that it is. Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the expected value of the additional number is higher at the time of winning the small part E1 than at the time of winning the small part D).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is “1”. On the other hand, when the small combination E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is “0”.
Then, the expected value of the added number when performing the additional lottery using the lottery table A is “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when performing the additional lottery using the lottery table B is “x2”. .

The description returns to FIG.
When the condition device group number “0” is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number ("1000"). When it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than the specified number, the processing according to the present flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number “1” is set. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally “1”, and thus remains “1”. On the other hand, when the small role E1 is won, the condition device group number “0” is set in principle, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more, the condition device group number “1” is reset. Set.

In the additional lottery shown in FIG. 14D, first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the condition device group number is “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the condition device group number is “1”. You. Subsequent processing in step S422 and subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example 2).
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (Example 2), respectively.

  In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, “0” and “1”, are described, but three or more types may be provided. For example, the expected value of the additional number is “x1> x2> x3”, and if the additional counter value is less than “1000”, a lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used, and the additional counter value is “1000” or more and less than “1200”. For example, a lottery table of the expected value “x2” is used, and a lottery table of the expected value “x3” is used when the additional counter value is “1200” or more.

  In this manner, in FIG. 50 (Example 8), when the small win E1 is won, an additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small win E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more. Will be added to correspond to the expected value of the small role D, and a lottery will be performed. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value of the advantageous section “1500”, the winning combination is lowered and an additional lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating Example 9 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 in FIG. 51, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as those in FIG. 45 (Example 3). The specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 45 (Example 3), respectively. Processing.
In FIG. 51, the process (c) is the same as the process (c) in FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 51, the processing of (d) is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8) in that step S423 is not included. Other processes are the same as those in (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 10 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 10 in FIG. 52, the counter includes an additional counter and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 49 (Example 7) (there is no AT counter). Also, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (Example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 49 (Example 7), respectively. Processing.
Also, in FIG. 52, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 52, the processing of (d) is the same processing as in FIG. 51 (Example 9).

Although FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) have been described above, basically, an AT counter that counts the number of AT games played, an additional counter that counts an added number of AT games played, An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) for counting the upper limit “1500” of the section is provided.
Also, these counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter need not be provided as in FIG. 46 (Example 4) or FIG. 49 (Example 7). In this case, the number of AT games is substantially counted by another counter.
Further, in Examples 1 to 10 described above, additional lottery is performed according to the winning condition device. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

In addition, when performing an additional lottery, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), the additional number may be determined regardless of the additional number up to now.
On the other hand, when performing the additional lottery, the additional number may be determined in consideration of the additional number up to the present, as shown in FIG. 47 (Example 5) or FIG. 50 (Example 8).
"Considering the added number" means that the larger the added number is, the smaller the added number is in the subsequent additional lottery (the expected value of the added number is smaller). This makes it possible to moderate the rate of increase in the number of additions with the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), it is also possible to execute the addition indefinitely. If the addition is executed indefinitely, for example, the remaining number of games of the AT may become “2000”, “3000”, or the like. However, even if the number of games reaches such a value, the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section is prioritized (step S443 in FIG. 43E), and the AT ends at that time.

However, in the case where the additional number of AT games is executed indefinitely as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), if the additional number is notified to the player as it is, the additional number exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section is added. The number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the player can play the game exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500”.
Accordingly, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as described below with respect to the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additions, in response to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a first example of control processing relating to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and the addition.
53A illustrates the process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, taking FIG. 43 (Example 1) as an example, processing for receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG. 43D is executed.
In the above Examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted, but in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53A, in step S601, a process of receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, a process of receiving an additional number ((b) in the figure) is executed. In the next step S603, an advantageous section flag reception process is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the figure) of receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

When the process proceeds to step S602, the process in FIG.
First, in step S611, the received additional number is added to the additional counter. This additional counter is provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Next, the process proceeds to step S612, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to “1500”. Therefore, in this example, as in FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the additional counter value exceeds “1500”, it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. If it is determined in step S612 that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number ("1500"), the process proceeds to step S613. If it is determined that the added counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, "1" is set to the additional effect suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the "added effect suppression flag" is used to output no added effect when the added number is already "1500", and to output the added effect when the added number is "1500" or less. , A flag for making the determination.
In step S614, the additional number in the game is stored (in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds to step S604, the process of (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This determination is made by determining whether or not the added number stored in step S614 is “0”. When it is determined that there is an additional number, the process proceeds to step S622, and when it is determined that there is no additional number, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. When it is determined to be “1”, the process proceeds to step S623, and when it is determined to be not “1”, the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect without an additional effect is selected. That is, even if the additional number has reached the prescribed number ("1500") and the additional lottery has been won in the game, the additional number cannot be increased, so that the additional effect is controlled so as not to be output. The effect selected here outputs a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, at the time of replay winning, an effect suggesting replay winning (blue or the like)). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, an effect with an additional effect can be selected. For example, an effect of notifying all or a part of the additional number in the game may be given. In addition, in the game in which the number of additions is determined, it is not always necessary to select an effect with an additional effect. Is also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that there is no additional number in the game and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As described above, the normal effect includes outputting an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game, as described above. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of the control processing relating to the advantageous section and the AT on the sub-control board 80 side and the addition.
In the example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving a payout suppression flag is executed. Here, the payout suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80. When the flag is "1", it means that an additional effect is suppressed, and " When it is "0", it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the payout suppression flag “1” is transmitted from the main control board 50, the command is an instruction to suppress the additional effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 53B, the sub-control board 80 sets the additional effect suppression flag. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, whether or not the additional effect is to be suppressed is determined by the main control board 60, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as a payout suppression flag.

As a method in which the main control board 50 transmits the payout suppression flag, for example, the following method is used.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, in FIG. 44 (c), when it is determined “Yes” in step S451, the payout suppression flag provided on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44D, after step S461, a payout suppression flag is transmitted.

In Example 2 of FIG. 54, steps other than Step S631 and Step S632 are the same as in Example 1 of FIG. 53.
In step S631, the processing of FIG.
First, in step S641, when a payout suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not its value is “1”. If it is determined to be “1”, the process proceeds to step S642, and if it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is set to "1", and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S643, “0” is set to the additional effect suppression flag, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the received ball output suppression flag is “1”, the additional effect suppression flag on the sub control board 80 side is set to “1”, and when the received ball output suppression flag is “0”, the additional effect suppression flag To “0”. Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54 (c), as in FIG. 53 (Example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number, so the additional number is added to the additional counter in step S611, and In step S614, the added number is stored.
Further, the effect group number receiving process in (d) in the figure is the same process as in FIG. 53 (Example 1).

  When the sub-control board 80 outputs an additional effect, for example, when the additional number determined in the game is “200”, all of the additional numbers (“200”) in the effect of the game may be notified. However, in a plurality of games (for example, continuous production) including the above-mentioned game, it is also possible to notify in small increments (divide and notify the additional number). Specifically, when the added number in the game is "200", the added number "100" is notified in the game, "50" is notified in the next game, and "50" in the next game. And the like.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of image display on the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 with respect to the addition during the AT, and is a diagram illustrating Examples 1 to 4.
First, in Example 1, "digestion G (meaning" the number of AT digestion games ") 1200" and "remaining G (meaning" the remaining number of AT games ") 300 are displayed on the image display device 23 before the addition. "Is displayed. Therefore, since “AT digestion game count + remaining game count = 1500”, the executable AT game count has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (for example, this means a case like step S423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the display change of the number of additions and effects related to additions are performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition is the same as the display before the addition.

In addition, it goes without saying that “500” may be added to the counter (AT counter, additional counter, etc.) provided on the sub control board 80 side when adding 500 games. The number of AT games and the number of additions may be such that real numbers are managed by a counter and only display is performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub-control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
By controlling the image display as in Example 1, it is possible to suppress an effect related to unnecessary addition.

  Example 2 is a case where the AT game is 1200 games and the remaining game number is 200 games, and when 500 games are added internally, the remaining game number is a correct value (remaining game number after addition). This is an example of switching to another display without displaying the parentheses. In Example 2, the number of remaining games is displayed as “celebration” or “congratulations”. In addition, a display such as "?"

  In Example 2, when the sum of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of the AT is equal to or less than “1500”, the remaining number of games is displayed. If the number exceeds "1500", the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. Since the display of the remaining number of games of the AT is changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than the numerical value, the player can know that the additional game has been performed. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the remaining number of games in the AT, the player cannot grasp the remaining number of games in the AT.

In addition, before the addition, in the case of the AT digestion game number of “1200” and the remaining game number of “200”, when “500” is added, the remaining game number of the AT may be set to “700” on the counter. Or "300".
In addition, when the display of the remaining number of games of the AT is “celebration” or “congratulations”, if it is a specification that the AT will continue up to the upper limit of 1500 times, “1500-AT digestion game” By calculating the “number of times”, the remaining number of games of the AT can be grasped.
Furthermore, the display of "celebration" or "congratulation" informs the player that the total number of games played in the AT has exceeded "1500", and also serves to indicate that no further additions will be made. Becomes

  Example 3 shows an example in which “500” is added in the case where the number of AT games is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200”, as in Example 2. Then, in Example 3, the remaining game count of the AT (not shown in FIG. 55) is “+100” and is “300”. That is, by adding this time, the total number of games played by the AT has reached “1500”.

In Example 3, when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1500” or more, the display of both the number of games played and the number of remaining games of the AT is stopped and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect lasts for at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games) and is executed until the number of AT digestion games reaches “1500”. When the final video of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of digestion games of the AT reaches “1500”, the final image is continuously displayed, or the process returns to the beginning of the ending effect and repeats the image. Method.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of notifying the player that no additional number of games will be added.

In Example 4, as shown in Example 2, when only the number of digested games of the AT is displayed and the remaining number of games is displayed as “celebration” or the like, as described above, the player determines the remaining number of ATs. Although the number of games cannot be grasped, for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT becomes “10”, game information indicating that the AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games, such as “the game will end with 10 more games”, is given. To display. The "remaining 10 games" shown in Example 4 is an example, and the number of remaining games to start displaying the game information is arbitrary. By displaying game information indicating that the number of games played by the AT does not exceed "1500", the player can know the remaining number of games played by the AT.
Note that Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

In addition, in the case where an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game itself may be displayed as “congratulations” or “celebration”.
Furthermore, when an additional game that exceeds 1500 games occurs, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an additional game that exceeds 1500 games occurs may be displayed.
Further, “occurrence of additional game exceeding 1500 games” may be set as a mission in the Mythro game. For example, when "addition of more than 1500 games" has been generated a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the mission has been achieved, and a certain privilege is given to the player.

As described above, even if an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game cannot be executed, but instead, a privilege (profit) for preventing a decrease in the motivation of the player is set. Preferably.
In particular, in the event of an additional game exceeding 1500 games, it is assumed that the rare role is won. However, when the rare role is won, no effect is output because the total number of games is "1500" or more. It is unnatural to not do it.
Note that the “mythro game” is, for example, as described in paragraph number “0680” of “JP-A-2006-104442”.

FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating how effects and the like change with an increase in the number of AT games in the third embodiment.
Note that in the third embodiment, since “AT = advantageous section”, the acquired number continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). Then, in the example of FIG. 56, for simplification of the graph, the AT is continued from the number of games of “0G” to “1500G”, and the number of acquired games continues to increase.
FIG. 56 (a) shows the relationship between the number of AT games and the effect.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of acquired games. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of digestion games of the AT (advantage section) becomes “1200”, as shown in Example 2 of FIG.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section, even if the AT has the remaining number of games at that time.
In addition, the additional effect is performed up to 1200 games. However, when an additional effect of 500 games is won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. In addition, even if the player is elected for further addition, no additional production will be performed.

  On the other hand, the effect regarding the AT during the AT is continued until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Also, the display of the AT digestion game count and the remaining game count is performed up to the 1200 game, but at the time of winning the additional 500 game at the 1200th game, the display of the AT remaining game count as in Example 2 of FIG. 55, or the display of both the number of AT digestion games and the number of remaining games is stopped as in Example 3 in FIG. 55, and another display (such as “celebration” shown in Example 2 in FIG. Ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example (shown by a solid line in the figure) where (1) an additional lottery probability is gradually lowered as the AT game count is exhausted when the AT continues "1500" games, and (2). It is a figure which shows the example (indicated by the dotted line in the figure) where the instruction frequency is gradually reduced.
In the above (1), as shown in FIG. 47C, for example, the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, and when the number of AT games becomes "1000" or more, the lottery table B is used. Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), an additional lottery is performed in a grade corresponding to the winning combination until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games, but the number of “1000” games or more is obtained. At this time, it corresponds to an example of lowering the grade of the winning combination and performing an additional lottery.

  In the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of AT games is equal to or more than “500” and less than “1000” games, the additional lottery probability is set to the normal probability. When the game is “1000” or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability. In addition, even if the addition probability of the AT is gradually reduced with the exhaustion of the number of games, as long as the AT has the remaining number of games, the rate of increase in the number of acquired games with respect to the number of games does not change. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example of (2), the control is performed such that the instruction frequency is gradually reduced in accordance with the exhaustion of the number of AT games.
Here, the “instruction frequency” refers to how often the instruction function is activated when the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell) is won during the AT (the correct answer push order is determined). Or display). For example, when the number of AT games is less than "500" games, the instruction frequency is set to 100% (instruction frequency "high"). When the number of AT games is "500" or more and less than "1000" games, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction frequency). If the frequency is “medium” and “1000” or more, the instruction frequency is set to 80% (the instruction frequency is “low”).

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (a 90% probability of winning) is performed for the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell) as to whether or not to activate the instruction function. When the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated.
In addition, when the instruction frequency is less than 100%, if the replay overlap winning for promoting or maintaining the RT is performed, the correct answer pressing order may be always instructed, or the same as the pressing order bell winning. The frequency may determine whether or not to instruct.

If the instruction function is not activated at the time of replay overlapping winning, the player may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), this is a case where replay 03 is displayed when the replay C group is won during RT3 and falls to RT2.
Also, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed on RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the pushing order bell, the vehicle may fall to a disadvantageous RT.
As the number of AT games is reduced, if the instruction frequency is gradually reduced, the number of incorrect answers in the pushing order when the pushing bell is won gradually increases. And it is hard to increase. FIG. 56B (2) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” is set.
On the other hand, as in the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described later, there are cases where the section is an advantageous section but is a non-AT period (a sign, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc .; the same applies hereinafter). Having, of course.
For example, there is a case where an advantageous section is started, AT is started after "n" games are executed in the non-AT period, and then the AT is started.
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already consumed “n” games.
In this case, when the number of digestion games and the like are displayed as an image as shown in FIG. 55, the number of digestion games in an advantageous section including a part or all of “n” games is displayed (Example 1), and “ The “n” game is reflected in an internal counter (such as the upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 and the like), but the image is not displayed (Example 2).
In the case of Example 1, the specification is such that the number of digestion games in a part or all of the advantageous section other than the AT is displayed to the player. In the case of Example 2, the specification indicates that only the number of digestion games of the AT is displayed to the player. Become.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 1, a) the case where only the number of digested games in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of digested games in AT is not displayed) and b) both the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of digested games in AT are displayed Display.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), for example, when the number of games is less than “500”, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of games is “500” or more and less than “1000”, the additional lottery is performed. The probability was set to the normal probability, and the additional lottery probability was set to the low probability when the number of games was "1000" or more.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the AT starts after the transition to the advantageous section and the non-AT period of 600 games.
In addition, when the instruction function operation game is hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to the 600 games, the graph of FIG. Become. Then, when the AT is started from 600 games, a graph (upper right corner) in which the acquired number starts to increase after 600 games is reached.

  In the above example, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games, so the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is 900 games. Therefore, if this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, if the number of AT digestion games is less than "300", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and if the number of AT digestion games is "300" or more and less than "600", the extra lottery is selected. Assuming that the probability is the normal probability, and the number of AT digestion games is “600” or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Further, similarly to the above, when the AT is started after the non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section, for example, in “(c) Additional lottery” in FIG. 47, the additional counter is set to the specified number “600”. If it is greater than or equal to ("Yes" in step S451), setting the lottery table B may be mentioned.
Here, the specified number is set to “600”, as described above, when the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is “900”, and “2/3” of the number of games has been exhausted. Is set as a threshold.
As described above, when the advantageous section is not necessarily the AT, for example, when the AT is not started at the start of the advantageous section and the AT is started after a predetermined number of games, the additional expected value (additional lottery probability or the like) is set to the AT game. When changing based on the number of times played, it is necessary to make a setting in consideration of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmitting unit 70, and supplies an external signal (also referred to as “outer end”) to the external centralized terminal board 100. Send The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized by what external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
The BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA, 1BBB, or the like in the first embodiment, and the BB game is a 1BBA game, a 1BBB game, or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example 1 (upper part) and an example 2 (lower part) of a time chart of an external signal according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing Example 3 of the time chart of the external signal.
In the examples of FIGS. 57 and 58, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB is operating (during the BB game) and an external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being performed are output as the external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that is turned on when either the AT or the special game is satisfied). It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT starts at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and ends at the same time as the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the AT is not necessarily started immediately even when the advantageous section is started. For example, the AT is started when the start condition of the AT is satisfied during the advantageous section. However, the point that the advantageous section ends when the AT ends is the same as in the third embodiment.

In Example 1 of FIG. 57, the AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section. When the AT is started, the external signal 2 indicating the AT signal is turned on. Then, it is assumed that the player wins the BB during the AT and starts the BB game. With the start of the BB game, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is being performed is turned on. Note that the AT is suspended based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is restarted after the BB game ends. However, the external signal 2 remains on during the BB game.
When the BB game ends, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of the AT, the advantageous section also ends (the advantageous section display LED 77 turns off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are completed before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games.
When the game reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated even if the remaining number of games of the AT is present at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, the point that the AT is started after a predetermined number of games has elapsed after the start of the advantageous section is the same as in Example 1. Further, the point that the game is shifted to the BB game during the AT is the same as in the first example. Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. Therefore, when the condition for ending the advantageous section has been reached, the BB game has not been ended yet. Then, after the ending condition of the advantageous section has elapsed, the BB game has ended.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is being performed and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being performed are kept on until the end of the BB game. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. It should be noted that the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, and therefore, at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off. In addition, since the AT is executed in the advantageous section, the AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.
As described above, in the example 2, the AT ends when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As an example of satisfying the condition for terminating the advantageous section during the BB game as in Example 2, for example, first, the number of AT games is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the number of games is determined to be during the BB game. There is also a case where the value is subtracted even if the Second, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 game) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when the number of games played by the AT is set to "50" and the AT is started, and when the game shifts to the BB game during the AT, the counting of the number of games played by the AT is interrupted. However, the count of the upper limit "1500" game of the advantageous section is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, similarly to Example 1 in FIG. When the AT starts, the external signal 2 turns on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (the game does not shift to BB game).
Example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT and the remaining number of games of the AT is reached even when the 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, are reached. Even when the remaining number of games of the AT is reached at the time of reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  If the special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section and the 1500-game of the advantageous section is completed while the special section is still inside the special section, the special section is won and the transition is made during the special game. It is not possible to output an effect such as "How many times is the special game inside?" This is because the data relating to the advantageous section is reset when the 1500 game in the advantageous section is reached. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) is continuing even during the special game.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data on the advantageous section stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data on the advantageous section stored on the sub-control board 80 side (the data transmitted from the main control board 50 is not transmitted). Data stored based on the incoming command) may be cleared or not cleared.
If the game is not cleared, it is possible to display a numerical value exceeding "1500" for the number of games in the advantageous section during the special game.
In the case where a special role has been won just before the end of the advantageous section, if an effect such as an ending effect has been output, the ending effect may be stopped and the winning of the special role may be immediately notified.

<Fifth embodiment>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is terminated with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following examples 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section starts at the same time as the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation, it is an advantageous section.
At both the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation, the operation shifts to non-RT (this is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT keeps the advantage zone. In the non-RT mode, the replay A alone is not selected and the replay C group is selected (as in the case of the RT3 of the first embodiment). At the time of winning the replay C group, the instruction function is not operated. Therefore, the replay 01 or the replay 03 wins by the operation (luck) of the stop switch 42 by the player. When the replay 01 wins, the process proceeds to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, the process proceeds to RT2.

Note that, when the player wins the replay C group in the non-RT, the instruction function may not always be activated, and the instruction function may always be activated (display of a pressing order for winning the replay 01). Alternatively, whether or not to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the replay C group may be determined by lottery.
Alternatively, when shifting to non-RT based on the end of 1BBA operation, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay C group, and when shifting to non-RT based on the end of 1BBB operation, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay C group. May not be operated, and so on.

RT5 is a finite RT and continues 50 games. When 50 games are consumed at RT5, the process shifts to RT2.
Then, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is an advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when a transition is made from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, a normal section (non-AT) is set.
For this reason, when the replay 01 wins in the non-RT (advantage section and non-AT), the game shifts from the next game to RT5 and executes the advantageous section and AT (50 games). When the 50 games have been consumed, the process moves to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when the replay 03 wins in the non-RT (advantage section and non-AT), the process shifts from the next game to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
Then, in RT2, the lottery of the advantageous section and the AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the above-mentioned RT shift and AT. (A) has shown the example which shifted to AT. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which the player wins 1BB at RT2 and shifts to the 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When the game shifts from RT2 to 1BB game, an advantageous section starts. When the 1BB game is over, the routine shifts to non-RT. When the replay 01 wins in this non-RT, the routine shifts to RT5. At RT5, an AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is completed, the advantageous section and the AT are completed, and the process proceeds to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 3B, the 1BB game ends and the game shifts to the non-RT, and the replay 03 wins in the non-RT. In this case, the process does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2, and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the start and end of the advantageous section and the AT are determined by RT (lottery state) or a control state controlled and managed by the main control board 50 (regardless of whether RT is different or the same). In the example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and the AT are started by the RT transition, and the advantageous section and the AT are ended by the RT transition.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the AT are started by the transition of the control state, and the advantageous section and the AT are ended by the transition of the control state.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes control states of State 1 to State 3. In this example, state 1 and state 2 are advantageous sections, and state 3 is a normal section.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly states when the two-way movement is performed between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a precursor or a retraction period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery of an advantageous section is executed. The lottery of the advantageous section is, for example, the same as that shown in the first embodiment. Then, in the state 3, the advantage section is won, and when the state shifts to the advantage section, the state moves to the precursor of the state 2. Therefore, when a transition is made to the precursor, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period before the start of the AT. For example, the number of games of the precursor is determined at the time of transition from the state 3 to the state 2, and the precursor of the state 2 stays until the number of games is consumed. I do. The indication function does not operate during the warning. When the number of games in state 2 (a precursor) is exhausted, the state shifts from the next game to the state 1 AT. During state 1 (AT), the indicating function operates.

The state 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied. The number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed, for example, “50”, or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the termination condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the state shifts to the state 2 withdrawal period of the AT. In this retraction period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, “20” games).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied during the state 2 period (withdrawal period) (for example, when the rare role is won, or when the AT lottery executed when the rare role is won, for example), the state 1 ( AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the withdrawal period of state 2, the state shifts to state 3 of normal. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the transition to the state 3, and the transition to the normal section is made.
As described above, the normal state which is the state 3 is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous sections. Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT retraction period).

  In the example of FIG. 61A, it is also possible to set an upper limit for the number of times of AT transition. For example, when the upper limit number of ATs is set to "5", after the end of the fifth AT, the state is shifted from the state 1 to the state 3 without shifting to the AT withdrawal period (state 2). Then, it is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61B has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
Usually, it is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal times, a shift lottery to the advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment and the like, and when an advantageous section is won, the game is shifted to the advantageous section from the next game and a precursor is started. The precursor is a maximum of 32 games (the number of games of the precursor is determined by lottery). Then, after the game number of the precursor has been consumed, the process shifts to CZ. The CZ is executed until the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied or the termination condition for the CZ is satisfied. When the condition for shifting to AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to AT. If the condition for ending CZ is satisfied before the condition for shifting to AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to normal.

Specifically, as conditions for shifting to the AT during the CZ, for example, (a) when the transfer lottery according to the winning combination is won, (b) when the transfer lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning combination, (C) when a predetermined specific role is won, (d) when the predetermined number of times of winning of the specific role exceeds a predetermined number, (e) when a transition is made to a specific RT, (f) a predetermined RT Various transition conditions according to the game characteristics, such as when a special role is won, can be determined.
Similarly, the conditions for ending the CZ are (a) when the condition for shifting to the AT is not satisfied during the CZ, (b) when a specific falling role is won, (c) for each game regardless of the winning role. Various end conditions according to the game characteristics can be determined, for example, when the player wins a falling lottery to be performed.
Further, the condition for shifting to the AT in the CZ and the condition for terminating the CZ may be set as conditions opposite to each other.

  AT is executed in the same manner as in (a). When the termination condition of the AT is satisfied, the process shifts to CZ. The CZ after the end of the AT is positioned in the retraction period of the above (a). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, the transition to the AT can be made. However, if the condition for ending the CZ is satisfied without satisfying the condition for the transition to the AT, the transition is made to normal. At the same time as the transition to the normal mode, the advantageous section is terminated, and the procedure shifts to the normal section.

Note that the instruction function operation game is executed during the AT in principle, but the state 2 in FIG. 61 (a) or the CZ or the precursor in FIG. 61 (b) is also an advantageous section. It is possible to execute an operation game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once after shifting to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. The game won as the role B group may be an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), among the 32 games of the precursor, the game first won as the small win B group is set as the instruction function operation game.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having the normal, precursor, CZ, and AT control states similarly to FIG. 61 (b). However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which it was not possible to shift to the AT is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the state shifts from the normal state to the precursor state, the state shifts to the CZ after a predetermined number of games (maximum 32 games). If the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the process shifts to the AT as shown in (b). ) Digestion) moves to the withdrawal period. In the pullback period, the transfer lottery to the CZ is performed again, and when the condition for the transfer to the CZ is satisfied before the condition for the shift to the normal (for example, the predetermined number of games (32 games) is completed), the process shifts to the CZ ( In the figure, (c) shows an example in which the operation is shifted to CZ again (an example of successful retraction).

  Then, during the CZ, as described above, the transfer lottery to the AT is performed, but if the end condition of the CZ is satisfied before the condition for the transfer to the AT is satisfied, the process returns to the pullback period again. In the example of (c) in the figure, in the second withdrawal period, before the condition for shifting to CZ is satisfied, the end condition of CZ (for example, the digestion of the predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (withdrawal failure), This is an example of a transition to normal.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and the end of the advantageous section are controlled with the transition to the RT, and the AT or the like can be executed freely during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, a plurality of control states unrelated to RT are provided, and a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section. During this normal time, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed. The state is shifted to one of the control states corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, the predetermined number of games is exhausted), and the control is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is terminated. A transition is made to a control state corresponding to a normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when executing AT, if AT is executed at RT having a high replay probability, ART can be executed. Therefore, for example, when realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated at the time of the replay B group winning in the RT2, and the replay 02 is activated. Displaying the pressing order to be displayed, and shifting to RT3.

As described above, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous section, a plurality of control states (a precursor, CZ, AT) can be freely designed. Further, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, and it is also possible to combine all of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of ending conditions in one advantageous section, so that a wider range of playability can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60A shows that the advantageous section ends when the number of RT5 games executed during the advantageous section reaches 50 games.
The example in FIG. 60B shows that the advantageous section is ended by the transition from the non-RT to the RT2 due to the display of the replay 03 during the non-RT. In other words, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “extending 50 games at RT5” and “transition from non-RT to RT2” are set as the advantageous section end conditions. In other words, the non-RT is positioned like a CZ that is promoted to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). In a broad concept, the specification is such that a specific RT transition is used as an opportunity to end an advantageous section.

Further, in the example of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the normal section are shifted according to the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61A, the state 1 and the state 2 (a precursor or AT withdrawal period) are advantageous sections, and the state 3 is set to a normal section. The transition from the state 3 to the state 1 or the state 2 starts the advantageous section, and the transition from the state 1 or the state 2 to the state 3 ends the advantageous section.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61 (b) and (c), the normal state of the control state is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT of the control state are advantageous sections. Then, the transition from normal to the precursor, CZ, or AT starts the advantageous section, and the transition from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal ends the advantageous section.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, the normal state is the normal section, but if the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section will be executed. However, AT is not performed on the precursor or CZ even in the advantageous section, and the AT transition condition must be satisfied by the precursor or CZ in order to execute the AT. On the other hand, even if the vehicle falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or falls from CZ during the withdrawal period (a precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which a first finite RT (20 games) and a second finite RT (60 games) are provided, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set to use the first finite RT or the second finite RT. For example, by setting the end condition of the non-RT in the advantageous section, the transition to the first finite RT of the 20 games and the transition to the second finite RT of the 60 games are provided, so that the profit for the player is provided. Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn at a non-RT in an advantageous section, and a symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or a symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed according to a pressing order at the time of the specific replay winning. Let it. Then, at the time of the specific replay winning, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games in accordance with the pressing order operated by the player, about 3 It is possible to provide a gaming ability capable of generating a double profit difference.

Further, at the time of the specific replay winning during non-RT, the pressing order may be notified to the player by the main control board 50. In such a case, a specification is considered that determines which of the first finite RT and the second finite RT is to be notified of the pressing order in consideration of the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning during non-RT. It is. At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may be either one having a setting difference or one having no setting difference.
Further, the termination condition of the advantageous section may be set to only the digestion of the first finite RT, and may be set so as not to end the advantageous section in the digestion of the second finite RT. Thereby, when the transition from the non-RT to the second finite RT of the 60 games is performed, the advantageous section is not terminated even after the 60 games are consumed, and the transition to the non-RT is performed again. It is conceivable to have a game that loops the game.

  In this case, when shifting from non-RT to the first finite RT, the advantageous section ends when the finite RT of 20 games is consumed, but when shifting from non-RT to the second finite RT, the finite RT of 60 games is After digesting the RT, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to shift from the non-RT to the second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add an advantageous section by winning a role having a setting difference during the advantageous section. However, in the case of such a game, it is assumed that there is a setting difference in a specific replay. However, there is no problem because it has only a role as a transition role to a finite RT having different numbers of games. In this way, by devising the conditions for ending the advantageous section, the winning combination having a setting difference can be added to the substantial 20 games or 60 games (transition of the 20 games to the first limited RT or the second game of the 60 games). (Transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) Example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is set to the end of CZ or the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game By setting such an end condition of the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section , A CZ of up to 32 games is executed, and the condition for clearing the CZ is determined to be the winning of the special role. Then, if 32 games are consumed without winning a special combination during CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the special role is won during the CZ, after the special game is completed, the game is shifted to the non-RT. In the non-RT, the specific replay is randomly selected as in the example of the above (1), and the push at the time of the specific replay winning is performed. In accordance with the order, the symbol combination which shifts to RT1 or the symbol combination which shifts to RT2 is displayed.

  Then, "the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game" is set as the end condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the process shifts to RT1 in the pressing order at the time of winning the specific replay, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the non-RT shifts to RT2 after the end of the special game, AT is started. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the pressing order to shift to RT2 when the specific replay having no setting difference is won. This means that the special role won during the CZ is not limited to a special role having no setting difference, but may be a special role having a setting difference. A game that can be given an AT substantially by winning the special role regardless of the setting difference during the CZ during the advantageous section (specification won during non-RT after the end of the special game) In the replay, it is possible to realize the pressing order in which the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed).

Further, in the above examples (1) and (2), RT is used as the control state, but various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), two types of finite RTs (first finite RT and second finite RT) having different numbers of games and a non-RT are employed, but these are referred to as a gaming state 1, a gaming state 2, and a gaming state. State 3 may be replaced. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during an advantageous section and is the above-mentioned CZ, AT, or the like, but does not change the replay winning probability unlike RT.
By this replacement, a gaming state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, a gaming state 2 of 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and a gaming state 3 of 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section can be achieved. . In addition, since the transition conditions are not limited as in the case of RT (for example, a specific symbol combination is displayed, a special role is won, a special role is won, the special game is completed, the number of games is consumed, etc.), various conditions can be freely set. Can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, in the gaming state 1 in the advantageous section, conditions such as "to win a bell five times within 20 games", "to win a bell three consecutive games" and the like. Can be designed to shift to the gaming state 2 when the game is achieved.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, during the advantageous section and the AT, when approaching the upper limit 1500 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends before reaching the upper limit 1500 games, and after the end of the advantageous section, the comparative advantage is obtained. By providing a situation where the section and the AT can be easily won, it is possible to repeatedly execute the advantageous section and the AT in which the upper limit number of games is not reached. This makes it possible to create an advantageous section that is executed up to the upper limit of 1500 games and a state that is more advantageous than AT.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 in the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has an RT6. RT6 is a finite RT, and ends when 50 games are consumed.
RT6 can be shifted only from RT3. Further, after the end of RT6, the process shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except the inside (RT4), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. In addition, the lottery for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed irrespective of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being linked to the winning of the condition apparatus having no setting difference. The winning probability is "1/32" for all RTs.

  After the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation are completed, the user has the right to execute the AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, the operation shifts to non-RT. After the operation of 1BBB is completed, the operation shifts to RT1. When a pattern symbol is displayed on the non-RT or RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. After that, RT2 and RT3 are switched back and forth (in this case, it is assumed that a rare case of accidentally shifting from RT3 to RT6 is not considered).

  In the above, in the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is executed with the winning probability of “1/32”. Therefore, when the player wins the transfer lottery to the advantageous section, 1BBA operation or 1BBB is performed. In a situation where the user has the right to execute the AT based on the operation, the advantageous section and the AT are started. Note that the AT can be executed on the condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function). Even if the AT shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB, it is advantageous. Before winning the section, the AT does not start even if it has the right of the AT.

  When the advantageous section and the AT are started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the small role B group until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is for displaying the pattern design and shifting to RT2 as soon as possible. The instruction function is activated when the small role group C wins. After shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated in both the small win B group and small win C group wins. Further, at the time of winning the replay B group in RT2, the instruction function is operated so as to shift to RT3. Thus, the AT is executed until the end condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, at RT3, a replay D group is selected in place of the replay C group. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the type of the replay D group randomly selected in RT3, the winning combination, and the pressing order and the display combination, and corresponds to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay D group includes replays D1 to D3, and replays D1 to D3 include replay 01, replay 03, and replay 06, respectively.
When one of the replay D groups is elected, replay 01 wins in one pressing order, replay 03 wins in another pressing order, and replay 06 wins in another pressing order. Is set to win.

Here, RT3 is maintained when replay 01 is displayed at RT3, and falls to RT2 when replay 02 is displayed, as in the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the replay 06 wins at RT3, the process proceeds to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the lottery of the replay 06 is not performed during the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, the replay 06 is included only in the replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, if the player stays at RT3, is an advantageous section and is AT, and if the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, and wins the replay D group, the player wins replay 01. The pressing order to be maintained, that is, the pressing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when the user stays at RT3, is an advantageous section and is AT, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more, ie, when the remaining advantageous section becomes “100” or less. Displays the pressing order for winning the replay 06 by the operation of the instruction function in the subsequent games that have won the replay D group.

As a result, in this game, Replay 06 wins, so that the next game shifts to RT6. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set in the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT. Therefore, the transition to RT6 ends the advantageous section and the AT.
As described above, since the replay D group is an overlap winning of the replay having a possibility of shifting the RT, it is preferable that the replay D group does not have a setting difference (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the replay D group). It does not prevent you from doing so).

RT6 is a finite RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games are consumed in RT6, it is determined that the termination condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the process shifts to non-RT.
Further, as described above, at RT6, as in other RTs, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of “1/32”. Then, when an advantageous section is won at RT6, the right to execute AT is given. That is, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more in RT3 and the process shifts to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT are finished, and “winning the lottery in the advantageous section in RT6” is executed (restarted) of the AT. ) Condition is set.
In RT6, the winning probability of the advantageous section is “1/32” and the number of games is “50”. Therefore, the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won at RT6, the next game will be an advantageous section and the AT execution condition will be satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started during the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, that is, while staying at RT6. Alternatively, the AT may be started from the non-RT when shifting to the non-RT, or the AT may be started after shifting from the non-RT to RT2. Here, for simplicity of explanation, it is assumed that AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, when the advantageous section and the AT are simultaneously started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the continuation of the AT is provided up to the limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Can be. Even in a control state such as a precursor or CZ performed during an advantageous section, the counting of 1500 games in the advantageous section is performed, so that the AT is compared with the gaming ability in which the AT is performed through such a control state. It can be executed for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, the process moves to non-RT. The non-RT continues until the pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. If the lottery in the advantageous section is won at RT6, the instruction to activate the instruction function and shift to RT3 at the time of the replay B group winning is displayed at RT2.

When the player wins the AT at RT6, the process proceeds to RT3 and the AT is executed while maintaining the RT3. AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT ends the predetermined number of games, the AT ends and the advantageous section ends, and the next game shifts to the normal section.
Note that an initial value is determined for the number of games played by the AT at the time of winning the AT, and the number of games added by the above-described addition during the execution of the AT. Then, during the execution of the AT, if it becomes 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, the process shifts to RT6 as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of “1/32” also at RT2 and RT3. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with a probability of “1/32” even when staying at any RT except the RT4, and when the lottery of the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game. Move to

In RT2 and RT3, if only the transition to the advantageous section is made, the instruction function is activated when the first small win B group wins. This satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section of "at least one execution of the instruction function operation game", so that the advantageous section is terminated in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 or RT3 (normal section) that does not pass through the 1BBA game or 1BBB game, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game. When the instruction function operation game (small win B group winning) is executed once in the section, the transition from the next game to the normal section is repeated.
The invention is not limited to this, and when the game shifts to the advantageous section, the game may continue for a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games), and may shift to the normal section after the predetermined number of games has been consumed. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in a predetermined number of games.

In addition, in the RT2 and the RT3 (so-called normal), an AT lottery is separately executed. When the player wins the AT lottery, he has the right to execute the AT. For example, when the small role E1 shown in the first embodiment is won, the user has the right to execute the AT. Alternatively, when the small role E1 is won, it may be determined by a lottery whether or not to grant the right to execute the AT, and when the lottery is won, the right to execute the AT may be granted.
The number of games played by the AT is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, as shown in the third embodiment, an additional lottery is performed to add the number of games played.

Further, if the game that has won the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. Note that the AT may be started from the next game of the game that has won the AT, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started via the precursor or the CZ. After the AT is started, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 in the same manner as described above (ART). If the AT is continuing even after the transition to the advantageous section and the game becomes 1400 or more, the transition to RT6 is made in the same manner as described above.
On the other hand, if the game that has won the AT is a normal section, the player has the right to execute the AT and waits to win the advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section is won, the AT is executed thereafter.

In addition, when performing the AT lottery as described above while staying at RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the start condition of AT by passing through RT6.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, "the right to execute AT" is given based on winning of the small role E1 or the like. If this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, wait for the winning of the advantageous section. If it is an advantageous section or if it is an advantageous section, activate the indicating function, and if it is RT2, replay B group The pressing order to shift to RT3 at the time of winning is displayed. Further, when it is RT3, the pressing order for shifting to RT6 when the replay D group is won is displayed. When the process proceeds to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when an advantageous section is won between the 50 games of RT6, the start condition of the AT is satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied at RT6 is the same as described above.

  The lottery of the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and the specific section having the winning probability of “1/32” may be selected at all RTs, and the advantageous section may be started based on the winning of the specific section. . Note that the specific combination in this case is a combination having no setting difference as described in the first embodiment.

When the sixth embodiment is arranged again, the following features (including effects) are obtained.
(1) Before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game), the advantageous section is intentionally ended and the state is shifted to the re-lottery state of the advantageous section, so that the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is effectively achieved. It is possible to execute an advantageous section beyond that. For example, a game such as “advantageous section (1200 game) → non-advantaged section (50 game) → advantaged section (1200 game)” is possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the condition for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the time of transition from RT3 to RT6, but during the 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is reduced. High advantageous conditions can be maintained.
(2) In addition, at normal times, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32" for each game. In particular, as an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, an opportunity to make a transition having no setting difference is required. However, in both RT6 and normal times, the lottery to the advantageous section is always performed with a winning probability of “1/32”. , It can be realized.

Furthermore, depending on the design, as in the third embodiment, "start of AT = start of advantageous section" can be set, so that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, 1500 games, is fully used, for example, 1500 games. AT can be realized (except when the AT is started when the special role is won).
(3) When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT by referring to the RT being executed. The transfer lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of each game "1/32". When winning the transfer lottery, refer to the RT (RT6 or not) staying at the time of the win. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT when shifting to the advantageous section.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” as a result of adding the number of games during the AT, the advantage is provided to the player. It is characterized in that the greater the number of times of additions in which the number of games exceeds "1500" is performed, the more the advantage is brought to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, an “exceeding 1500 counter” is provided which counts the number of times that the total number of games in the AT exceeds “1500” due to the addition during the AT. At the start of the advantageous section and AT, the counter value exceeding 1500 is “0”.
In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (Example 2) of the third embodiment, when the additional lottery is performed and the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the determined additional number is set. It shall be cleared without adding.

  Therefore, when the total number of games played by the AT is equal to or less than "1500", the counter exceeding 1500 remains "0". Here, for example, if it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the additional number exceeds the specified number, the "counter exceeding 1500" changes from "0" to "1". Similarly, if it is further determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the additional number exceeds the specified number, the "counter exceeding 1500" is changed from "1" to "2". In this way, every time an additional game in which the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” is performed, the counter exceeding 1500 is added.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after starting the advantageous section and the AT, the game at the time of winning the first small win B group activates the instruction function. Thereafter, when the counter exceeding 1500 is "0", that is, when the total number of games of the AT does not exceed "1500" by the additional lottery, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group. Whether or not is determined by lottery.
Here, the rate at which the instruction function is activated when the small win B group is won is referred to as an “instruction function activation rate”.

  The instruction function activation rate when the value of the counter exceeding 1500 is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and during the AT, at the time of winning the small part B group, for example, a lottery for determining whether to activate the instruction function (a lottery to win at 95%) is performed. As a result, the indicating function operates with a probability of 95%, and the indicating function does not operate with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is activated is 100% and the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is not activated is "1/3", the instruction function activation rate is 95%. , The winning rate of the small role B group is about 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that as a result of the addition during the AT, the total number of AT games has exceeded “1500”. Then, it is assumed that the counter exceeding 1500 has become “1”. Here, the instruction function operation rate when the value of the counter exceeding 1500 is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 97.5%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 2.5%.

Thereafter, as a result of further addition, when the total number of AT games once again exceeds “1500”, the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “2”. In this case, the instruction function operation rate is set to “98.75%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 98.75%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, the instruction function activation rate = “95”, “97.5”, “98.75” for the counter value exceeding 1500 = “0”, “1”, “2”,. , ...

  With the above setting, the more the number of AT games exceeds "1500", that is, the more the counter value exceeds 1500, the larger the instruction function activation rate approaches 100%. Here, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds "1500", the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually "1500". It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when an additional game is performed in which the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the game is more advantageous to the player than before the additional game is performed (the expected number of acquired cards). Value is increased).

<Eighth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, the winning of a BB having no setting difference in the winning probabilities (in the first embodiment, for example, a single winning of 1BBA, an overlapping winning of 1BBA and small role D, an overlapping of 1BBA and small role E1) When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the win, the advantageous section is started thereafter. Also, there is a case where the AT is started after the BB game ends.
Further, examples of the end of the advantageous section include the following Examples 1 to 5.
(1) Example in which the advantageous section ends before 1BB game ends (Example 1)
(2) Example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (Example 2)
(3) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT starts after the 1BB game ends, and the advantageous section ends at the end of the AT (Example 3).
(4) When the 1BB game ends, the advantageous section does not end, and after the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) has elapsed from the end of the 1BB game, the advantageous section ends (Example 4).
(5) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT is started after a lapse of a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) from the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section ends at the end of the AT (Example 5).
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined which of Examples 1 to 5 to end the advantageous section. Of course, it is not necessary to determine from among the five examples 1 to 5; for example, it may be determined from the three examples 1 to 3, or from the two examples 2 and 3. May be.

FIGS. 64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 described above.
Example 1 in FIG. 64 is an example in which after winning 1BBA, the advantageous section starts from the start of the 1BBA game (at the time of 1BBA operation). The start timing of this advantageous section is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, from the start of the next game of the game that has won 1BBA, to the start of the next game of the game that has won 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing as long as it is before the start of the first game of the 1BBA game). Further, as described in the first embodiment, when starting the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game, but the AT is not started because the 1BBA is operating (in the first example, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

In Example 1, the advantageous section ends before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the last game of the last game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the last game of the 1BBA game.
Further, in Example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. As in the first embodiment, the continuous production is a series of productions over a plurality of games (a production that gives an expectation of whether or not the AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game). At the end of the continuous production, After the end of the 1BBA game, an effect is output to notify the player whether to start the AT. The advantageous section ends when the continuous effect ends.

Therefore, in Example 1, during the last game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous effect is terminated (finally, the fact that AT is not started), and at the end of the game in which the continuous effect is ended, or When the performance ends, the advantageous section ends. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it is determined to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, a rare role (for example, small role D) is won during the 1BBA game, When the condition for extending the advantageous section (also referred to as a condition for changing the advantageous section; the same applies hereinafter) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 1 to Example 3.

  Example 2 in FIG. 64 is an example in which the end time of the 1BBA game and the end time of the advantageous section are matched. In Example 2, similar to Example 1, a continuous effect is started in the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), the 1BBA game is performed. Is notified whether or not the AT game is started after the end of the game. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of the 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous production, it is notified that AT is not started.

If the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game) as in Examples 1 and 2, the advantageous section ends even if the instruction function operation game is not performed once. It is possible. This is because many medals have already been acquired during the special game (1BBA game), and there is no need to extend the end of the advantageous section just to perform the instruction function operation game once. Rather, prolonging may increase player dissatisfaction.
Also, as in Example 1, when the 1BBA game is started, the advantageous section is extended at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section extension condition is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when the rare role is won), the advantageous section may not be ended at the end of the 1BBA game, and may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 2 to Example 3.

In Example 3 of FIG. 65, similar to Example 2, a continuous effect is started in the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (the last stop switch 42 may be operated, etc.), it is notified that the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game. Then, the AT is started from the next game of the last game of the 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start the AT immediately after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the next game of the game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT.
Note that the AT ends when an AT ending condition such as a predetermined number of games has been exhausted, and the advantageous section ends at the same time when the AT ends. However, even after the AT is completed, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

  At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not known whether the above is Example 1, Example 2, or Example 3; however, at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated, so that it is possible to shift to the advantageous section. When it is determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (determined to shift to the advantageous section) at the start of the 1BBA game, or is not lit (the advantageous section), as in the case of always being made as in Example 3. It is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous game performance that excites the expectation only by the fact that the game does not shift to the above, and to excite the player's expectation during the 1BBA game.

  In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the advantageous section is continued after the end of the 1BBA game, and the continuous effect is started after the end of the 1BBA game, and in the continuous effect, whether or not the AT is to be started (whether the advantageous section is continued) This is an example of notifying whether or not to do so. After the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which five consecutive effects are played. Of course, the continuous production may be any game. Then, it is notified whether or not to start the AT in the last game of the continuous production. Example 4 shows an example in which the AT is not started. Then, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous effect. Of course, the continuous effect may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from the next and subsequent games and the like.

As described above, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed for 5 games during the normal game (game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”.
Here, based on the winning of the BB, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game (of course, not necessarily at the same time), the BB game ends. Later, when ending the advantageous section in several games, control may be performed as follows.

(1) If the small role B group is never won during the five games, the advantageous section is terminated without executing the instruction function operation game.
(2) When the small win B group is won during the five games, the instruction function operation game is executed in that game.
(3) Even if the small win B group is won during the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If the player does not win the small role B group at any time between the five games, the advantageous section is extended until the small role B group is first won, and the instruction is given when the small role B group is first won. The function operation game is executed, and the advantageous section ends in the game.
Any of the above controls may be used.
As described above, the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable because it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”. As described above, when the BB game is performed during the advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section is performed only for performing the instruction function operation game once. This is because there is no need to extend it. Rather, prolonging may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the case where an instruction is given (executing the instruction function operation game) during five games is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, similarly to Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and whether or not the AT is started in the continuous effect is determined. This is an example of notifying. And in Example 5, it is notified that AT is started in the last game of the continuous production. Then, the AT is started from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, the AT does not have to be started from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the next game of the game that has been won in any of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT.
At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not known whether the above is Example 4 or Example 5, but at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. It is possible to fuel the player's expectation.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not the AT is executed (Examples 1 to 5) and the initial number of games of the AT are before the start of the 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of the 1BBA game. At times, it may be determined by lottery or the like, or it may be determined whether or not to execute the AT based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, it is determined to be Example 1, Example 2, or Example 4, and it is determined whether or not to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. . Further, for example, when "1BBA + Small win E1" in the first embodiment is won, the AT may be determined (Example 3 or Example 5).
Furthermore, whether or not to execute the AT and the initial number of games of the AT may be determined based on the conditions satisfied during the 1BBA game. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), during the 1BBA game or during the AT, the number of AT games may be added based on the winning of the condition apparatus.
Further, at the start of the 1BBA game, it is determined as in Example 4, but during the 1BBA game, or after the end of the 1BBA game, during the continuous production period of 5 games, when the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, (When the rare role is won) may be changed to Example 5 (executing AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game is determined depending on whether or not the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When determining whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game, as in Example 2 in FIG. Then, when it is determined to execute the AT during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the AT is executed after the 1BBA game is completed and the advantageous section is continued.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the ninth embodiment, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination (for example, 1BBA), when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) is determined. Yes, particularly, the advantageous section is started from a game in which the winning special role can be won.
In the ninth embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the condition apparatus including the special combination (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the condition device including the special combination is won and the shift to the advantageous section is made, the betting state and the payment possible state in the next game of the winning game are determined. By this time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, or until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (or the bet can be made in the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the state and the state in which the settlement can be performed).

In addition, the advantageous section is started at the time of starting the next game of the game that has won the condition device including the special role (at the time of operating the start switch 41) or at the time of starting the first game of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) ( (When the start switch 41 is operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination, there is a range in the start timing.
The ninth embodiment is characterized in that when a condition device including a special combination is won, and when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from a game in which the special combination can be won. I do.

Therefore, for example, in the first embodiment, for example, when 1 BBA is independently won, 1 BBA can be won in the game, and the advantageous section starts from the game.
On the other hand, when the player wins “1BBA + Small win E1”, the winning of the small win E1 is prioritized in the game, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped. Therefore, the advantageous section starts in the game. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game that has been won as “1BBA + Small win E1”, the win of the small win E1 has priority over 1BBA, and the small win E1 has “PB = 1”. 1BBA will not win. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when "1BBA + Small win D" is won, the winning of the small win D is prioritized in the game, but the small win 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small win D is "PB @ 1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the symbol (“watermelon”) related to the small role 35 cannot be stopped and the timing at which the symbol (“red 7”) related to 1BBA can be stopped, 1 BBA is played in the game. Winning is possible. For example, in FIG. 5, this is a case where the middle first stop is set and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both the 1BBA and the small combination 35 can be stopped, giving priority to stopping the design related to the small combination 35. For example, this is a case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the first stop on the right can be made to stop any of the symbols “red 7” and “watermelon” 5 on the active line.
On the other hand, at the first left stop, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the seventh “red 7” can be stopped at the active line, the fourth or ninth “watermelon” is stopped at the active line. Is given priority, so that the number 7 “red 7” does not stop at the active line.
Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above timing, the stop control that does not stop the seventh “red 7” on the active line is executed. As a result, the game at the time of winning “1BBA + Small Winner D” in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to “game that can win 1BBA”. Of course, when the middle first stop is performed and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the third "red 7" can be stopped on the active line, 1BBA can be won in the game. May be a winning game ".

  In the case where the condition device including the special role is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, if the game does not correspond to a game in which the special role can be won, in the lottery of the condition device in the next game, for example, If the winning is not achieved, the special role that has been won will be able to win a prize, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, the lottery of the condition device is performed, and the lottery is not won. Therefore, the advantageous section immediately after the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the condition device is performed. (At the same time or immediately before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on).

On the other hand, in the next game, for example, a small role or a replay is won, and the winning of the small role or the replay won in the game is prioritized. As a result, in a game in which the special role cannot be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Further, for example, in a game in which a special role is carried over, if a small role of “PB」 1 ”is won and the small role cannot be won, in a game in which the special role carrying over the winning can be won. In the same manner as when the above-mentioned “1BBA + Small Winner D” is won, the game does not start the advantageous section. Of course, in a game in which a special role that has been won can win a prize, an advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a view for explaining the flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. The example of FIG. 67 illustrates an example in which “1BBA + Small Winner E1” is won in the “N” game and 1BBA is won in the “N + 3” game.
First, when "1BBA + Small win E1" is won in the "N" game, only the small win E1 can win in the game, and 1BBA cannot win, so that the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, after the “N + 1” game, the winning of 1 BBA is carried over. In the “N + 1” game, an example in which the replay A is won is shown. At the time of the replay A winning, the replay 01 wins with “PB = 1” and the 1BBA carrying over the winning cannot win, so that the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game item, an example is shown in which the lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA which has been won can be won. Therefore, the advantageous section starts from the “N + 2” game. Here, at the start of the “N + 2” game, that is, based on the fact that the start switch 41 has been operated and the lottery of the condition device has been performed, the result of the non-winning (1 BBA has become possible to win) is advantageous. Since the section is started, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also started when the start switch 41 is operated.

  The player who wins 1BBA in the “N + 2” game eye can eliminate the wasteful number of times of the game played during the advantageous section. As described above, the player who has won the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game eye is an internal middle game in which extras and the like (including a lottery on whether to execute the AT in the eighth embodiment) cannot be performed, It is not necessary to start an advantageous section. Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is set in the advantageous section, and if the advantageous section starts in the inside middle game, the maximum advantageous number that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game. The number of games in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the inside medium game. For example, when 10 games are played in the inside middle game and 1 game is played in the game in which 1BBA is won, and 16 games are played in the 1BBA game, only 1473 games are played in the advantageous section at the maximum after the 1BBA game is completed. Can't do it.

  However, the player who has won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game has no amount consumed in the internal medium game (0 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1BBA is won, and 16 games in the 1BBA game). In the game after the end of the 1BBA game, a maximum of 1483 games can be played in the advantageous section.) Therefore, compared to the player who could not win the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game item. , May be advantageous. On the other hand, a player who could not win 1 BBA in the “N + 2” game eye will continue the inside middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1BBA cannot be won in the “N + 2” game item.

  Further, in the “N + 3” game item, similarly to the “N + 2” game item, an example is shown in which the lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA which has been won can be won. Then, an example in which 1BBA can be won in the “N + 3” game item is shown. Thus, the 1BBA game is started from the “N + 4” game.

Here, for example, if the advantageous section is set to start uniformly from the start of the 1BBA game, the number of games varies depending on the skill of the player's pressing from the time of winning the 1BBA to winning (medal consumption). Although there is a difference in the number of sheets), there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the skill of the player (whether or not the player has noticed the winning of the special role, or when the player knows the winning of the special role, becomes the special role without a mistake in the eyesight). Depending on whether or not the corresponding combination of symbols has been pushed so as to stop on the activated line), the number of games in the useless advantageous section fluctuates.

For example, if the special role can be won in the first game in which the special role can be won, after starting the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not wasted in the internal middle game.
On the other hand, in the first game in which the special role can be awarded, if the special role cannot be won due to a failure to push, etc., the game in which the special role can be awarded again after the next game. You need to wait until. However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special combination can be won, the advantageous section is wastefully consumed during that time.
In this way, the actual number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games after the end of the special game) can be varied according to the skill of the player.

As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, for example, the following example is given.
(Modification 1)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section as soon as the game that has exhausted the number of games, the next game, or when the special game starts (the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped). .
(Modification 2)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the earlier of the game that has exhausted the number of games or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can be won.

(Modification 3)
Even in the case where the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special combination can win, the end condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of the special combination, an advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed after the end of the special game is won. In this case, for 50 ATs after the end of the special game, the 50 games are counted at the same time as the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special combination can win, the 50 games of the AT start counting at the same time as the start of the AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the count of the game “1500”, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is performed from the first game in which the winning special role can win. In this way, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of games played in the AT is added), the skill of the player is affected.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when the condition device including the special role is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special role can be awarded. The advantageous section may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be awarded (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the time the bettable state and the state in which the settlement can be performed in the next game). ). In this way, when the special role is won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the game in which the special role is won is not counted as a game in the advantageous section, so that the player May be even more advantageous than unskilled players.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game that has been won for a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of a special role (1BBA), or a continuous production (special role (for example, three games)) from the next game to a plurality of games (for example, three games) (1BBA) is an effect that inspires whether or not a winning is achieved, and an effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has been won for the last game may be output. Of course, a game that has won a condition device (for example, small role E1) that does not include the winning of the special role (1BBA), or a continuous production (special role (1BBA)) from the next game to a plurality of games (for example, three games) is won. It is an effect that fuels whether or not the player is playing, and it is necessary to output an effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has not been won in the last game.

  Then, when a continuous effect is output (in particular, before the effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has been won) is performed, for example, two games when a continuous effect over the next game and three games is output When 1BBA can be won in the eyes (that is, “N + 2” game eyes), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit for the game, which indicates that the player has won 1BBA. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1BBA has been won may be output. If it is the last game of the continuous production, the continuous production may be output as it is, or a production indicating that 1BBA has been won may be outputted instead of the continuous production.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which a continuous effect is output, even if 1BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on. Specifically, a game that has been won in a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of the special role (1BBA), or a predetermined number of games (equal to or more than the number of games that output a continuous effect) from the next game During the period, even if the special role (1BBA) can be won, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on), but after a predetermined number of games, the special role (1BBA) can be initially won. When this happens, the advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned on).

<Tenth embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when the 1BBA is won during the execution of the AT (that is, during the advantageous section) and the game shifts to the 1BBA game, after the 1BBA game ends, the game shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to the AT). Sometimes, the additional number of AT games (that is, the number of games in the advantageous section) can be added.
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when the AT is executed in RT3 (for example, when it is determined to shift to the 100 game AT (that is, the advantageous section) at the time of winning the small part E1 and the AT is executed), Assume that 1 BBA has been won (either 1 BBA alone or 1 BBA and small win E1). When 1BBA is won, if 1BBA does not win in the game, the process shifts to RT4 (inside). When 1BBA is won, the game shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). When the end condition during 1BBA operation (1BBA game) is satisfied, the routine shifts to non-RT.

  When the 1BBA game ends and the game shifts to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is being prepared (for example, any of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, and the replay B group). The AT is restarted from the next game of the crab-winning game, etc. For this reason, during the preparation of the AT, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT. Of course, it is an advantageous section during AT preparation.) When the AT is set to be started from that point, when the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. When one of the replay B groups is won at RT2, the instruction function is operated to display a pressing order in which the replay 02 is won. When Replay 02 wins in RT2, the process moves to RT3. Then, the AT is continued while maintaining the RT3. If the setting is made during AT preparation up to RT2, the AT is basically resumed after shifting to RT3.

  Here, based on the transition from RT2 to RT3, the additional number of AT games (that is, the advantageous section) can be added. This addition may be performed at all times, or may be determined by lottery. As an opportunity for the addition, the replay B group is elected (that is, it is added even if the transition from RT2 to RT3 is not performed. Of course, when the AT is being prepared, the AT may be started from this point). Preferred), winning the replay 02, and shifting from RT2 to RT3.

  In addition, in the tenth embodiment, it is possible to execute the extra based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via non-RT after the end of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1BBA winning, execution of 1BBA game, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, storage using a flag can be mentioned. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (may be when the replay B group wins or replay 02 wins), it is determined whether or not the flag is on, and it is determined that the flag is on. It is possible to add the number of AT games to the condition. In addition, when an additional or an additional lottery is executed, the flag is changed from on to off.

  As described above, if it is determined whether or not the vehicle can be added by using the flag, for example, a state in which RT2 and RT3 are only moved back and forth (simply, during AT execution, the pushing order is missed, and the operation is shifted to RT2. At the time of transition to RT3 again), since the flag is off, there is no addition when transitioning from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example. However, even if 1BBB, that is, a condition device including a special role having a setting difference is won, it is possible to execute as long as it is added as described above.
Similarly to the above, the winning of 1BBB, the execution of 1BBB game, or the stay of RT1 are stored in the flag. Then, after the 1BBB game is over, a transition is made from RT1 to RT2, and further to RT3 (when a replay B group is won or a replay 02 wins), an extra run can be executed. . Thus, even when the player wins 1BBB having a setting difference that cannot be added during the winning or during the BB game (when the game shifts to the 1BBB game), the player can be expected to be added. Can be.

In addition, the addition may be performed based on a shift from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, the addition may be made possible based on the winning of the small role B group in the non-RT or RT1, the display of the pattern symbol, or the transition from the non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the transition to non-RT also occurs when the RWM 53 is initialized, but the above-mentioned flag is turned off with the initialization of the RWM 53, so the transition from non-RT to RT2, and further from RT2 to RT3. Even if it does, no extra is executed. In addition, in the first place, the addition is not performed in the normal section.
Further, when 1BBA or 1BBB is won during the execution of the AT and the process shifts to RT4 (internal), the number of AT games played at RT4 is not added.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following method is also possible.
After the end of the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT5 (new addition). Then, at RT5, a condition device which is a multiple winning of a plurality of replays is randomly selected, the condition device is won, and a transition from RT5 to RT3 can be made based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern symbol. In addition, settings are made so as not to shift to RT5 from non-RT, RT2 or RT3.
In this manner, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the winning of the condition device at RT5, the display of a predetermined replay, the winning of the small role B group at RT5, and the pattern design are displayed. Or the transition from RT5 to RT3), the additional number of AT games can be executed, and the flag as described above does not need to be provided.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single win of the small win E1, a small win E1 (number of “250”), which shifts to an advantageous section when winning in the normal section, is won in the normal section. Also, a small winning combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when any of the small wins E1 is won in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is made. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small win E1 with the set number “250” is referred to as “small win E1a”, and the small win E1 with the set number “750” is referred to as “small win E1b”.
Further, the small role E2, 1BBA and the small role E2 have been deleted.
By doing so, in the game in which the small role 36 has won, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is always made (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by then).

Further, the advantageous section when the small role E1b is won is an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be ended only by executing the instruction function operation game once (for example, the instruction function operation game is completed once and the game is ended in 5 games). is there. Such an advantageous section may be referred to as an AT gaseous sign among the AT signs.
On the other hand, the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1a is an advantageous section in which the AT is executed after the AT omen, and the number of games is after the AT omen (by the way, the AT omen is one time of the instruction function operation game). (After the execution, the game is terminated with 5 games). Note that the count of the 50 games may be started immediately after the AT sign, may be started at the time of transition to RT3 (or the next game), or may be started at the time of winning the replay B group (or the next game). , Or may be started by staying at RT3 (or the next game). Furthermore, during the 50 games, when a condition device (small win B group, small win C group, replay B group, or replay C group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  Also, tentatively, there is a small win E1 (number of "250") that shifts to the advantageous section, a small win E1 (number of "750") that does not shift to the advantageous section, and a small win E2 that does not shift to the advantageous section. When the player wins the small role E1 (number of “250”) shifting to the advantageous section, when shifting to the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games can be executed, the small portion 36 wins the winning game or the next game. However, there is no point in outputting a continuous effect for increasing the player's expectation as in the related art. This is because whether or not to shift to the advantageous section can be determined by checking whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. The eleventh embodiment is conceived to output a continuous effect for increasing the expectation of a player as in the related art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing advantageous sections and the like at the time of winning the small combination E1b (example 1) and the small combination E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small win E1b is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on). Then, it waits until the small role B group is won. After the start of the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display an advantageous pressing order in the game that has won the first small win B group (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of the instruction function operation game, a continuous effect is outputted (even during the continuous effect, the AT sign is in progress). Of course, a continuous effect may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, five consecutive games are executed. Then, in the fifth game, an effect is output as to whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter. At the time of winning the small role E1b, since the advantageous section (AT precursor) can be completed by one instruction function operation game, the advantageous section (AT precursor) is completed in the game in which the continuous production is completed, and the game shifts to the normal section. .
Note that when the player wins the small role B group during the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed. However, in this embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small portion E1a is won, an advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on), and the instruction function operation game is executed in the first game won in the small portion B group. A continuous effect (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when winning the small role E1b). Then, at the time of the winning of the small role E1a, an effect meaning that the advantageous section (AT) is continued thereafter is output in the fifth game of the continuous effect. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the end of the continuous production.
In addition, when the small win B group is further won during the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game is not executed as in the case of the win of the small win E1b. Of course, during the five games in the continuous production after winning the small role E1b, when further winning the small role B group, when performing the instruction function operation game, after winning the small role E1a It is preferable to execute the instruction function operation game even when the small win B group is won during the five games during the continuous production of. This is because when the small part E1b is elected and the small part E1a is elected, if the instruction function operation game is executed / not executed during the continuous production, it is different. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT).

Here, at the time of winning the small part E1a, it is determined that the AT of 50 games is executed. Alternatively, the advantageous section (AT with no AT precursor) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (the next game at the time of winning the small role E1a). Alternatively, after the shift to the advantageous section, the 50th game may be counted with the first instruction function operation game as the first game (AT sign before the last game of this game, AT is started from this game).
Further, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game won as the winning combination (replay B group including replay 02) which can be shifted to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22). If the next game that has won the replay that can be shifted to a specific RT is 50 games from the next game, the pressing order for shifting to the specific RT is notified in the game that has been selected as the replay B group. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game won in the replay B group (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of the 50th game from the next game is executed. Become. Thus, it is possible to prevent a capture or the like in which the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Further, in the specification in which the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game won as the small win E1a, if the small win E1a is won while staying at the specific RT, another RT from the specific RT is performed. Notification for maintaining a specific RT when a winning combination (pattern design 01-03 or replay 03 that can display replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) is won. May be performed. Then, the counting of the AT may be started from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed, or a predetermined game after the notification in order to maintain the specific RT (the next game may be performed). ). By setting in this manner, the number of games that are once transferred to another RT and then transferred to a specific RT again can be reduced, so that it is advantageous up to the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). The opportunity to give a game can be increased.

In the above example, in each of the small wins E1a and the small wins E1b, the continuous production is set to 5 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first instruction function operation game or the next game is executed by the 50 game AT. May be output as a game (1 game) for outputting an effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, at the time of winning the small win E1b (the number of "750"), it is set as an advantageous section (AT after the AT warning) where the AT of 50 games is executed after the AT warning, and at the time of winning the small winning E1a (the number of "250"). It may be an advantageous section (AT precursor) in which the game can be completed by the second instruction function operation game.

Further, when the small win E1a is won, the number of games “m” of the AT is determined, and when the small win E1a and the small win E1b are won, the number of games “n” before the first instruction function operation game can be executed is determined. Determined by lottery. When the number of games "n" is determined, the instruction function is not activated until the number of games "n" elapses, even when the small role B group is won. After the elapse of the number of games "n", the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small win B group.
In addition, when the determined number of games “n” includes, for example, “n1” and “n2” (n1 <n2), and when the determined number of games of the AT is “m1” at the time of winning the small role E1a, In the case of "n1", "n2" may be easily determined when the determined number of games of the AT is "m2" which is larger than "m1". Also, “n1” may be easily determined even when the small role E1b is won. Further, at the time of winning of the small role E1a, “n1” may be more easily determined at the time of winning of the small role E1b than at the time of the determined number of games of the AT being “m1”.
In this way, after the transition to the advantageous section, the longer the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the larger number of AT games is determined, You can expect. Of course, the shorter the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of games of the larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a continuous effect is output from the next game at the time of winning the first small win B group. This is because, as in the related art, a continuous effect is simply output from the next game of the game that has been won as the small role E1a or the small role E1b (the continuous performance is performed in five games). In the advantageous section (AT) when the small role E1a is won, the AT after the AT sign (the AT sign ends in 5 games) may be assumed to end in 50 games. Even if it is assumed that the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning E1b ends in five games, unless the instruction function operation game is executed at least once during the five games, the fifth game of the continuous effect is performed. This is because there is a possibility that inconvenience such as the end of the advantageous section (AT precursor) may not occur even though the effect indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is not continued is output thereafter.

  In addition, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b ends with one instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed at the fifth game of the continuous effect. However, there is a possibility that an advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of the continuous production, or that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production. Because there is. Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b ends in five games after executing the instruction function operation game once, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous effect. This is because it is not always the case, and there is a possibility that an inconvenience such that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production may occur.

However, the advantageous section (AT) at the time of winning the small role E1a is that the AT after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) ends with the 50 games, If the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b is assumed to be completed by one instruction function operation game, the continuous production starts from the game which started the advantageous section at any time. The continuous production is continued until the first small role B group is won, and when the first small role B group is won, the indicating function is activated, and in the game or the next game, the advantageous section (AT ) May be notified.
In this case, the number of games until the first small role B group wins is indeterminate, so that an effect image indicating that a continuous effect used in a game in which the continuous effect is continued is continued, and an advantageous section An effect image indicating that (AT) is not continued and an effect image indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared, and a continuous effect may be output.
In addition, during the advantageous section (AT precursor) based on the winning of the small role E1b (for example, during a continuous production), when the small role E1a (small role E1b is acceptable) is won, the AT of 50 games is performed after the AT precursor. (Continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Examples 3 and 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first small role B group is won, and the continuous effect is output from the next game at the time of the small role B group winning.
In contrast, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output a continuous effect until the first small role B group wins, for example, when the small role E1 wins, and starts from the next game when the small role B group wins. This is an example in which a continuous effect is not output, and an advantageous section which ends when the AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when the small role E1 is won is started. Of course, the condition for terminating the advantageous section in Example 3 is not limited to this, and the AT of 30 games (the number of games is free) is executed after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign may end with 5 games). Alternatively, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied. Of course, an advantageous section with different end conditions may be started when the small win E1a is won and when the small win E1b is won.

  Further, when the small role E1 is won, there may be a case where the advantageous section is started and a case where the advantageous section is not started. In the example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous section, the small section B group is never won by the time until the first set advantageous section end condition (for example, executing the AT of 30 games) is reached. This is an example. If the small win B group is won before the end condition of the advantageous section is reached and the instruction function operation game is executed, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when the 30 game AT is executed), the advantageous section ends.

  On the other hand, when the condition for ending the advantageous section has been reached and the instruction function operation game has not been executed even once (such as when the small role B group has never been won), then the small role B At least the advantageous section will be extended until the group is won and the instruction function operation game is executed. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, an example is shown in which the advantageous section is extended, then the instruction function operation game is executed (by winning the small win B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. Note that, in Example 3, the advantageous section is ended less than 1500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in Example 4 of FIG. 69, since the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is not executed once (without winning the small role B group), and the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500. This is an example in which a game has been reached. In other words, the end condition of the advantageous section has been reached, but the upper limit has been reached because the advantageous section has been extended, or there is an addition in the advantageous section, and the end condition of the advantageous section has not been reached. This is an example of when the vehicle has arrived.
In the rare case such as Example 4, unlike the case of Example 3, even if the instruction function operation game is not executed even once, the advantageous section ends when the upper limit is reached. This means that “when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game) is reached, the advantageous section is terminated” rather than “at least one instruction function operation game is executed during the advantageous section”. To do that. This is because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if the player wins a rare role such as the small role E1 during that time, the advantage section is not obtained. It is possible to add extra (of course, it is not necessary), but as in Example 4, when the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, the rare role won during that time , Because it is not possible to add an advantageous section to the player, the normal section is more advantageous for the player. (If the player wins the rare role during the normal section, a new advantageous section starts. Because there is).

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantageous section is continued up to the upper limit of 1500 games (for example, when the small part E1 or the like is elected and added, etc. are performed during the started advantageous section, and it is determined that the advantageous section is continued). Or when the 1BB game or the like is performed during an advantageous section, for example, when it is determined that the game is to be continued, for example, from the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached). This is a feature (the ending effect is output as in Example 3 of FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). It should be noted that the game is not limited to the 1450 game, and various settings such as the 1400 game, the 1470 game, and the like can be set.
The ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the “ending effect” is, for example, a moving image, also referred to as a movie image, which is not divided for each game (not an image switched for each unit game, but a moving image whose time is determined in advance). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, the player can see the end of the game in exactly 50 games (game in which the advantageous section ends). When the process reaches the end, the process is repeated from the beginning or the last image is displayed as a still image. As described above, it is preferable that the ending effect is set to a length that can be seen to the end before the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays in the shortest time. At the end of the ending effect (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals obtained in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals obtained and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) are displayed. indicate. Of course, the total number of medals obtained in the advantageous section (total number of obtained medals), the difference between the total number of obtained medals and the total number of inserted medals (total obtained difference number), and the total number of games (1,500 games) are ending effects. May be displayed not as the last but also as another effect that is output thereafter (such as an effect that is output during a freeze executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)). .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450 game, the ending effect is ended at the 1500 game, and the advantageous period is ended in the advantageous section.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB in the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section, and a 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, it has not reached the 1450 game eye in the advantageous section. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect starts from the 1450th game, and the ending effect ends at the 1500th game (the ending effect ends with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, FIG. 70B shows an example in which, in the advantageous section, after the ending effect starts from the 1450 game, 1BB is won at the 1490 game and the 1BB game is executed. Then, an example is shown in which the end time of the 1BB game has exceeded the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends with 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). Incidentally, no freeze is executed even when the advantageous section is ended. Therefore, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the end of the advantageous section (the normal section).

  In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). This is because, when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached when the 1BB game is not being performed as in (a), the advantage is output at the end of the ending effect or during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section. It is necessary to display the total number of games in the section, the total number of acquired pieces, and the like (particularly, the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games in the AT, the total number of pieces acquired in the AT, and the like). On the other hand, when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game as in (b), the 1BB game is executed thereafter (this is a normal section), and the ending effect ends at this point. In such a manner, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the advantageous section, and the effect output during the freeze is to display the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired in the advantageous section by 1BB. This is because it is not preferable because it also hinders the game.

  In the first place, when ending the 1BB game, a freeze is executed at the end of the effect during the 1BB game or at the end of the 1BB game, and in the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games during the 1BB game and the total Since the acquired number is displayed, in the case of (b), even when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this time and the 1BB game is ended. The ending effect is ended, and a freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the 1BB game. In the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number of acquired games, etc. (especially , The number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games during the AT, etc.) are considered preferable. .

  Also, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, etc. in the advantageous section (strictly, executed in the advantageous section) If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games during AT, or the total number of acquired items during AT, it is better not to include the total number of games or the total number of acquired items during that period (normal section and during 1BB game). It is good, but if not strictly concerned with the display, the display may also include the total number of games and the total number obtained during that time (in the normal section and during the 1BB game). When the content is included and displayed, the player is more satisfied. For example, although the advantageous section can be executed only up to 1500 games, the display is more than 1500 games, so there is a sense of satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the 1BB game are displayed together with the ending effect, or the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the advantageous section (particularly, the advantageous section) , The total number of AT games, the total number of acquired games during AT, etc.) is displayed during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Will also continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (Example 3), when the ending effect is output, the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the 1BB game, the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired in the advantageous section, and the like (particularly, When the set number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games during the AT, the total number of acquired pieces in the AT, etc.) are not displayed, during the 1BB game after the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, those Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, the game can be viewed to the end by the game in which the advantageous section ends. Repeating from the beginning or displaying the last image as a still image), but also outputting the ending effect after the end of the advantageous section as in the example of (b), repeating the ending effect from the beginning, or The last image of the ending effect may be continuously displayed as a still image.
The ending effect does not switch images for each unit game (divides for each game), but a moving image whose time is determined in advance, a moving image that is divided for a predetermined number of games, a still image that is not divided for each game, or It may be any of still images and the like, which are divided for each predetermined number of games.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT shift as in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 22 is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment has the following features.
(1) The winning probabilities of the condition devices (the replay B group, the replay C group, and the small role B group) related to the RT transition do not have a setting difference.
(2) At the non-RT or at the RT2 shifted from the RT1, the advantageous section is added (possible) based on the winning in the replay B group. On the other hand, in the case of transition from RT3 to RT2, when the transition is made from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of replay A is set to have a difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device of “small win D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in the present embodiment, the small win D has a setting difference. ). Also in the thirteenth embodiment, the same number table (1) as that in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (the number table of the small combination D is not provided).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small role B group and display a pattern symbol. Here, in order to display the pattern symbol, it is necessary to win the small win B group. Then, when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group, the ease of shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 differs depending on the setting value (the ease of shifting from RT3 to RT2 also differs). ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the small win B group does not have a setting difference between the non-RT and the RT1. In the example of FIG. 71, the set numbers of the small wins B1 to B12 are set to “770” for all the settings in common (not limited to this value). In order to make the appearance rates of the small wins B1 to B12 the same, all the small wins B1 to B12 have the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the numbers of replays B1 to B3 are all “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn by lot only at RT3, and the numbers of replays C1 to C3 are all “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when RT2 is shifted from non-RT or RT1, when the replay B group is won (may be displayed when replay 02 is displayed or when shifting from RT2 to RT3), an additional advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition of the advantageous section may be always added, or may be determined by lottery as to whether or not to be added. Also, the number of additional games may be a fixed number of predetermined games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that “addition of an advantageous section” can be replaced with “addition of AT” in all embodiments. For example, when the special role is won during the AT (for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT is "5") and the non-RT or RT2 shifted from the RT1 after finishing the special game and the replay B group is won, An additional lottery is executed to increase the remaining number of games in the AT, and when this lottery is won, the remaining number of games in the AT can be increased (for example, the remaining number of games in the AT game can be set to “25”).

The addition of the advantageous section at the time of the replay B group winning in the non-RT or the RT2 shifted from the RT1 is similar to the tenth embodiment described above.
In the thirteenth embodiment, since the replay B group is a condition device having no difference in the winning probability (number), it is possible to add an advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from having a difference in the addition probability.
Further, similarly to the tenth embodiment, when a transition is made from RT3 to RT2, in RT2, even if the replay B group is won (even if replay 02 is displayed, or if RT2 is shifted to RT3). , Do not execute the addition of the advantageous section.
Further, at the time of winning of the replay B group in RT2, the game player maintains RT2 or shifts to RT3. Therefore, the replay B group is a condition device to which RT can be transferred. Since the replay B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to have no setting difference in the probability of transition from RT2 to RT3 (ease of transition).

  At the time of winning of the replay C group in RT3, RT3 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the replay C group is a condition device to which RT can be transferred. Since the replay group C is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT3 to RT2 (easiness of shifting).

Similarly, when the small winning combination B is won in the non-RT, RT1, or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the small win B group is a condition device that can transfer RT. The small role B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probabilities, so that there is no setting difference in the probability (easiness of shifting) from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2. can do.
Note that the small win C group does not correspond to a condition device to which RT can be transferred, and thus may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the condition device that enables the transfer of the RT (the condition device related to the RT transfer) does not have the setting difference in the winning probability, so that the RT transfer rate is not affected by the setting difference. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) that shifts based on the winning of the special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of “1BBA + Small Winner E2”, 1BBB, and “1BBB + Small Winning D” have a set difference, but shift to RT4 (internal ) Is an exception (may be affected by the setting difference). This is because RT4 (inside the inside) shifts based on the winning of the special role, and does not shift according to the player's pressing order, and therefore has a different property from the above. Furthermore, RT4 (inside the inside) is intended to stay for a short period of time until 1BB is won, and therefore has a different property from that described above. Further, RT4 (inside the interior) cannot determine the transition to the advantageous section even during the normal section, and cannot add to the advantageous section even during the advantageous section. This is because there is no difference in the setting between the transition probability and the addition probability.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning probability (number) of replay A. Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift at the time of the replay A winning, even if a setting difference is provided, the RT shift rate is not affected. As described above, the higher the winning probability of replay A, the higher the probability of performing a replay. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including replays, the higher the win probability of replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
In the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of replay A is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. For this reason, the non-winning probability (probability of losing) can be made lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the payout rate can be increased accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single win of the small win E1, a small win E1 (number of “250”) which shifts to an advantageous section when winning in the normal section is won in the normal section. Also provided a small role E1 (number "750") which does not shift to the advantageous section. For example, when the small part E1 of the number “250” is won, the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed (the counting of the 50 games may be started immediately, and when shifting to RT3 (or the next game) ), May be started when the replay B group is won (or the next game), or may be started by staying at RT3 (or the next game). It is assumed that a transition is made (in addition, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied). Even with the same 50 game AT, a medal is newly inserted when the winning probability of replay A is high (low winning probability is low) than when the winning probability of replay A is low (high non-winning probability). Since there is no need to (consume), the payout rate increases accordingly. In this way, even if there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to make a setting difference in the payout rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the small role D is a condition device having no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition apparatus has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the number of payouts when the small win D is won and the small win 35 (watermelon) wins is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small win D is the small win with the maximum payout number among the small wins.

  In addition, since the small win 35 related to the small win D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small win 35 cannot be won unless it is pushed. For this reason, for example, at the time of winning the small part D, an effect indicating that the small part D has been won may be outputted, such as giving a green notification. Here, when the winning combination of “PB # 1” wins the condition device that enables the winning, outputting an effect indicating the winning is not “operation of the instruction function”. Although it is true that there is a case where the small win 35 wins or a case where the small win does not win at the timing of the eye-catching, the small win 35 does not lose any time regardless of whether the small win D is elected or not. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a role that can always win. In this point, unlike the small win B group of the present invention, the small win differs in the winning rate depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated. For example, if the operation is always performed on the left first to win the small win 01 when the small win B1 is won, the small win 01 cannot be won when the small win B5 is won.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the fourth, ninth, or fourteenth “watermelon” in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 8th or 13th “watermelon” can be stopped at the active line (the right reel 31 can be at any timing since “watermelon” is “PB = 1”) The small role 35 can always be awarded (even if there is no notification).
In the present invention, there is no role of “PB ≠ 1” other than the small win 35 (excluding the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order at the time of winning the small win B group). If the switch 42 is operated, the small win 35 will not be missed.
As described above, the game at the time of winning the small role D does not correspond to the "game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention.

As a result, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device which is the maximum payout by the activation of the instruction function at least once during the advantageous section, but it is necessary to activate the instruction function. Is the condition unit which gives the maximum payout, not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small role E1 (two payout sheets) is provided as a condition device having no setting difference.

As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small role D: There is a setting difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small role group B: No difference in setting (when the push order is correct, 9 payouts)
Winning probability of small role E1: No difference (2 payouts)
And the relationship between the number of payouts is
Small role D> Small role group B (when the answer is correct)> Small role E1
Becomes

  If the game at the time of winning the small role D is set to correspond to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention (the small winning combination having a different winning rate depending on whether the instruction function is activated or not). In this case), the “condition device that provides the maximum payout due to the activation of the instruction function” becomes the small win D instead of the small win B group. In such a case, the winning probability of the small win D is low, so that it may frequently occur that the small win D is not won before the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (the advantageous section cannot be ended but the advantageous section is to be ended). However, if the winning probability of the small role D is increased (if it is higher than the winning probability of the small role group B), there is a high possibility that the small role D and 1BBB are duplicated and won (rare role). (Mostly in the case of the single winning of the small role D, because there is no expectation of the overlapping winning with 1BBB).

For this reason, the number of payouts when the small win D wins must be made smaller than the number of payouts when the pressing order of the small win B group is correct. Then, even if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small win D, the payout rate does not change much (the payout rate greatly changes because the small win with a large number of payouts has the setting difference). Because it will do that). However, if the winning probability of the small win B group having a large number of payouts at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order has a setting difference, then the setting difference will appear in the ease of the RT shift.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the payout rate differs according to the set value using the small winning combination D having a large payout number (the payout rate increases as the setting is higher (the payout rate increases according to the set value). Changes)), and the RT transition can be prevented from being affected by the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small win D is “PB ≠ 1”. For example, if “watermelon” is arranged in “PB = 1” for all the reels 31 (regardless of the player's eyes), (Regardless of skill).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the small win D has a case where the small win is overlapped with 1BBB, so that the higher the setting, the easier the small win 35 appears, and when the small win 35 appears, the 1BBB is expected to be won. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is won when the small role 35 appears is “20/520” = “0.038 (about 3.8% )) And the setting value is set to “6”, the probability that 1 BBB is won when the small role 35 appears is “25/625” = “0.040 (about 4.0% ) ". Therefore, when the small role 35 appears, the higher the set value is, the higher the possibility of winning the 1BBB is high. Therefore, an element for estimating the set value is provided to the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is increased. You can also.

  As can be said in all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 71, it is free to change a portion indicated by “O” to “X”, and to “X”. It is free to change the location to “」 ”unless the condition device has no setting difference and is won only at a specific RT (RT4, during 1BBA game, not during 1BBB game), and“ × ” It is free to change the part marked with “△” into a condition unit if there is no setting difference.

<14th embodiment>
In the fourteenth embodiment, when a condition for changing the end condition of the advantageous section (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied before the end of the advantageous section (before reaching the end condition) after the start of the advantageous section. Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, at the start of an advantageous section (for example, when the previous game was won in the small role D in the first embodiment, etc.), if the number of games (initial value) of the advantageous section was 30 games, the advantage was provided during the advantageous section. When the condition for extending the section (for example, the winning of the small win E1 in the first embodiment) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but other end conditions of the various advantageous sections described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small win B group. In Example 1, the number of games played in the initially set advantageous section is set to 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which during the 30 games, the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied and the number of games is increased by “50”. If the extension condition is not satisfied during the first 30 games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game, as indicated by the two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, if at least one instruction function operation game is being executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the player does not win the small role B group at all, ie, 1 The advantageous section can be ended without executing the instruction function operation game. This is because one instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the number of games in the initially set advantageous section is 30 games. An example is shown.
In Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (80 games in total), the small role B group was never won (ie, the instruction function operation game was never executed). It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (it has reached 80 games), the advantageous section is not ended.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when the small win B group is won during the extended 50 games and the instruction function operation game is executed (in the figure, the two-dot chain line A), the advantageous section of the extended 50 games is performed. Can be terminated (two-dot chain line B in the figure).
On the other hand, if a total of 80 games, that is, the instruction function has not been executed at least once since the start of the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated after waiting for the small role B group to be won. Perform the game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 games, and the number of extended games is set to 50 games. However, in these advantageous sections, the gaseous AT precursor (for example, CZ or AT If the transition condition is not satisfied, the game ends with 32 games (the number of games is free), or the game ends with one (the number of games is free) instruction function operation game, etc. Even if it is not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free), it becomes an AT of 50 games (the number of games is free, and the timing to start counting the number of games may be the various timings described above). , CZ (for example, if the transition condition to AT is not satisfied, the game ends with 10 games (the number of games is free), or the game ends with one (the number of games is free), and the game is terminated. Omen In all, the condition for shifting to AT is easily satisfied), AT (if the extension condition is not satisfied, 30 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of counting the number of games may apply the various timings described above). , Etc.).

  For example, at the start of the advantageous section, the game shifts to CZ (corresponding to the game “30” in FIG. 72). If the condition for shifting to AT (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied during this CZ, AT (“50”) is satisfied. (Corresponding to the extension of the game) (extending the condition for ending the advantageous section). On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the AT is not satisfied during the CZ, the advantageous section is ended when the condition for ending the CZ is satisfied, and the mode shifts to the normal section (normal for CZ, AT, etc.) (eg, 1, two-dot chain line).

Furthermore, in addition to the above,
(1) The first advantageous section is set to CZ (for example, one that ends with 30 games), and if the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, the CZ having a longer number of games (adding “20” to the number of games) ).
(2) The first advantageous section is referred to as an "advantageous section (gasse AT precursor or CZ) ending after a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of the instruction function operation game", and is an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. When the extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of the small role E1) is satisfied, the CZ (the predetermined number of games or the game in which the instruction function operation game is completed at the predetermined number of times), Or, it is changed to AT (one that ends with a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is defined as “an advantageous section (for example, a gaseous AT sign or CZ) that ends with a predetermined number of (for example, one) instruction function operation games”, and is an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. If the extension condition (extension condition or CZ shift condition) is satisfied, the “advantageous section (gasset AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a plurality of (eg, three) instruction function operation games a predetermined number or more times” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is an AT of 30 games, and if the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to an AT of 100 games (the number of games added is "70").
And the like.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games in the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function operation game is executed only at the time of winning the first small role B group, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is performed in the small role B group. , It is not necessary to execute the instruction function operation game.
On the other hand, during the CZ (during 30 games), two or more instruction function operation games may be executed.
Even when the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, if the instruction function operation game has already been executed once during the CZ, the instruction function operation game will not be executed in the subsequent AT. You may. In addition, the same applies when the condition for shifting to CZ or AT is satisfied during the gaseous AT precursor. That is, it is only necessary to execute one instruction function operation game from the start of the advantageous section to the end thereof.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized in that a freeze is executed and a stop is not executed when the advantageous section ends.
FIG. 73 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an advantageous section and a freeze in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section is to be executed (for example, when winning the small role E1), the CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the AT is started after the end of the CZ. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some may start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, while others may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, in the first CZ (advantageous section), the condition for shifting to AT is not satisfied, and the advantageous section ends only with CZ. In the next CZ (advantage section), an example in which the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied, the AT is executed after the end of the CZ, and the AT and the advantage section are ended. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the CZ may be immediately terminated and the AT may be executed, or the AT may be executed until the CZ is terminated (this means that the AT is executed). Not limited to the embodiment).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even when the game ends only with CZ, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game since the transition to the advantageous section has been made.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first CZ is completed (when AT is not performed after the CZ is completed and the advantageous section is completed), no freeze is performed (two-dot chain line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, a freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantaged section).
At the time of a freeze, at least the total number of games played by the AT and the total number of acquired games are displayed as images. Of course, the information including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the CZ may be displayed as an image, and when shifting from the CZ to the AT via the AT precursor, during the CZ and / or during the AT precursor What includes the total number of games and the total number of acquired games may be displayed as an image.

In this way, it is determined in advance what advantageous section is to execute the freeze at the end and what advantageous section is to execute the freeze at the end.
For example, as expected values such as the total number of games played and the total number of cards acquired in the advantageous section, the first ending condition (for example, the ending of the advantageous section only with CZ (can be a gaseous AT sign)) and the expected value more than the first ending condition Has a large second end condition (for example, when executing AT after CZ, or when executing only AT), and when ending the advantageous section with the first end condition, the freeze is not executed and the advantageous section is not executed. Is terminated under the second termination condition, a freeze is executed. This is because the freeze is executed until the expected values such as the total number of games and the total number of acquired pieces in the advantageous section are small (for example, 10 games as the total number of games and 12 pieces of the total number of acquired games). If the total number of acquired images and the like are displayed as an image, there is a high possibility that the player will feel more disappointed (decrease in interest).
Even in the advantageous section, unlike the AT, there are those which do not aim to give many medals to the player (increase the total number of acquired coins), such as the gaseous AT sign, the AT sign, and CZ. It is not preferable to execute the freeze uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the freeze includes, for example, providing a freeze flag. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but turns on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If the freeze flag is on, the freeze is executed. If the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. Immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed. When the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag is provided. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, it is possible to prevent the freeze from being executed at the end of an advantageous section that does not bring much benefit to the player, such as when the advantageous section is started but ended only with CZ.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) specifying the type of the advantageous section (CZ, gaseous AT sign, AT sign, AT, etc.), or “0” to “4” including the normal section, etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is CZ, “2” is a gaseous AT sign, “3” is an AT sign, “4” is an AT, etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the end of the advantageous section, this information may be determined and the freeze may be executed.

  The freeze is not limited to one time. For example, when the AT executes 50 games as one break, a freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if the AT is 100 games), and during the execution of the freeze, the AT continues after the next game. Outputting an effect of whether or not to perform. Further, for each of the 50 games, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games at that time are displayed as an image, and an effect can be output as if the advantageous section had ended (it was an AT of 50 games).

When the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games during the execution of the AT, a freeze is executed, and during the freeze, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of acquired games, and the like are displayed as images. .
Also in this case, if the CZ or the AT precursor is executed before the AT is executed, the image including the total number of games and the total acquired number during the CZ and / or the AT precursor is displayed. Good.
In addition, even when the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 game while executing the CZ or the AT precursor, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, during the advantageous section (part of the advantageous section such as CZ). Alternatively, the total number of games or the total number of acquired games may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when reaching 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during 1BB operation (for example, 1BB operates during execution of AT, and during 1BB operation, For example, when the player reaches the 1500 game, the player does not execute the freeze when the player reaches the 1500 game (since the player is in the 1BB game), and executes the freeze at the end of the 1BB game. The total number of acquired images is displayed as an image.).
When performing the freeze, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the freeze is completed. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off before the freeze is executed, or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off during the freeze. The timing of the initialization is the same as the timing of turning off the advantageous section display LED 77.

In FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends only with CZ, and a condition device in which it is decided to execute both CZ and AT. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small win E1 alone with the number “750” is elected alone, it is an advantageous section that ends only with CZ. Is performed. With this setting, it is possible to determine to execute the AT without performing the lottery to determine whether or not the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ.
Of course, even in this case, the lottery may be performed during the CZ to determine whether or not the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied (the lottery may be performed only during an advantageous section that ends only with the CZ). Further, it is also possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute AT from several games before the end of CZ. Also in this case, whether or not to execute the freeze is as described above.

The third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 50 may be any as long as the sub-control board 80 transmits parameters (number of times of digestion, number of remaining games, number of additions, number of acquisitions, number of times of instruction function operation, etc.) necessary for display during the advantageous section (AT). .

(2) In FIG. 43 to FIG. 52, parameters (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the number of games are transmitted in order to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the acquired number (for example, 3000), information on each game and the acquired number is transmitted.
In addition, each game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is during the advantageous section and information indicating that it is during the AT, and counts the number of games of the advantageous section and the AT to the sub control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games played on the sub-control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, the lottery tables A and B are provided as the lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery used according to whether or not the threshold is equal to or more than the specified number “1000”. Switched tables. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Further, the threshold value is exemplified by the specified number “1000”, but is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different expected values to be added. When the specified number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used. When the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used. When the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300. Can use the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Example 1 to Example 3 in FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, it is unique when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit. Although the information was displayed, it is not limited to these Examples 1 to 3,
a) Display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) Display different from the display before the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit The display contents are not limited to the display contents of Examples 1 to 3.

  (5) In Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games of the AT exceeds 1500 games due to addition, the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed. The information on the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed, such as changing the display font of the remaining number of games, changing the character size, changing the display color, etc. May inform the player that the total number of games of the AT has exceeded 1500 games.

  (6) In the example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantageous section (AT) is running short, a display such as “Ends in 10 more games” is displayed, but at the start of the advantageous section (AT). , "This advantageous section (AT) cannot be played for more than 1500 games" or the like.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, in the case of a slot machine in which the advantageous section and the AT do not match, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, using two external signals, it is possible to transmit an external signal capable of distinguishing between “non-advantageous section (non-AT)”, “advantageous section and non-AT”, and “advantageous section and AT”.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won immediately before the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, and the BB game is started when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after the upper limit is reached (for example, If it is the 1501 game from the start of the section, the BB game is started in the non-advantaged section, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantage section and AT Is terminated).
Also, when the end of the BB game is at the time of reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately before reaching the upper limit (for example, 1499 games from the start of the advantageous section), the BB game ends at the end of the BB game. Turning off the signal 1 (BB) and turning off the external signal 2 (AT) at the same time (ending the advantageous section and AT).

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, the control state controlled by the main control board 50 is exemplified by AT, CZ, precursor, and normal. However, for example, an additional specialization zone that shifts when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide. The additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, the predetermined number of games is exhausted or the predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times. During that period, each time a condition device (for example, a small combination B group) to be added is won. , And the number of games played by the AT.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in the example of (a) in FIG. 61, when the AT (state 1) ends, the process is shifted to the AT withdrawal period (state 2), and the AT cannot be pulled back in this state 2. Was changed to normal (state 3). In the example of (b), after the AT is completed, the control is shifted to the CZ. When the AT cannot be pulled back in the CZ, the control is shifted to the normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of CZ, the process is shifted to the CZ withdrawal period, and when the CZ cannot be pulled back during this CZ withdrawal period, the process is shifted to normal.
However, the above state transition is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in FIG. 61A, after the end of the AT (state 1), the process may be shifted to the normal state (state 3) without going through the AT pullback period (state 2).
In FIG. 61 (b), the transition may be normal → CZ → AT, or the transition may be normal → sign → AT. After the end of the AT, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or the transition may be made from AT to precursor (CZ withdrawal period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), it may be possible to shift from normal to CZ without going through the precursor. Furthermore, the process may be shifted from CZ to normal without going through the withdrawal period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the output of the continuous effect is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game. The effect of whether to start or not may be continuously output.
Also, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and an effect may be output in the first half of the 1BBA game to finally inform whether or not to start the AT. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of the AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output during the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effect is not always necessary. For this reason, whether to output a continuous effect is optional. Further, for example, it is also possible to output an effect of whether or not to continue the advantageous section for only one game.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the instruction function may be activated at the time of winning the small combination B group at RT4 (inside). . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds “1”. In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from (at the start of RT4, which is the next game of the game won as the special combination).
On the other hand, if the instruction function is not operated even after the transition to RT4, the advantageous section may be started by the time the special game is started.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, the winning probability of the additional lottery of the AT in the main control board 50 is designed to be low, or the additional effect in the sub control board 80 is suppressed. As a result, even if the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, it is possible to make the player less discouraged as much as possible.
As another method, there is a method of changing the execution probability of a freeze effect based on the number of execution games in the advantageous section and the like so as to minimize discouragement of the player. For example, in FIG. 17, when the player wins the small role E1 of the number “250”, the number of additional games is “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). It is set so that the higher the number of added games, the higher the possibility that the freeze effect is executed.

In such specifications, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), if “200” is determined as the number of games to be added, a freeze effect is produced with a probability X (including 100%). When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X when “200” is determined as the number of additional games.
With this configuration, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be reduced, and the player can be prevented from being excessively fanned by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to being implemented alone, and a plurality of embodiments can be appropriately combined and implemented.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the present embodiment, there are “advantageous sections 1” and “advantageous sections 2” as advantageous sections. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous game state that does not have the right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is selected. After that, the system moves to ART.

Although the contents partially overlap with the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The “condition device” is a lottery target composed of one or more roles. When one condition device is won, a winning combination included in the condition device is won.
A condition device related to a special combination (combination; bonus) is called a “accessory condition device”, a condition device related to a small combination is called a “winning condition device”, and a condition device related to a replay is called a “replay condition device”. . The winning condition device and the replay condition device are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device”.

The “condition device number” is a number for identifying a condition device, and is defined for each condition device.
The number for identifying the accessory condition device is referred to as “accessory condition device number”, the number for identifying the winning condition device is referred to as “winning condition device number”, and the number for identifying the replay condition device is referred to as “winning condition device number”. This is referred to as “replay condition device number”. Further, the winning condition device number and the replay condition device number are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device number”.
The “winning number” is a number determined based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means. One winning number is determined based on one random value.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is a means for performing a lottery (determination or selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device lottery (decision or selection) means, a winning role lottery (decision or selection) means, or the like.
The lottery selecting means 61 includes a random number generating means and a random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number generated by the random number generating means, as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 comprises: a winning number determining means for determining a winning number based on the random number value obtained by the random number obtaining means; Number determination means.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). For example, a range from “0” to “65535” is defined as one cycle, and a counter that performs one count in 200 n (nano) seconds is provided, and the count value of this counter can be a random number. This counter keeps counting random numbers while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. This is the same as in the first embodiment.

The random number acquisition unit acquires the random number generated by the random number generation unit when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. This is the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the random number acquiring means acquires (latches) a random number value from the counter and stores (stores) it in the random number value register.
Here, the random number value register is a register built in the main CPU 55, and is a register that cannot be written from a program and can be read only.
When the program reads the random number value stored in the random value register, the random value register is cleared.

The winning number determining means determines a winning number based on the random number value obtained by the random number obtaining means.
In the present embodiment, the winning number determination means corresponds to an internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 described later and a lottery determination process in FIG. 88.
The condition device number determining means determines the condition device number based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means.
In the present embodiment, the condition device number determination means corresponds to the processing of condition device number set 1 in FIG. 89 described later.

FIG. 74A is a diagram showing a winning number definition (1) in the present embodiment. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the present embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a).
The winning number definition defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (b), “@NB_REP_A EQU 1; Replay A condition device number” means that “$ NB_REP_A” indicates “Replay A condition device number”, and “Replay A condition device number” indicates “1”. Means that the winning number corresponding to “@NB_REP_A” is “1”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “1”, the “replay A condition device” is independently won. The winning numbers “2” to “9” are the same as the winning number “1”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), "@NB_WIN_A EQU 10; Small win A condition device number" means that "@NB_WIN_A" indicates "Small win A condition device number", and "Small win A condition device number" This means that the “number” is “10” and that the winning number corresponding to “@NB_WIN_A” is “10”.
When the winning number is determined to be "10", the "small win A condition device" is independently won. The winning numbers “11” to “30” are the same as the winning number “10”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “@ BBA_WIN_E2 EKU 31; 1BBA + Small Role E2 Duplicate Win” means that “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates “duplicate win of 1BBA and Small Win E2”, and “$ BBA_WIN_E2”. Means that the winning number corresponding to "."
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “31”, the “1BBA condition device” and the “small win E2 condition device” are repeatedly won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), “@BBB EQU 32; 1BBB single winning” means that “$ BBB” indicates “1BBB single winning”, and the winning number corresponding to “$ BBB” is “ No. 32 ”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “32”, the “1BBB condition device” is independently won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), “$ BBA EQU 34; 1BBA single winning + additional” means that “$ BBA” indicates “1BBA single winning and additional advantageous section”, “$ BBA” Means that the winning number corresponding to is No. “34”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “34”, it is determined that the “1 BBA condition device” is independently won and that the number of games in the advantageous section is added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), “@ AT1_BBA_WD EQU 44; 1BBA + Small Winning D Duplicate Winning + Advantage Section 1” means that “@ AT1_BBA_WD” is “1BBA and small win D overlapping win and advantageous section 1”. Means that the winning number corresponding to “@ AT1_BBA_WD” is “44”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “44”, it is determined that the “1BBA condition device” and the “small win D condition device” are duplicated and that the transition to the advantageous section 1 is made.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “52”. Then, the winning number determining means determines any one of the numerical values “0” to “52” as the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the winning numbers “1” to “9” correspond to the replay condition device numbers “1” to “9”, respectively, and the winning numbers “10” to “9”. The number “30” corresponds to the winning condition device numbers “10” to “30”, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers "31" to "33" are used for the single winning of the accessory condition device or the overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Correspondingly, the winning numbers "34" to "42" correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, the winning numbers "43" to "47" correspond to the shift to the advantageous section 1, and the winning number " Numbers 48 to 52 correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 2.

In the present embodiment, if the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42" during the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is added, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, when the ART is executed during the advantageous section and the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42", the game in which the ART during the advantageous section can be executed uniformly or by lottery. The number may be increased.

Further, for example, in a case where a gas game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit but the right to enter the ART is not performed) is being executed during the advantageous section, the winning number is “34” or more. When the number is determined to be "42", the right to shift to the ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

Note that "when the winning number is determined to be" 34 "to" 42 "" means that the winning number is determined to be any of "34" to "42".
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the change content of the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set in accordance with the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition.
The winning number conversion data definition defines the definition of data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 76 (b), "@NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@ BBA_WIN_E2". Means that
As shown in FIG. 75A, “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "conversion start number", the condition device number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), “@NB_TRNS_AT EQU @ AT1_BBA; advantageous section conversion start number” corresponds to “@NB_TRNS_AT” indicating “advantageous section conversion start number” and “@NB_TRNS_AT”. It means that the value is “@ AT1_BBA”.
As shown in FIG. 75A, “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the “advantageous section conversion start number”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 (determined to shift).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), "@ NB_1BBA EQU 1; 1BBA condition device number" means that "@ NB_1BBA" indicates "1BBA condition device number", and the value corresponding to "@ NB_1BBA" is It means “1”. In other words, this means that “1BBA condition device number” is “1”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), “@ NB_AT1 EQU 1; advantageous section number 1” means that “@ NB_AT1” indicates “advantaged section number 1”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_AT1” is “ 1 ".

FIG. 77 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table.
The winning number conversion table is a table that defines data to be used when determining the condition device number from the winning number, and is stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.
As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” to “52”, the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. Used to determine the condition device number and the advantageous section number.
Here, "DEFB" is a pseudo-instruction in assembly language "securing a 1-byte (8-bit) area in a memory and storing data therein".
When a plurality of data items are separated by commas in the DEFB line, a plurality of 1-byte areas are secured in memory in order of address, and each data area separated by commas is sequentially stored in each secured area. It means to do.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), "DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2,0; winning number 31" stores "@ NB_1BBA" at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and stores address # This means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored in ## 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)) and "0" is stored in address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 76A, “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74A, “$ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”.
Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "28" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address #### (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ## 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number Address #### 2 (address 1602 (H) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address #### to address #### 2 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), "DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0, 0; winning number 32" stores "@ NB_1BBB" at address ## 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)), and stores the address. This means that "0" is stored at #### 4 (for example, address 1604 (H)) and "0" is stored at address #### 5 (for example, address 1605 (H)).
As shown in FIG. 76A, “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”.
Therefore, "2" is stored in the address #### 3.

That is,
Address #### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ## 4 (address 1604 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number Address #### 5 (address 1605 (H)) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address ### 3 to address ### 5 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition.
The winning number lottery data definition defines the data to be used when determining the winning number from the random number value in the lottery determination.
The “winning number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes winning number data.
“Winning number data” is data indicating a winning number determined in the lottery determination.

Then, “$ LT_NUM EQU 10000000B; winning number identifier” means that “$ LT_NUM” indicates the “winning number identifier”, and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_NUM” is “10000000 (B)”.
Also, “@BT_NUM EQU 7” indicates that the bit corresponding to the winning number identifier is “bit 7”, and when bit 7 is “1”, the winning number identifier is on and bit 7 is “0”. In some cases, it means that the winning number identifier is off.

“Repeat count identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes repeat count data.
The “repetition number data” is data indicating the number of times of repeating the hit / fail determination processing in the lottery determination.
Then, “$ LT_LOP EQU 01000000B; repetition number identifier” means that “$ LT_LOP” indicates “repetition number identifier”, and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_LOP” is “01000000 (B)”.
Also, “＠BT_LOP EQU 6” indicates that the bit corresponding to the repetition number identifier is “bit 6”, the repetition number identifier is on when bit 6 is “1”, and the bit corresponding to “6” is “0”. Means that the repetition number identifier is off.

The “identifier by setting value” is an identifier indicating that probability data is determined for each setting value.
“Probability data” is data indicating a winning range of the entire range of random numbers.
Therefore, the winning probability = “probability data / total range of random numbers”.
For example, when the entire range of random numbers is “65536” and the probability data is “125”, the winning probability is “125/65536”.
Note that the probability data may also be referred to as a determination value, determination data, a number, or number data.

"@LT_RNK EQU 00100000B; identifier by setting value" means that "@LT_RNK" indicates "identifier by setting value", and that data corresponding to "@LT_RNK" is "00100000 (B)". I do.
In addition, “@BT_LOP EQU 5” indicates that the bit corresponding to the identifier for each set value is “bit 5”, and when bit 5 is “1”, the identifier for each set value is on and bit 5 is “0”. Means that the repetition number identifier is off.

"2 byte data identifier" is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 2 byte data.
"$ LT_WRD EQU 00010000B; 2-byte data identifier" means that "$ LT_WRD" is a "2-byte data identifier", and that data corresponding to "$ LT_WRD" is "00010000 (B)". I do.
Also, the bit corresponding to the 2-byte data identifier is “bit 4” in “@BT_WRD EQU 4”, and when bit 4 is “1”, the 2-byte data identifier is on and bit 4 is “0”. Means that the 2-byte data identifier is off.

“1 byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 1 byte data.
"@LT_BYT EQU 00001000B; 1-byte data identifier" means that "@LT_BYT" is a "1-byte data identifier" and that data corresponding to "@LT_BYT" is "00001000 (B)". I do.
The bit corresponding to the 1-byte data identifier is “bit 3” in “@BT_BYT EQU 3”, and when the bit 3 is “1”, the 1-byte data identifier is on and the bit 3 is “0”. Means that the 1-byte data identifier is off.

The “judgment end identifier” is an identifier indicating that the lottery judgment is to be ended.
“$ LT_END EQU 00H” means that “$ LT_END” is a “judgment end identifier” and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_END” is “00H”.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an all RT common lottery table (1). FIG. 80 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (2), which is a view following FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (3), which is a view following FIG. Further, FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (4), and is a diagram following FIG. 81.

FIG. 82 (b) is a diagram showing a non-RT time lottery table. FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing an RT1 lottery table. FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an RT2 lottery table. FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an RT3 lottery table. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing an RT4 lottery table. FIG. 84B is a diagram showing a 1BBA lottery table. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a 1BBB lottery table.
These lottery tables are used in an internal lottery (a lottery for determining a winning number from a random number) and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.

  The common RT lottery table is commonly used for non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. That is, the all-RT common lottery table is a lottery table used to determine a winning number regardless of the RT state, except when 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) is activated. Means Furthermore, the non-RT lottery table is used in non-RT, the RT1 lottery table is used in RT1, the RT2 lottery table is used in RT2, and the RT3 lottery. The table is used in RT3, and the RT4 lottery table is used in RT4.

At the time of non-RT, first, a lottery determination is performed using the common RT lottery table. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", then, a lottery determination is performed using the non-RT time lottery table.
On the other hand, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, if the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery ends without using the non-RT time lottery table.
Although the details will be described later, the fact that the winning number is “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that the winning number is not determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that
Also, the fact that the winning number becomes a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that one of the winning numbers is determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that.

At RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, a lottery determination is first performed using the all RT common lottery table, as in the non-RT time. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", then, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to the RT.
On the other hand, if the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all-RT common lottery table, the internal lottery ends without using the RT-based lottery table. .
At 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and at 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table.

“TBL_LOT_DAT1” in FIG. 79 indicates an all RT common lottery table.
In addition, when the all RT common lottery table is set as the lottery table, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the lottery is performed using “1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data”. At this time, if a winning is made, the winning number is determined to be “$ BBA_WIN_E2” (= “31”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is not determined by using the “1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data”, then a success / failure determination is made using the “1BBB condition device lottery data”.

In addition, a win / fail determination is performed using “1BBB condition device lottery data”. At this time, if a win is made, the winning number is determined to be “31 + 1” (= “32”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if the winning / non-winning determination using “1BBB condition device lottery data” results in a non-winning, then the success / failure determination is performed using “1BBB + small win D condition device lottery data”.
When winning number data is included, as in “1BBA + Small win E2 condition device lottery data”, the winning / non-permission judgment is performed using the winning number data.
Further, when the winning number data is not included as in “1BBB condition device lottery data”, the current winning / losing is determined by using the data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous winning / failing determination. Make a decision.

In this way, when the winning number data becomes a serial number, data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous winning / non-winning determination can be used for the current winning / non-winning determination. Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.
If the winning number data does not become a serial number, the winning number data is determined in the lottery table, and the winning / non-performing judgment is performed using the winning number data. Or return), an appropriate lottery result can be obtained.

The same applies to “1BBB + Small win D condition device lottery data” and “1BBB + Small win E2 condition device lottery data” and “1BBB condition device lottery data”.
Then, when it reaches “determination end” without being determined as a win in the win / fail determination, the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table ends.

In FIG. 79, “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2; winning number identifier; + winning number data” is obtained by performing an OR operation on “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2” to obtain “1BBA + minor role. It is stored in the first line of "E2 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “$ LT_NUM” indicates a winning number identifier, and its value is “10000000 (B)”.
Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates a winning number corresponding to 1BBA + small-role E2 duplicate winning, and its value is “31” (“00011111 (B)” in binary). is there.

Further, when "@LT_NUM" and "@ BBA_WIN_E2" are OR-operated,
10000000 (B): @LT_NUM
00011111 (B): @ BBA_WIN_E2
10011111 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, "DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2" indicates that "10011111 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thereby, the winning number identifier and the winning number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
The comment “; winning number identifier ;; + winning number data” indicates that the data includes the winning number identifier and the winning number data.
When bit 7 is “1”, such as “10011111 (B)”, it is determined that the winning number identifier is ON, and it is determined that the data includes winning number data. Bit 6 is used as winning number data.

In FIG. 79, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier ;; It is stored in the second line of "Small win E2 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
“$ LT_RNK” indicates an identifier for each set value, and its value is “00100000 (B)”.

Further, when "@LT_BYT" and "@LT_RNK" are ORed,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00100000 (B): @LT_RNK
00101000 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK" indicates that "00101000 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the set value-specific identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Further, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier;

When the probability data is 1 byte, the data in which the 1-byte data identifier is turned on (bit 3 is set to “1”) is stored. When the probability data is 2 bytes, the 2-byte data identifier is turned on. (Bit 4 is set to “1”).
As described above, data in which one of the 1-byte data identifier and the 2-byte data identifier is turned on is stored, and data in which both the 1-byte data identifier and the 2-byte data identifier are turned on is not stored.
When probability data is determined for each set value, data in which the identifier for each set value is turned on (bit 5 is set to “1”) is stored, and common probability data is determined for all set values. At this time, data in which the identifier for each set value is turned off (bit 5 is set to “0”) is stored.

As described above, when the probability data is different in the settings 1 to 6, the probability data for each set value is determined in the lottery table, and the data in which the set value-specific identifier is turned on is stored. Thereby, the lottery of the winning number can be performed with a different probability for each set value.
When the probability data is common to the settings 1 to 6, one piece of probability data is determined in the lottery table, and data in which the identifier for each set value is turned off is stored. As a result, only one piece of probability data needs to be determined in the lottery table, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In addition, “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” in FIG. 79 indicates that “10” (“00001010 (B)” in binary) is stored as probability data used in setting 1. Is shown.
Actually, the probability data is set for each of the setting values of setting 1 to setting 6, but in FIG. 79, the probability data of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, Illustration of data is omitted. In FIG. 79, ":" means that illustration of the probability data of the settings 2 to 5 is omitted. The same applies to the lottery tables after FIG.

Then, which of the 1-byte data identifier or the 2-byte data identifier is on, whether the setting value-specific identifier is on or off, and based on the setting value when the setting value-specific identifier is on, The address of the probability data to be used is calculated (designated), and the probability is determined using the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address.
A method for obtaining probability data will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value is stored in a predetermined storage area (set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53.
Further, as the information on the set value, any one of “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”.
When "0" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 73, and "5" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK". , “6” is displayed on the set value display LED 73.

That is, when “N” (N is an integer) is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”, the control is performed by the main control board 50 so that “N + 1” is displayed on the set value display LED 73. You.
Therefore, the description regarding the set value such as the set value “1” and the set value “6” is a numerical value displayed on the set value display LED 73 and is not necessarily the information stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”. Not necessarily.
Of course, the specification may be such that any one of “1” to “6” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” as information related to the set value.

In FIG. 81, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier;; + repetition number data” is obtained by ORing “@LT_LOP” with “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary). This shows that the data obtained by the calculation is stored in the first line of “Small win B1 condition device lottery data to small win B12 condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_LOP” indicates a repetition number identifier, and its value is “01000000 (B)”.

When OR operation is performed on “を LT_LOP” and “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary),
01000000 (B): @LT_LOP
0000100 (B): 12 (D)
001001100 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” indicates that “010011100 (B)” is stored in a predetermined one-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thus, the repeat number identifier and the repeat number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 5 indicate the number of repetitions data, and bit 6 indicates the number of repetitions identifier.
Also, the comment "; repeat count identifier;; + repeat count data" indicates that the data includes the repeat count identifier and the repeat count data.
When bit 6 is “1”, such as “010011100 (B)”, it is determined that the repeat number identifier is ON, and it is determined that the data includes the repeat number data. Bit 5 is used as repetition count data.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like.
In step S1001, the main CPU 55 continues to determine whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated in a state where a specified number of game media have been bet (betting). When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S1002.
In step S1002, the main CPU 55 acquires (latches) a random number value from the random number generation means (counter), and stores (stores) the acquired random number value in the random number value register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1003.
In step S1003, the main CPU 55 controls the blocker 45 so that insertion of medals is not permitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1004.

In step S1004, the main CPU 55 executes the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87). The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random number value. When the internal lottery 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1005.
In step S1005, the main CPU 55 executes the condition device number set 1 (FIG. 89). Condition device number set 1 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number. When the condition device number set 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the player operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 1 process.
The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random number value. Note that the internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination process in FIG. 88 described later correspond to a winning number determination unit.
When proceeding to the internal lottery 1 in step S1004, first, in step S1011, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1012.

In step S1012, the main CPU 55 stores, in the HL register, the head address of the lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (1BBA operation, 1BBB operation, or non-operating of the accessory).
Specifically, at the time of 1BBA operation, the head address of the 1BBA lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBA) shown in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_D” in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register.

In the 1BBB operation, the head address of the 1BBB lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBB) shown in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_D” in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, when the accessory is not operating, the head address of the all RT common lottery table (TBL_LOT_DAT1) shown in FIGS. 79 to 82A is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Here, “_FL_ACTION” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a flag indicating the operating state of the accessory.
When the value of a predetermined bit (for example, bit 2) of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is operating, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the accessory is not operating.

Then, in step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the predetermined bit of the storage area “_FL_ACTION” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Here, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is not operating (No), and proceeds to the next step S1014.
On the other hand, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is in operation (Yes), skips steps S1014 to S1016, and proceeds to step S1017. move on.

In step S1014, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012. The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a win has been made using probability data. After executing the lottery determination, the process proceeds to the next step S1015.
When proceeding to step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win has been made in the lottery determination.
Here, at the end of the lottery determination, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register. Further, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, it indicates that the lottery is not won in the lottery determination, and the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”. Indicates that the lottery determination has been made.

Then, in step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, thereby determining whether or not the lottery determination has been won.
Here, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning has not been determined in the lottery determination (No), and proceeds to the next step S1016.
On the other hand, when the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery has been won (Yes), skips steps S1016 and S1017, and The process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1016, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) in the HL register.
Specifically, at the time of non-RT, the head address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) shown in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register.

At the time of RT1, the head address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) shown in FIG. 82 (c) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82C is stored in the HL register.
RT2, RT3, and RT4 are the same as the non-RT and RT1.
When the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to the next step S1017.

In step S1017, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012 or S1016.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1012. When the accessory is not activated, if the lottery determination in step S1014 results in non-winning, in step S1016 The lottery determination is executed using the set lottery table. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, when the accessory is not operated (when “No” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed at least once in step S1014, and the lottery determination is performed at most twice in steps S1014 and S1017. .
On the other hand, when the accessory is activated (when “Yes” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed only once in step S1017.

In addition, when the accessory is not operated, in step S1014, the first lottery determination is performed using the all-RT common lottery table. Is used to make a second lottery determination.
As described above, for any of the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 condition devices having the same winning probability, the probability data is defined in the all-RT common lottery table. As a result, the lottery table can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery determination process.
The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a win has been made using probability data.
When proceeding to the lottery determination in step S1014 or S1017, first, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number identifier is on (data including the winning number identifier).
Here, at the start of the lottery determination process, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the accessory is stored in the HL register (step S1012 in FIG. 87). For example, when the accessory is not operating, the HL register stores an address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG.

When the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the winning number identifier is on, and when the bit 7 is “0”, the winning number identifier is off. It indicates that.
In step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, so that the winning number identifier is on (including the winning number identifier). Data).

Here, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1022.
On the other hand, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1022, and proceeds to step S1022. The process proceeds to S1023.
If “No” in the step S1021, the main CPU 55 maintains the value of the C register. At this time, the value stored in the C register is, for example, a value updated in step S1028 described later. Further, the value stored in the C register is determined as a winning number when it is determined that the winning (Yes) is made in step S1027 described later.

In step S1022, the main CPU 55 obtains winning number data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores the data in the C register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is “10011111 (B)”.
In “10011111 (B)”, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of “10011111 (B)” to “0” and stores “00011111 (B)” in the C register as winning number data.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, the value of the HL register (address of the data for lottery) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1023.

In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the repetition number identifier is ON (data including the repetition number identifier).
Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the repetition number identifier is on, and when bit 6 is “0”, the repetition number identifier is off. Indicates that there is.
In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, so that the repetition number identifier is on (including the repetition number identifier). Data).

Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is ON (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1024.
On the other hand, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1024, and proceeds to step S1024. The process proceeds to S1025.
If “No” in the step S1023, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the B register. Note that "1" set in the B register at this time indicates that the number of times of rejection determination (the number of repetitions) is one.

In step S1024, the main CPU 55 obtains repetition count data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores the data in the B register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” in FIG. 81 is “010011100 (B)”.
Further, in “01001100 (B)”, bits 0 to 5 indicate the number-of-repetitions data, and bit 6 indicates the identifier of the number of repetitions.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of “001001100 (B)” to “0” and stores “000001100 (B)” in the B register as repetition count data. In other words, data indicating that the repetition is performed 12 times is stored in the B register.
Also, “0” is stored in the A register as an initial value.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Accordingly, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting indicating whether the probability data is different depending on the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the value-specific identifier is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1025.

In step S1025, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first saves the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register in the stack area of the RWM 53.
Next, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register. Thereby, the B register has an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting value) indicating whether the probability data differs according to the set value. (Another identifier) is stored.

Thereafter, “1” is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the start address of the storage area where the probability data is stored.
Then, based on the data stored in the B register (data indicating whether the probability data is 1-byte data or 2-byte data and whether the probability data differs depending on the set value), Is calculated (designated), probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is obtained from the lottery table, and stored in the HL register or the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Here, a method of acquiring probability data will be described in more detail.
As described above, in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”), any one of “0” to “5” is stored as information on the set value.
In the A register, "0" is stored as an initial value.

Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the set value-specific identifier is OFF, the value of the A register ("0") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the A register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is on Since the identifier for each set value is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any one of "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
Thereafter, the value of the A register (“N”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

Also, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “5” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 20; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the A register is the same as in Example 1.

Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier for each set value is OFF, the value of the A register ("0") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Is further added to the value of the A register ("0") to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 2-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the HL register.

Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is on Since the identifier for each set value is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any one of "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
Further, the value of the A register ("N") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value, and the value of the A register ("N") is further added thereto, thereby obtaining a new HL register. Value. That is, adding the value of the A register (“N”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1000; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

When “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “10” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1250; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the HL register is the same as in Example 3.

  As described above, the head address (address of the first probability data) of the storage area in which the probability data is stored is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the A register is used as an offset value in the HL register. The probability data corresponding to the set value is obtained by adding to the value of.

Here, when the set value identifier is off, the initial value (“0”) stored in the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
When the set value-specific identifier is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
Thus, the process can be shared between the case where the probability data is common to all the set values and the case where the probability data differs depending on the set values, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When the probability data is one-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register once, and when the probability data is two-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register twice.
Thus, the process of calculating (designating) the address of the probability data can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 55 makes a determination as to whether or not it is successful.
Here, when performing the lottery determination using the probability data of the 2-byte data and the random number, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the HL register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new DE register value. .
When performing the lottery determination using the probability data of 1-byte data and the random number, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the A register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new DE register value.
Thus, the value of the DE register is updated.
As described above, the DE register stores the random number value (Step S1011 in FIG. 87). Then, in step S1026, the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.

After that, the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 are restored.
Accordingly, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting indicating whether the probability data is different depending on the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the value-specific identifier is stored. The value in the B register indicates the number of repetitions, and the value in the C register indicates the winning number.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning has been achieved.
Here, when the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register so that the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a borrow occurs), “1” is set to the carry flag of the flag register. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1".
In step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether the carry flag is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the winning is achieved.

Here, when the carry flag is not set to “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that no win has been made (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning has been achieved (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing of this flowchart.
Further, when “Yes” in step S1027, the value stored in the C register indicates the winning number determined in the lottery determination.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 55 updates the winning number data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the C register to obtain a new value of the C register. That is, the value of the C register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.
In step S1029, the main CPU 55 updates the repetition count data.
More specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. That is, the value of the B register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1030.

In step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, it indicates that the number of repetitions has been completed. When the value of the B register is not “0” (greater than “0”), the number of repetitions has been completed. Indicates no.
Then, in step S1030, main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1031.
On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

If “No” in the step S1030, in order to maintain the value of the HL register, the success / failure determination in the step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time.
As described above, since the same probability data as the previous time is determined to be used repeatedly, the same probability data does not need to be repeatedly defined in the lottery table, so that the use amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In step S1031, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the next lottery data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 updates the value of the HL register according to the following Examples 1) to 4).
Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is off "1 + 1" (= "2") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on Add “6 + 1” (= “7”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, add “1 × 2 + 1” (= “3”) to the value of the HL register to obtain the new value of the HL register. I do.
Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on, add “6 × 2 + 1” (= “13”) to the value of the HL register to obtain the value of the new HL register. I do.

As described above, in step S1026, the value of the HL register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 is restored.
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1031, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and whether the probability data differs according to the set value. It shows the address of a storage area in which data including an identifier (identifier for each set value) indicating whether or not the data is stored is stored.

When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, the 1BBA condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79) is used. The number of bytes of the probability data is 1 byte.
Therefore, by adding “2” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small win D condition device in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). This indicates the start address of the storage area of the lottery data (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of “DEFB @ LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier” is stored).

When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the setting value-specific identifier is on, the lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) is used. The number of bytes of the probability data in (data) is 6 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “7” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the 1BBB condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). ) Of the storage area (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier ;; + identifier by setting value” is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, the small win D condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) is used. The number of bytes of the probability data in (data) is 2 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “3” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the small win E1 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). For example, the address of the storage area where the data of “DEFB @ LT_WRD; 2-byte data identifier” is stored is indicated.

Further, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on, the lottery data (for example, the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81). ) Is 12 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "13" to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the small win B1 to the small win in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81). This indicates the start address of the storage area of the B12 condition device lottery data (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of "DEFB @ LT_LOOPOR12; repeat number identifier" is stored).

In the next step S1032, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is a determination end identifier (“00 (H)”).
Here, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the identifier is the determination end identifier (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033.
On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is not “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the data is not a determination end identifier (No), and returns to step S1021.

In the next step S1033, the main CPU 55 sets non-winning data.
Here, at the time of proceeding to step S1033, the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)” (determination end identifier). Then, in step S1033, the main CPU 55 stores “00 (H)” which is data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register as non-winning data. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

At the end of this flowchart (lottery determination), the value stored in the C register indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.
When the process proceeds to step S1033, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is “00 (H)”. In this case, the winning is not made (the condition device is not won).

In this way, by setting the data of the determination end identifier indicating the end of the lottery determination process to “00 (H)”, if no condition device is won in the lottery determination process, the non-winning The winning number “0” indicating (losing) is stored in the C register, and this flowchart ends. Note that the winning numbers less than “31” match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In other words, by acquiring the data of the determination end identifier without newly setting the winning number indicating the non-winning, the winning number indicating the non-winning can be stored in the C register.
On the other hand, if “Yes” in step S1027, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is other than “00 (H)”. In this case, one of the condition devices is won (determined as a winning number other than “0”).

  Here, for example, like the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device, a lottery result (also referred to as a push order small hand) having a different degree of advantage (number of payouts) depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42 or Unlike the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device, the lottery result accompanied by the RT shift depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 does not bias the advantage degree or the ratio of the RT shift depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is preferable to do so. That is, it is preferable that the appearance frequency of the correct answer is not biased depending on the pressing order.

For this reason, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that advantageous operation modes corresponding to the type of the lottery result (condition device) are equal in each operation mode. That is, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that the appearance frequency of the correct answer becomes equal in each pressing order.
In such a case, the number of repetitions is determined, and the lottery determination is performed by repeatedly using the same probability data, thereby reducing the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table and equalizing the appearance frequency of the correct answer in each pressing order. Therefore, a greater effect can be exhibited.

Further, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table.
Then, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the relevant condition devices (for example, the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device, or the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition) With respect to the devices, the consecutive winning numbers (the winning numbers of the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device are from "12" to "22", and the winning numbers of the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device are "2" The number "4" can be obtained from the number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers less than “31” match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In addition, at least in the normal section, the winning and replay condition device number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 but is transmitted as the effect group number.
In such a case, consecutive winning numbers (for example, from "12" to "22") are obtained for related condition devices (for example, from small win B1 condition device to small win B12 condition device). By doing so, when performing the process of converting the winning number into the effect group number, it is possible to determine the effect group number by determining to which range the acquired winning number belongs.
For this reason, it is not necessary to have a table for determining which of the effect group numbers the acquired winning numbers are, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 can be further reduced.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 1.
The condition device number set 1 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number. The processing of the condition device number set 1 corresponds to a condition device number determination unit.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 1 in step S1005, first, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is smaller than the conversion start number.

Here, at the start of the processing of the condition device number set 1, the value indicating the internal lottery 1 and the winning number determined by the lottery determination is stored in the C register.
In step S1041, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “$ NB_TRNS” indicates the conversion start number, and its value is “$ BBA_WIN_E2”. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates an overlap winning of 1BBA and the small role E2, and its value is “31”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “31”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “31” from the value of the A register, and when carry occurs due to the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1042 to S1046. Then, the process proceeds to step S1047.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1042.
In step S1041, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1042, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores an operation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 3 in the HL register.
Here, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” indicates the head address of the winning number conversion table (FIG. 77A).
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Further, as described above, “$ NB_TRNS” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 3
= "1600 (H)"-"5D (H)"
= “15A3 (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15A3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15C3 (H)” (first time)
“15C3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E3 (H)” (second time)
"15E3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1603 (H)" (the third time)
Becomes
As a result, the "address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “$ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). Also, this data indicates "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the C register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the value of the C register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1604 (H)”.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1604 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. This data indicates "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the A register. As a result, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. After that, the value of the A register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.

After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1605 (H)”. After that, the value of the HL register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.
When the value of the HL register is “1605 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Also, this data indicates “advantaged section number” (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_BNS” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the accessory condition device number.
Further, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the character condition apparatus has not been won, and when the value is other than “0”, it indicates that the character condition apparatus has been won.

Furthermore, the previous game is a non-internal game, and when the player wins the accessory condition device in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory item condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1046 described later.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination included in the winning combination condition device stops on the activated line, the main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (sets it to “0”).

For this reason, the previous game is a non-internal game, and when winning the accessory condition device in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in step S1043.
If the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” in step S1043, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination included in the winning accessory condition device that has won the accessory condition device before the previous game and is included in the winning accessory condition device. Means that has not yet stopped on the active line. That is, it means that the game is an inside game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over.

Then, in step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the character condition apparatus has been won. That is, it is determined whether or not the inside is inside.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1044.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has been won, skips steps S1044 to S1046, and proceeds to step S1047. Proceed to.

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_AT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the advantageous section number.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that no winning has been won (determined to shift), and when “1”, it indicates that the winning has been won in advantageous section 1, When it is “2”, it indicates that the player has won the advantageous section 2.

Furthermore, the last game is a game of the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045 described later.
Further, based on the winning of the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, the processing shifts to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and thereafter, when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 ends and returns to the normal section, the main CPU 55 The value of “_NB_CND_AT” is cleared (set to “0”).

For this reason, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” in step S1044.
When the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” in step S1044, the player wins the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 before the previous game, and proceeds to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 based on the winning. Means that has not finished yet. In other words, it means that the game is in the standby section, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

Then, in step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the winning section 1 or 2 has been won. I do.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1045.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 has been won, skips step S1045, and proceeds to step S1045. Proceed to S1046.

In step S1045, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1045, the value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.

In step S1046, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1047, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1041 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1041 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1042, the A register stores a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number”. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1047 after step S1042, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, when the process proceeds to step S1047, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

“_NB_CND_NOR” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, and when “No” in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047 after step S1042. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
The main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” (to “0”) at the end of the game or before the start switch 41 can be operated in the next game.

As described above, in the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” before the timing of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046). (Step S1043).
By this, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether or not it is inside, it is determined whether or not it is inside (whether it has won the accessory condition device in this game or has won the accessory condition device before the previous game). ) Can be determined, so that the usage of the RWM 53 can be reduced accordingly.

In condition device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1043). When it is determined that the value is “0”, the advantageous section number is set to “_NB_CND_AT”. It is stored (step S1044), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046), and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” (step S1047).
In this way, it is possible to determine to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 without requiring complicated processing in the game that has been won by the accessory condition apparatus.

In the game, when the winning number is determined to be “31” to “36”, “43” to “45”, or “48” to “50”, the accessory condition apparatus Will be elected.
In this case, if it is determined in step S1043 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the process proceeds to step S1044, so that the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1043 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so that the values of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the values of “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained. Will be done.

Thus, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”. At this time, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained.
Thus, it is possible to appropriately process the winning of the accessory condition apparatus and the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, in the game, when the winning number is determined to be “43” to “47”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), and the winning number is changed to “48” to “52”. When the number is determined to be the first, it is won (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 2.
In this case, if it is determined in step S1044 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1044 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, step S1045 is skipped, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.

As described above, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, “_NB_CND_AT” Maintain the value of.
This makes it possible to appropriately process the determination to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In the present embodiment, the process of storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1044) or the process of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046) are performed. The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” were maintained.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by storing (overwriting) the same advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” or storing (overwriting) the same accessory condition apparatus number in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the “_NB_CND_BNS” The value or the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained.

Further, in the present game, when the winning number is determined to be less than “31”, “Yes” is determined in step S1041, and the process proceeds to step S1047. At this time, the winning number is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1047, the value of the A register is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” as a winning and replay condition device number.
That is, when the winning number is less than “31”, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”.

Then, only when the winning number is equal to or greater than “31”, the condition device number is determined from the winning number by using the winning number conversion table that defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number.
For this reason, for the number less than “31”, the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number does not have to be defined in the winning number conversion table, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the equipment condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. , A control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be executed.

Furthermore, the winning numbers “43” to “52” are treated as those for performing the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantage numbers are also obtained. A lottery regarding the addition of a section may be executed.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery for adding an advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the sixteenth embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 1 of the sixteenth embodiment, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”.
On the other hand, in condition device number set 2 of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and thereafter, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number and the like in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1051.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1051, the condition device number set 2 (FIG. 92) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Further, in step S1006, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process proceeds to step S1052, and the process for stopping all the reels (FIG. 91) is executed.
Then, in step S1052, when the process for stopping all reels is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing at the time of stopping all reels in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
The all-reel-stopped process is a process of controlling the turning on / off of the internal flag indicating that the winning information of the special combination has been carried over after the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to the all reels stop processing of step S1052, first, in step S1061, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the active line.

Here, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the active line (Yes), the process skips steps S1062 and S1063 and proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped on the activated line (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1062.

In step S1062, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the winning item condition device has been won.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has been won, and proceeds to the next step S1063.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has not been won, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

In step S1063, the main CPU 55 turns on the internal medium flag.
Here, “_FL_PRD_LOT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores an internal medium flag.
The "internal flag" is a flag indicating that the game is an internal game in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over.
Furthermore, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.

Then, in step S1063, the main CPU 55 stores “FF (H)” in the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S1064, the main CPU 55 clears the internal medium flag.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1065.
In step S1065, the main CPU 55 clears the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 2.
The condition device number set 2 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 2 in step S1051, first in step S1071, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1071 are the same as those in step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1072 to S1074 and proceeds to step S1075.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1072.
In step S1071, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1072, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the “accessory condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1072, a value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In the condition device number set 2, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1071 and S1076, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1072.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1072 is the same as that in step S1042 in FIG.

In step S1073, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1073 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the flow advances to the next step S1074.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition apparatus number is other than “0” (No), the process skips step S1074 and proceeds to step S1075.

In step S1074, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1074, the E register stores a value indicating the accessory condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1075, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1071 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1072, the A register stores a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number”. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1075, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

  As described above, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when the answer is “Yes” in step S1071 and proceeds to step S1075, and when the result is “No” in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1076, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1076, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1076, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” indicates an advantageous section conversion start number, and its value is “$ AT1_BBA”. Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ AT1_BBA” indicates a single winning of 1BBA and a winning of the advantageous section 1, and its value is “38”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when carry is generated by the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1077 to S1079. Then, the process according to the flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1077.

In step S1077, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1077 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1078.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1078 and S1079 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
Specifically, in step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 is “FF (H)”, thereby determining whether or not the internal medium flag is on. Judge.
Here, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is on, skips step S1079, and executes the processing according to this flowchart. finish.
On the other hand, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is off, and proceeds to the next step S1079.

In step S1079, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1079, the value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1073), and if it is determined that the value is “0” (Yes), the accessory device condition device number Is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1074), and then the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 2, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, in this game, It is not possible to determine whether the game has been won or whether the game has been won before the last game.

Therefore, in condition apparatus number set 2, in step S1078 before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, whether or not the internal medium flag is ON (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”) Is determined to determine whether the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or whether the player has won the accessory condition device before the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), it is determined that the bonus condition device has been won in the current game, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079). ).

Here, in the condition device number set 2, in step S1072, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1074, the value of the E register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1075, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1074, the accessory condition device number is not lost. Even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1075, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.

Further, in step S1076, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and thereafter, “＠NB_TRNS_AT” (= “43”) is subtracted from the value of the A register, so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. It is determined whether or not.
Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1076, there is no problem in the process of storing the advantageous section number.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, after step S1074, the E register can be used for another process. Similarly, after step S1075, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1076, the C register can be used for other processing.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

In the condition device number set 2, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is ON (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”). It was determined whether the device was won or whether the character condition device was won before the previous game.
However, it is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the process moves to RT4 during the inside. For this reason, for example, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the corresponding RT4 is inside, so that the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or has won the accessory condition device before the previous game. May be determined.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (3) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (3) in FIG. 93 (a) indicates the winning number definition for the winning numbers "31" to "42".
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), "$ BBA EQU 38; 1BBA single winning + transfer lottery" means that "$ BBA" indicates "1BBA single winning" and "execution of transfer lottery". Means that the winning number corresponding to "" is the number "38".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38", the "1BBA condition device" is solely won, and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, or to the type of the advantageous section from the normal section The transfer lottery that determines whether to perform the transfer can be executed.
Note that there are advantageous sections 1 and 2 as advantageous section types. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous game state that does not have the right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is selected. After that, the system moves to ART.

As shown in FIG. 93 (c), “$ BBA_WD EQU 39; 1BBA + Small Winning D Duplicate Winning + Transition Lottery” means that “$ BBA_WD” is “1BBA and Small Winning D Duplicate Winning” and “Execution of Transfer Lottery” Means that the winning number corresponding to “$ BBA_WD” is “39”.
When the winning number is determined to be “39”, the “1BBA condition device” and the “small winning combination D condition device” are repeatedly won, and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section is determined. A shift lottery that determines which type of advantageous section to shift to can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 93 (a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “42”. Then, the winning number determination means determines any one of the numerical values of “0” to “42” as the winning number.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” to “33” indicate that the winning condition device is independently won, or the winning condition device and the prize and replay condition device are used. The winning numbers "34" to "37" correspond to the addition of an advantageous section, and the winning numbers "38" to "42" correspond to the execution of the transfer lottery. .

Note that the winning numbers “38” to “42” may also correspond to the addition of the advantageous section. When the winning number is determined to be "38" to "42", the transfer lottery may be executed and the addition of the advantageous section may be executed.
“When the winning number is determined to be“ 38 ”to“ 42 ”” means that the winning number is determined to be any of “38” to “42”.
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the change content of the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set in accordance with the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 93 (d) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@NB_TRNS EQUI @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@ BBA_WIN_E2". Means that As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the “conversion start number”, the winning number conversion table is used to convert the winning number from the winning number condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number. Is acquired (stored).

Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@NB_TRNS_UP EQU @ RE; additional conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS_UP" indicates "additional conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS_UP" is It means "@RE". As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ RE” = “34”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_UP” = “$ RE” = “34”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the "addition conversion start number", there is a case where an advantageous section is added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), "$ NB_TRNS_AT EQU $ BBA; advantageous section conversion start number" corresponds to "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicating "advantageous section conversion start number" and "@NB_TRNS_AT". It means that the value is “$ BBA”. As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ BBA” = “38”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "advantageous section conversion start number", a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section may be executed.

FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” to “42”, the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

  As shown in FIG. 94B, “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address #### (for example, address 1600 (H)) and stores address #### 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)) means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “$ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "28" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address ### 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ### 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address #### and the address #### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 94 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and stores address #### 3. (Eg, address 1603 (H)) means that "0" is stored. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Therefore, “2” is stored in the address #### 2.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address #### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".
Note that the winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 94 (d), FIG. 95, and FIG. 96 are diagrams showing an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the all-RT common lottery table (6), which is a diagram following FIG. 94 (d). FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the all-RT common lottery table (7), which is a diagram following FIG. 95.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table. FIG. 97 (b) shows the two-stage lottery table 1, FIG. 97 (c) shows the two-stage lottery table 2, and FIG. 97 (d) shows the two-stage lottery table 3. 97 (e) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 4, and FIG. 97 (f) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 5.
Here, the two-stage lottery address table and the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are used in the later-described two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and the lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101, and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50. ing. In the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. That is, the shift lottery that determines whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section corresponds to a two-stage lottery and a lottery without a setting difference.

The two-stage lottery address table defines which of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is used.
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the winning number is determined to be “38”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT1” (two-stage lottery table 1) is used.
Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” (two-stage lottery table 2) is used. When the winning number is determined to be “40”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT3” (two-stage). The lottery table 3) is used.
When the winning number is determined to be "41", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT4" (two-stage lottery table 4) is used. When the winning number is determined to be "42", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT5" (two-stage lottery) is used. Table 5) is used.

The two-stage lottery table 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "38", and defines winning data and probability data.
“DEFB 2; winning data” on the first line indicates that the winning data is “2”.
“DEFB 85; probability data (winning data 2)” in the second line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when the winning is performed using this probability data, the winning data is “2”. Is determined.

“DEFB 85; probability data (winning data 1)” on the third line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when the winning is performed using this probability data, the winning data is “1”. Is determined.
“; // DEFB 86; probability data (winning data 0)” on the fourth line is a comment indicating that the probability that the winning data is determined to be “0” is “86/256”. Is not remembered as
The two-stage lottery tables 2 to 5 are the same as the two-stage lottery table 1.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1101.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1101, the condition device number set 3 (FIG. 99) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Then, in step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 3.
The condition device number set 3 is a process of determining (acquiring, storing, and determining) a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When the process proceeds to the condition device number set 3 in step S1101, first, in step S1111, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1111 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1112 to S1118 and proceeds to step S1119.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1112.
In step S1111, “31” is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1112, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores an operation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 2 in the HL register.
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 2
= "1600 (H)"-"3E (H)"
= “15C2 (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15C2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E2 (H)” (first time)
“15E2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “1602 (H)” (second time)
Becomes
Thereby, “the address of the condition device number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

In other words, the address stored in the HL register (“15C2 (H)” in the present embodiment) is used as a reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as an offset value (in the present embodiment, stored in the A register). By setting the value obtained by doubling the winning number as an offset value), it is possible to calculate (designate) an address in which the condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored.
Here, the value of the A register is added twice (the value obtained by doubling the winning number is set as the offset value) is that two data (data indicating the accessory condition apparatus number, And two pieces of data indicating the winning and replay condition device numbers) are stored in the winning number conversion table.

  Note that, as in the sixteenth embodiment, three data (data indicating a bonus condition device number, data indicating a winning and replay condition device number, and data indicating an advantageous section number) for one winning number. When stored in the winning number conversion table, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored by adding the value of the A register three times (the value obtained by multiplying the winning number by 3 is used as the offset value). Address can be calculated (specified).

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the E register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1602 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “$ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). This data also indicates the "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the E register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register. Thereafter, the value of the E register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 3) ends.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1603 (H)”.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In the condition device number set 3, the value (winning number) of the C register is used in steps S1111 and S1115, so that the value (winning number) of the C register is not destroyed in step S1112.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Further, this data indicates "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the D register. As a result, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register. Thereafter, the value of the D register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 3) ends.

In step S1042 in FIG. 89, the value indicating the “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
In the condition device number set 3, the A register is used in step S1115 described later. Therefore, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is not lost before the winning and replay condition device number is stored in step S1119 described later.

In step S1113, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game is Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.
Of course, other information such as an RT number may be referred to determine whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1113 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition apparatus number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1114.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition apparatus number is other than “0” (No), the process skips steps S1114 to S1117 and proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1114, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1114 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1115.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1115, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1115, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1115, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when carry occurs due to the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips step S1116. The process proceeds to step S1117.
On the other hand, when the carry does not occur due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or more than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1116.
In step S1115, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting "38" from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

When proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery ends, the process proceeds to the next step S1117.
In step S1117, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1117, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the E register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In the next step S1118, the main CPU 55 moves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, in step S1112, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. Therefore, when proceeding to step S1118 via step S1112, the value of the D register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1118, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register.
Then, in step S1118, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the D register in the A register.

In the next step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1111 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1111 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

Also, when the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Then, in step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, in step S1118, the value of the D register (indicating the winning and replay condition device number) is stored in the A register.
As described above, the winning and replay conditions are determined when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, and when “No” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119. The process of storing the device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of the two-stage lottery process.
The two-stage lottery is a process of acquiring an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the two-stage lottery in step S1116, first, in step S1121, the main CPU 55 sets a two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores the calculation result of “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” in the HL register.

Here, “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery address table (FIG. 97A).
For example, assume that “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” = “1700 (H)”.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1700 (H)"-"38 (D)"
= "1700 (H)"-"26 (H)"
= “16DA (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register (winning number) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value.
As described above, in step S1115 of FIG. 99, “38” is subtracted from the value (winning number) of the A register to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. Keep without. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”. Therefore, even when the process proceeds to step S1121, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

For example, assume that the value (winning number) of the A register is “39”.
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“16DA (H)” + “27 (H)” = “1701 (H)”
Becomes

In other words, the address indicated by the HL register (“16DA (H)” in the present embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value, thereby obtaining the “winning number” corresponding to the determined winning number. It is possible to calculate (specify) the address of “address specification data”.
The “address designation data” is data stored in the two-stage lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5.

“DEFB TBL — 2NDAT_LOT1− ＄; winning number 38” on the two-stage lottery address table of FIG. 97A is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the two-stage lottery table 1.
Similarly, “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2- −; winning number 39” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2, and “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT3- ＄; winning number 40” is 2 This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the stage lottery table 3.
“DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT4-４; winning number 41” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 4, and “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT5- ＄; winning number 42” is two-stage. This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the lottery table 5.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)”, the data (address designation data) corresponding to this address is “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2- −; winning number 39” as shown in FIG. It is.

Here, "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 (FIG. 97 (c)).
For example, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” = “1708 (H)”.
"@" Indicates the current address. As described above, the current address is “1701 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the A register is
"TBL_2NDAT_LOT2"-"＄"
= "1708 (H)"-"1701 (H)"
= "7 (H)"
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
When the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)” and the value of the A register is “7 (H)”, the value of the new HL register is
"1701 (H)" + "7 (H)"
= "1708 (H)"
Becomes

The value of the HL register “1708 (H)” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table used in the next lottery without setting difference in step S1122.
The address “1708 (H)” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 in FIG. 97 (c).
Thus, in step S1121, a two-stage lottery table is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1122.

When proceeding to step S1122, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery without setting difference (FIG. 101). When the lottery without setting difference ends, the process proceeds to the next step S1123.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the winning value in the lottery without setting difference as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1123, the A register stores the winning value in the lottery without setting difference.
Then, in step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 as an advantageous section number. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, advantages of calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table using the two-stage lottery address table include the following.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 (b) to (f), the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 each store (store) 3-byte data.
Therefore, the head address (“1705 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 1 and the head address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 are three bytes apart.

Similarly, the head address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 and the head address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 are three bytes apart.
The head address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 and the head address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 are three bytes apart.
Further, the head address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 and the head address (“1711 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 5 are three bytes apart.

In such a case, for example, "@ 72_H" which is a value obtained by tripled "@NB_TRNS_AT"("26(H)") from the head address ("1705 (H)") of the two-stage lottery table 1. )) To calculate “1693 (H)”, and store this in the HL register as a reference address. The reason why "@NB_TRNS_AT" is tripled is that the data stored in each two-stage lottery table is 3 bytes. When N-byte data is stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, "@NB_TRNS_AT" is multiplied by N.
Then, the address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is calculated (designated) by adding a value obtained by multiplying the winning number data stored in the A register by three times to the reference address. Can also. When N-byte data is stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the winning number by N is added.

That is, the calculation result of “1705 (H)” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” × 3 is stored in the HL register as a reference address.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“1705 (H)” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” × 3
= "1705 (H)"-"26 (H)" x 3
= "1693 (H)"
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “39”.
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1693 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16 BA (H)" (first time)
"16BA (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16E1 (H)" (second time)
"16E1 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "1708 (H)" (the third time)
Becomes
As a result, the "address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

However, in the development stage of the slot machine 10, the contents of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 may be changed.
For example, in the two-stage lottery table 1, the winning probability of the advantageous section number "1" may be set to 0% and the winning probability of the advantageous section number "2" may be set to 100%.
In this case, in the two-stage lottery table 1, since the number of advantageous section numbers to be won is one, the intervals between the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are not three bytes at a time.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), by providing a two-stage lottery address table for designating the start address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number, the two-stage lottery can be performed in the development stage of the slot machine 10. Even if the intervals between the head addresses of the tables 1 to 5 are not equal, the head address of the two-stage lottery table can be designated, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with a specification change.

Further, the start address of the corresponding two-stage lottery table can be designated from the determined winning number without using the two-stage lottery address table.
However, in this case, in step S1121 of FIG. 100, first, it is determined whether or not the winning number is “38”, and when it is determined to be “38”, the start address of the two-stage lottery table 1 is determined. If "1705 (H)" is designated and it is determined that the number is not "38", then it is determined whether or not the winning number is "39".

When it is determined that the winning number is “39”, “1708 (H)” which is the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 is designated, and when it is determined that it is not “39”, It is determined whether or not the winning number is “40”.
Such processing is repeated until the start address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is designated.

Therefore, the processing until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated becomes longer.
Also, a program for designating the start address of the two-stage lottery table is required.
On the other hand, if the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated by using the two-stage lottery address table, the processing until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated can be shortened, and the start of the two-stage lottery table can be shortened. Since it is not necessary to define a program for specifying an address, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process without a setting difference.
The lottery without setting difference is a process of determining an advantageous section number based on the two-stage lottery table set in step S1121 of FIG.
When the process proceeds to the lottery without setting difference in step S1122, first, in step S1131, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
In the present embodiment, a counter is provided which counts the range from “0” to “255” as one cycle. Then, the main CPU 55 acquires a 1-byte random number value from this counter for lottery without setting difference, and stores it in the A register.
Note that the lower 1 byte of the 2-byte counter may be obtained as a random value.

When proceeding to the next step S1132, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores data in which the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is set to “0” in the B register. At this time, the data itself corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is data before bit 7 is set to “0”.
Here, in the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 of FIGS. 97 (b) to (f), “2 (D)” is defined as the winning data.

However, when the winning data is determined as “2”, “10000010 (B)” can be defined as the winning data.
Similarly, when the winning data is determined to be “1”, “10000001 (B)” can be defined as the winning data.
In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning data, and bit 7 indicates “winning determined data”.
The “winning confirmation data” is data indicating that the winning data is decided as a winning value.

When proceeding to the next step S1133, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not winning determination data is included.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”.
If the bit 7 is "1", it is determined that the winning determination data is included (Yes), and the process skips steps S1134 to S1138 and proceeds to step S1139. As a result, of the 8-bit data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, bits 0 to 6 (winning data) are determined as the winning value.
On the other hand, when the bit 7 is “0”, it is determined that the winning determination data is not included (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1134.

In step S1134, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the probability data.
When the process proceeds to the next step S1135, the main CPU 55 makes a determination as to whether or not it is successful.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the value of the A register, and stores the result of the subtraction in the HL register.

When proceeding to the next step S1136, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a winning has been achieved.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not carry has occurred due to the subtraction in step S1135.
Here, when a carry occurs due to the subtraction, it is determined that the winning has occurred (Yes), and the process skips steps S1137 and S1138 and proceeds to step S1139.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, it is determined that no winning has been made (No), and the flow proceeds to the next step S1137.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the winning data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register.
In the next step S1138, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning data is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

If it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1134.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1139.
In step S1139, the main CPU 55 acquires the winning data as a winning value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the A register. In this way, the winning data is stored in the A register as a winning value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, “No” is determined in step S1111 of FIG. 99. Therefore, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference (shift lottery) can be executed.
In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99; when the advantageous section number is stored), steps S1115 and S1116 are performed. Since the process skips and proceeds to step S1117, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
This makes it possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Note that when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. The only difference is that the lottery relating to the transition (two-step lottery and lottery without setting difference) is not executed.
Then, even when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”), the addition of the advantageous section (the game state during the advantageous section is the player) It is possible to execute the lottery for changing the performance so as to be advantageous to the player or including adding the number of games of the AT in the advantageous section.

In the case where the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (the advantageous section number is (When it is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. As a result, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even in this case, the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Further, as described above, when the internal lottery 1 and the winning number determined by the lottery determination are the numbers "38" to "42", the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (when “No” in step S1113 of FIG. 99; when the accessory condition device number is stored), steps S1114 to S1114 are performed. Since step S1117 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
This makes it possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (the accessory condition apparatus) When the number is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. As a result, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even in this case, the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

  In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “38” to “40”, the winning of the character condition apparatus is performed, and the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. Become. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117).

Furthermore, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning condition device and the winning condition device are overlapped, and there is no two-stage lottery and setting difference. The lottery can be executed. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117), and the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” (step S1117). Step S1118).
Thereby, in the game won in the accessory condition apparatus, it is possible to execute the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section without requiring complicated processing.

<Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the seventeenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 3 of the seventeenth embodiment, a two-stage lottery is performed, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”. The replay condition device number was stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 4 of the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. A two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number and the like in a modification of the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1052 is the same as that of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1141.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1141, the condition device number set 4 (FIG. 103) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 4.
The condition device number set 4 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 4 in step S1141, first, in step S1151, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1151 are the same as those in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1152 to S1154 and proceeds to step S1155.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1152.
In step S1151, "31" is subtracted from the value (winning number) of the A register to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1152, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1152, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1152 is the same as that in step S1112 in FIG.

  In the condition device number set 3 of FIG. 99, before storing the winning and replay condition device number in step S1119, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the A register in step S1115. For this reason, in order to prevent the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number from being lost, in step S1112, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register instead of the A register.

In step S1153, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1153 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
Then, in step S1153, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1153 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1154 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1155.

In step S1154, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number, and in the next step S1155, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1154 are the same as those in step S1074 in FIG. 92, and the specific contents of the processing in step S1155 are the same as those in step S1075 in FIG.

  Note that the winning and replay condition device number is set to “_NB_CND_NOR” when “Yes” in step S1151 and proceeds to step S1155, and when “No” in step S1151 and proceeds to step S1155 after proceeding to step S1152. Can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1156, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1156 are the same as those in step S1115 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1157 to S1116 are skipped, and the processing in this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1157.

When proceeding to step S1157, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1157 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1158 and S1116 are skipped, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the flow advances to the next step S1158.

In step S1158, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1158 are the same as those in step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is ON, step S1116 is skipped, and the processing in this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is off, the process advances to next step S1116.

When proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The contents of the two-stage lottery process in step S1116 are the same as in the seventeenth embodiment.

As described above, in the condition device number set 4, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “40”, the accessory condition device is won, and 2 The stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ If it is other than “0” (“No” in step S1153), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1154 is skipped).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning of the character condition apparatus and the winning condition apparatus is a double win, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting. The lottery can be executed.
In this case, according to the value of “_NB_CND_BNS”, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained, and then the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” ( Step S1155).

Thereafter, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (when “No” in step S1158), the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference (transition lottery) are executed (step S1116), and the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” Is "FF (H)" (when "Yes" in step S1158), the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed (step S1116 is skipped).
Thereby, in the game won in the accessory condition apparatus, it is possible to execute the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section without requiring complicated processing.

In condition device number set 4, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (“Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), Thereafter, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 4, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, in this game, It is impossible to determine whether the device has been won or whether the device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1158 before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is ON, and thus the character condition device is won in this game. It is determined whether or not the player has won the accessory condition apparatus before the previous game.
Then, when the inside inside flag is off, it is determined that the character condition apparatus has been won in the current game, and a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).

In the condition device number set 4, in step S1152, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1154, the value of the E register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1155, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1154, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1155, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.

Also, in step S1156, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and thereafter, “＠NB_TRNS_AT” (= “38”) is subtracted from the value of the A register, so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. It is determined whether or not.
As described above, in the condition device number set 4, after step S1154, the E register can be used for another process. Similarly, after step S1155, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1156, the C register can be used for other processing.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

  Also, in condition device number set 4, in step S1158, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is ON, thereby determining whether the character condition device has been won in the current game or the character condition device in the previous game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by determining whether or not the corresponding RT4 is in the inside, it is determined whether or not the character condition device has been won in the game this time, or the character condition device before the previous game. May be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the two-stage lottery and the lottery with no setting difference have been described as the shift lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. For example, at the start of the current game, “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) is stored. Even if a value other than “0” is stored, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, or the game of the AT in the advantageous section is added) (Including adding the number of times), and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the equipment condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. , A control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be executed.

Furthermore, the winning numbers “38” to “42” were treated as those for performing the transfer lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantageous section May be executed.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery for adding an advantageous section is not executed.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.
The definition of the winning numbers for the winning numbers “31” to “42” is the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion data definition is the same as the winning number conversion data definition of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (d).
Further, the winning number conversion table is the same as the winning number conversion table of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition in the present embodiment.
The winning number identifier, the repetition number identifier, the identifier for each set value, the 2-byte data identifier, the 1-byte data identifier, and the determination end identifier are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
“Advantage section number 1 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the winning section 1 has been won (determined to shift).

The “advantage section number 2 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the winning section 2 has been won (determined to shift).
The advantageous section number 1 identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are collectively referred to as “advantage section number identifier”.
"Advantage section number mask data" is data for masking (to "0") bit data (bit 3 to bit 7) corresponding to an identifier other than the advantage section number identifier.

Then, “$ LT_AT1 EQU 00000001B; advantageous section number 1 identifier” means that “$ LT_AT1” indicates “advantage section number 1 identifier”, and that data corresponding to “$ LT_AT1” is “00000001 (B)”. Means
In addition, “$ LT_AT2 EQU 00000010B; advantageous section number 2 identifier” means that “$ LT_AT2” indicates “advantage section number 2 identifier”, and that data corresponding to “$ LT_AT2” is “00000010 (B)”. Means
Furthermore, “@MSK_AT EQU 00000111B; advantageous section number mask data” indicates that “@MSK_AT” indicates “advantageous section number mask data”, and data corresponding to “@MSK_AT” is “00000111 (B)”. Means that.

FIG. 105 to FIG. 108 are diagrams illustrating an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 105 is a view showing the all RT common lottery table (8). FIG. 106 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (9), which is a view following FIG. 105. FIG. 107 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (10), which is a view following FIG. 106. FIG. 108 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (11), which is a view following FIG. 107.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Here, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier ;; + advantage section number 1 identifier" in FIG. 106 is data obtained by performing an OR operation on "@LT_BYT" and "@ LT_AT1". This is stored in the second row of “1BBA condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 104A, “$ LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), “$ LT_AT1” indicates an advantageous section number 1 identifier, and its value is “00000001 (B)”.

Further, when "@LT_BYT" and "@ LT_AT1" are OR-operated,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00000001 (B): @ LT_AT1
00000010 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1" indicates that "000010001 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
The comment "; 1 byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier" indicates that the data includes a 1 byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier.

Further, when AND operation is performed on “000000101 (B)” and “@MSK_AT”,
00001001 (B): LT_BYT OR LT_AT1
00000111 (B): @MSK_AT
00000001 (B): Data after AND operation.
As a result, “00000001 (B)” = “$ LT_AT1” (advantage section number 1 identifier) can be obtained.

When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 2-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

In addition, the decision to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference. That is, the probability of shifting to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must not differ depending on the set value.
Therefore, one 8-bit data including the set value-specific identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.
Similarly, one 8-bit data including the set value-specific identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.

"1BBA condition device lottery data" is defined in the all RT common lottery table (8) of FIG. 105, and "1BBA condition device lottery data" is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (9) of FIG. In addition, "1BBA condition device lottery data" is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (10) of FIG.
Here, when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. In this case, if it is determined that the winning is determined in the winning / rejecting determination, the winning number is determined to be “38”, but since the advantageous section number identifier is not determined, the winning is not performed in the advantageous section.

Also, when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. If it is determined at this time that the winning is determined, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is determined.
Further, when the “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. If it is determined at this time that the winning is determined, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 2 is won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the all-RT common lottery table associates the winning number data “38” with the probability data “10” and does not associate the advantageous section number identifier with the 1BBA condition device lottery data ( 105), 1BBA condition apparatus lottery data (FIG. 106) in which the winning number data “38”, the probability data “10”, and the advantageous section number 1 identifier are associated, the winning number data “38”, and the probability data “10”. And the 1BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 107) in which the identifier is associated with the advantageous section number 2 identifier.
That is, a plurality of pieces of probability data are defined corresponding to one piece of winning number data. Then, among the plurality of pieces of probability data corresponding to one winning number data, one piece of probability data is associated with data indicating that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is performed. The probability data is not associated with data indicating that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed.

For this reason, as described above, even if the winning number is determined to be the same “38” (the single BBA condition device is independently won), when the winning section is not won and the winning section 1 There is a time when a win is made and a time when a win is made in the advantageous section 2.
“1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, “Small win D condition device lottery data”, and “Small win E1 condition device lottery data” also include “ 1BBA condition device lottery data ".

In FIG. 105, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand E1 condition device lottery data”, “small hand D condition device lottery data”, And "Small win E1 condition device lottery data", a set of non-winning data in an advantageous section is defined.
Further, in FIG. 106, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand E1 condition device lottery data”, “small hand D condition device lottery data” , And "Small Winner E1 Conditional Device Lottery Data", those that win in the advantageous section 1 are defined as a group.

Further, in FIG. 107, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small win E1 condition device lottery data”, “small win D condition device lottery data”, In addition, with respect to “small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a set of winning data in the advantageous section 2 is defined as a group.
As described above, “a group of lottery data that is not won in the advantageous section” → “a group of lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 1” → “a group of lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 2”. By defining data in the lottery table, it is only necessary to determine the winning number data in "1BBA condition device lottery data", so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

Specifically, the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” in the present embodiment are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
In other words, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA single winning” is “38”, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA + small win D overlapping winning” is “39”, and corresponds to “1BBA + small winning E1 overlapping winning”. The winning number is “40”, the winning number corresponding to “Small win D alone win” is “41”, and the win number corresponding to “Small win E1 single win” is “42”.

As described above, the corresponding winning numbers are consecutive from “1BBA single winning” to “small win E1 single winning”.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 105, if “$ BBA” (= “38”) is determined as the winning number data for “1 BBA condition device lottery data”, “1 BBA + small role D condition device lottery data” As for “data”, a value (“39”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“38”) of “1BBA condition device lottery data” can be used as winning number data.

Similarly, as for “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“39”) of “1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data” (“ 40 ") can be the winning number data.
In addition, as for “Small win D condition device lottery data”, a value (“41”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“40”) of “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data” ) Can be the winning number data.
Furthermore, as for “Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a value (“42”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“41”) of “Small win D condition device lottery data” Can be the winning number data.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if the winning number data is determined only for “1 BBA condition device lottery data”, “1 BBA + small win D condition device lottery data” and “1 BBA + small win E1 condition device lottery data” With regard to "data", "small win D condition device lottery data", and "small win E1 condition device lottery data", it is not necessary to determine the winning number data. Can be.
The “1BBA condition device lottery data” from “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 and the “1BBA condition device lottery data” from FIG. 107 “1BBA condition device lottery data” are also shown in FIG. 105 is the same as the “1BBA condition device lottery data” to “small win E1 condition device lottery data”.

In addition, for example, “1BBA condition device lottery data that is not won in the advantageous section” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 1” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 2” ", Data may be set in the lottery table.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

Specifically, for example,
; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1 byte data identifier DEFB 10; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of "1BBA condition device lottery data" can be continuously determined.

Then, for example,
1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
; Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 5; Probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 2; probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 3; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of “1BBA + small winning combination D condition device lottery data” can be continuously determined.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the eighteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1201.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1201, the advantageous section number is acquired (FIG. 110), and the process proceeds to step S1202.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1202, the condition device number set 5 (FIG. 111) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the player operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous section number acquisition process.
The advantageous section number acquisition is processing for acquiring an advantageous section number from data defined in the lottery table.
When the process proceeds to the advantageous section number acquisition in step S1201, first in step S1211, the main CPU 55 acquires data corresponding to the winning number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the data on the lottery table used in the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87) and the lottery determination (FIG. 88).

For example, it is assumed that when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, it is determined that the winning is determined in the win / fail determination. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT” is stored in the HL register.
In addition, it is assumed that when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, it is determined that the winning is determined in the win / fail determination. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR OR LT_AT1”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that a win is determined in the win / fail determination when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2”.
Further, it is assumed that the process proceeds to “judgment end” in FIG. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END”.

Then, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the B register.
For example, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT” in FIG. 105 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYT” = “00001000 (B)” is stored in the B register.
When the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1” in FIG. 106 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1” = “00001001 (B)” is stored in the B register. .

Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2” in FIG. 107 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2” = “0000001010 (B)” is stored in the B register. I do.
Further, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END” in FIG. 108 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_END” = “00 (H)” is stored in the B register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1212.

In step S1212, the main CPU 55 generates an advantageous section number from the acquired data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 performs an AND operation on the data in the B register and “$ MSK_AT” (advantage section number mask data = “00000111 (B)”), and transfers the obtained data to a new B register. Data.

For example, when the data in the B register is “00001000 (B)”, “00000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00001000 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “0000000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
When the data of the B register is “000000101 (B)”, “00000001 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “000000101 (B)” and “000000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000001 (B)” (= “＠ LT_AT1”: advantageous section number 1) is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift).

  Furthermore, when the data of the B register is “0000001010 (B)”, “00000010 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “0000001010 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000010 (B)” (= “$ LT_AT2”: advantageous section number 2) is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning is made to the advantageous section 2 (determined to shift).

Further, when the data of the B register is “00 (H)”, “00000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00 (H)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “0000000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In the present embodiment, when the winning number is determined to be any of the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination, the advantageous section number acquisition of FIG. 110 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1212, and the advantageous section number is generated. , Stored in the B register.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing of condition device number set 5.
Upon proceeding to condition device number set 5 in step S1202, first in step S1221, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1221 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1222 to S1226 and proceeds to step S1227.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1222.
In step S1221, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the value is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1222, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 in FIG. 99, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1222, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1222 is the same as that in step S1112 in FIG.

In step S1223, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game is Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.

The specific processing in step S1223 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1224.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), the process skips steps S1224 to S1226 and proceeds to step S1227.

In step S1224, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in a normal section.
When “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and when “1” is stored, the current game is in the advantageous section 1 When it is determined that the game is a game and “2” is stored, it is determined that the current game is a game in the advantageous section 2.

The specific processing in step S1224 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1225.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), step S1225 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1226.

When proceeding to step S1225, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S125, the value indicating the advantageous section number is stored in the B register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.

In step S1226, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1227, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1221 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1221 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1222, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1227 after step S1222, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1227, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

In this manner, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1221 and proceeds to step S1227, and when “No” in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227 after step S1222. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
In a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is written in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (4) in FIG. 112 (a) shows the winning number definition for the winning numbers “31” to “36”.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 112 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “36”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” and “35” correspond to the single winning of the accessory condition device, and the winning numbers “32” to “34”. The numbers “36” and “36” correspond to overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device.

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing winning number conversion and advantageous section shift determination data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 112 (c), “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1 EQU 167 + ＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section 1 shift determination random number” corresponds to “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” indicating “advantage section 1 shift determination random number” and “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1”. Means that the value to be performed is “167 + ＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2”.
Also, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
Therefore, “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” = “167 + 178” = “345”.

As shown in FIG. 112 (d), "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2 EQU 178; random number for judging to shift to advantageous section 2" is that "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" indicates "random number for judging to shift to advantageous section 2", and a value corresponding to "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" Is “178”. That is, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
The advantageous section 1 shift determination random number and the advantageous section 2 shift determination random number are collectively referred to as “advantageous section shift determination random numbers”.

FIG. 113 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are "31" to "36", the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

  As shown in FIG. 113B, “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, 0; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)) and stores address ## 1 (Eg, address 1601 (H)) means that “0” is stored. As shown in FIG. 112B, “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "0" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address ### 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ### 1 (address 1601 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address #### and the address #### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, @NB_WIN_D; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” in address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and stores address #### 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)) means that "@NB_WIN_D" is stored. As shown in FIG. 112B, “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 74, “@NB_WIN_D” = “26”. Therefore, "2" is stored in address #### 2, and "26" is stored in address #### 3.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 26: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address #### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 114, FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 are diagrams illustrating an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the all-RT common lottery table (12). FIG. 115 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (13), which is a view following FIG. 114. FIG. 116 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (14), which is a view following FIG. 115.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 117A is a diagram illustrating an advantageous section shift determination random number table.
The advantageous section shift determination random number table is used in an advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121 described later, and defines “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” as a criterion for determining that the winning section 2 has won (determined to shift). At the same time, "@ LOT_TRNS_AT1" is defined as a criterion when it is determined that the winning in the advantageous section 1 is won.
If the random number value obtained from the random number generation means (counter) is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178”), it is determined that the advantageous section 2 has been won, and “ΔLOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345”) When it is smaller, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 is won.

Here, "DEFW" means "in an assembly language, two 1-byte (8-bit) areas are secured in memory in order of address, the lower one byte of 2-byte data is stored in the previous address, and the subsequent address is stored. Is stored in the upper byte of 2-byte data. "
As shown in FIG. 117 (c), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section number 2” is obtained by setting “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178 (D)” = “178 (D)” at address ## 0 (eg, address 1700 (H)). 00B2 (H) ”), and stores“ B2 (H) ”, which is the lower 1 byte, and stores“ 00 (H), which is the upper 1 byte of “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” at address ## 1 (eg, address 1701 (H)). )).

  As shown in FIG. 117 (d), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT1; advantageous section number 1” is obtained by adding “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345 (D)” = “345 (D)” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1702 (H)). 0159 (H) ”, which is the lower 1 byte, and stores“ 01 (H) ”as the upper 1 byte of“ @ LOT_TRNS_AT1 ”at address ## 3 (eg, address 1703 (H)). )).

That is,
Address #### (address 1700 (H)) B2 (H): lower one byte Address #### (address 1701 (H)) 00 (H): upper one byte Address #### 2 (1702 (H) Address) 59 (H): Lower 1 byte Address #### 3 (Address 1703 (H)) 01 (H): Upper 1 byte.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the blocker 45 is controlled in step S1003 so that the insertion of medals is not permitted, the process proceeds to step S1301.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1301, internal lottery 2 (FIG. 119) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1302.
Further, when the flow proceeds to step S1302, the condition device number set 6 (FIG. 120) is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the player operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 2 process.
When the process proceeds to the internal lottery 2 in step S1301, first in step S1311, the main CPU 55 stores a random number value in “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer).
Here, “_BF_RAND” is a 2-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a random number value.
Then, when proceeding to step S1301, the main CPU 55 first stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the HL register, and then stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the storage area “_BF_RAND” of the RWM 53. "Is stored. As a result, the random number value is stored in the random number buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1312.

When proceeding to step S1312, the main CPU 55 stores a random value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1313.
In step S1313, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (at the time of 1BBA operation, 1BBB operation, or when the accessory is not operating).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1313 are the same as those in step S1012 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1314.

When proceeding to step S1314, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Further, the specific content of the process in step S1314 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1315 to S1317 and proceeds to step S1318.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1315.

In step S1315, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1316.
When proceeding to step S1316, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win has been made in the lottery determination.

The specific processing in step S1316 is the same as that in step S1015 in FIG.
If it is determined that the lottery has been won (Yes), steps S1317 and S1318 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the lottery determination that no winning has been made (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1317.

In step S1317, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4).
The specific processing in step S1317 is the same as that in step S1016 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1318.
In step S1318, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313 or S1317. Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1313, and when the accessory is not activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1317. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 6.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 6 in step S1302, first in step S1321, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1321 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips step S1322 and proceeds to step S1323.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1322.
In step S1321, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1322, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1322 are the same as those in step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1323.

In step S1323, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
The specific processing in step S1323 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1324-S1327 and proceeds to step S1328.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1324.

In step S1324, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1324 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1324 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and the process proceeds to next step S1325. .
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1324 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game inside the bonus, and step S1325 is performed. The process skips steps S1327 to S1328.

In step S1325, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in a normal section.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1325 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.

Then, in step S1325, when it is determined that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and the flow proceeds to the next step S1326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1325 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game in an advantageous section, and the process proceeds to step S1326. Skip to step S1327.

When proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section shift lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1327.
In step S1327, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1327, the value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1328.

In step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, in step S1321, “Yes” is reached, and when skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1321 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. For this reason, “Yes” is determined in step S1321, and when skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1321, the result is "No", and when the process proceeds to step S1322, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, the result of step S1321 is “No”, and when the process proceeds to step S1328 via step S1322, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, when the process proceeds to step S1328, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
In this manner, a prize is obtained when “Yes” is obtained in step S1321 and the process proceeds to step S1328, skipping step S1322, or when “No” is obtained in step S1321 and the process proceeds to step S1328 via step S1322. In addition, the process of storing the replay condition device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous section shift lottery process.
In the advantageous section shift lottery, the random number value obtained from the random number generation means (counter), “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantage section 1 shift determination random number) and “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantage section) determined in the advantageous section shift determination random number table are used. This is a process of determining whether to shift to the advantageous section 1, to shift to the advantageous section 2, or not to shift to the advantageous section based on (2 shift determination random number).

When the process proceeds to the advantageous section shift lottery in step S1326, first, in step S1331, the main CPU 55 sets an initial value of the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the B register as an initial value of the number of determinations. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1332.
In step S1332, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the advantageous section shift determination random number.

Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of “TBL_AT_RAND” (advantageous section shift determination random number table) in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1333.
In step S1333, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1333, the storage area “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer) of the RWM 53 stores the random number value obtained from the random number generating means (counter). Then, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in “_BF_RAND” in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1334.

In step S1334, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the obtained random number value is smaller than the advantageous section shift determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data (advantageous section shift determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the data (random number value) of the DE register, and determines whether the carry has occurred by the subtraction. I do.

Here, when it is determined that carry has occurred by the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is smaller than the advantageous section shift determination random number (Yes), and the process skips steps S1335 to S1337 and proceeds to step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the carry has not occurred due to the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is equal to or more than the advantageous section shift determination random number (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1335.
In step S1334, it is determined whether or not carry has occurred by subtracting data (advantageous section shift determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the data (random number value) of the DE register. However, the data in the DE register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the data of the DE register indicates the “random number value”.

In step S1335, the main CPU 55 updates the address of the random number for determining an advantageous section shift.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, “2” is added to the value of the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1336.
In step S1336, the main CPU 55 updates the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1337.

In step S1137, main CPU 55 determines whether or not to terminate the determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
If it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1334.
Thus, the first time, the advantageous section 2 shift determination random number is subtracted from the random number value to determine whether a carry has occurred. The second time, the advantageous section 1 shift determination random number is subtracted from the random number value, and the carry It will be determined whether or not this has occurred.

In step S1338, the main CPU 55 stores the number of determinations as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is actuated (“No” in step S1323 of FIG. 120)) and not inside (“Yes” in step S1324). ) And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325)), an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).

In the advantageous section shift lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantage section 2 shift determination random number = “178”), it is determined to win (shift to the advantageous section 2). ).
That is, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, the winning is given to the advantageous section 2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is summed up from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 2 lottery data”. Then, “30” + “125” + “10” + “3” + “10” = “178”.
For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, as shown in FIG. The single winning of the role E1 condition device, the single winning of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

In the advantageous section shift lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means is smaller than “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantage section 1 shift determination random number = “345”), it is determined to win (shift to the advantageous section 1). ).
However, as described above, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation unit belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 2.
Therefore, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, the winning is given to the advantageous section 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is summed up from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 1 lottery data”. Then, “20” + “125” + “10” + “2” + “10” = “167”.
Furthermore, the sum of “probability data” from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” becomes “178”, which is Is added to "167" to obtain "345".

  For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, as shown in FIG. The single winning of the role E1 condition device, the single winning of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

Further, the all RT common lottery table is commonly used in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. When this all RT common lottery table is used, the small hand D A single win, a single win of the small win E1 condition device, a single win of the 1BBA condition device, a double win of the 1BBA condition device and the small win D condition device, or a double win of the 1BBA condition device and the small win E1 condition device.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, although the replay condition device has non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 with different winning probabilities, the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is in the range of “0” to “344”. The condition device that wins when belonging is the same whether it is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
In a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is written in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of the nineteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the nineteenth embodiment is different from the nineteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 6 of the nineteenth embodiment, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”. And the replay condition device number are stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 7 of the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. An advantageous section transfer lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number or the like in a modification of the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1301 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment, and step S1052 is the same as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 2 is executed in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1341.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1341, the condition device number set 7 (FIG. 123) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 7.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 7 in step S1341, first in step S1351, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1351 are the same as those in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1352 to S1354 and proceeds to step S1355.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1352.
In step S1351, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting "31" from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without updating. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

When proceeding to step S1352, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1352 are the same as those in step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1323.

In step S1353, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1353 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.

In step S1354, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1354, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1355.

In step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, “Yes” is determined in step S1351, and when skipping step S1352 and proceeding to step S1355, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1351 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”. Stipulated. For this reason, “Yes” is determined in step S1351, and when skipping step S1352 and proceeding to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1351, the result is "No". When the process proceeds to step S1352, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, the result of step S1351 is “No”, and when the process proceeds to step S1355 via step S1352, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1355, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
In this manner, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355, and when “No” in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355 through step S1352. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When proceeding to step S1356, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
The specific processing in step S1356 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1357.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), steps S1357 to S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding to step S1357, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
The specific content of the process in step S1357 is the same as that in step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is off (No), the flow advances to the next step S1358.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is ON (Yes), steps S1358 and S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1358, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific content of the process in step S1358 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to an advantageous section transition lottery in FIG. 121 (FIG. 121).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), the advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. .

When proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section shift lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section shift lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Note that the content of the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S1326 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment.

Here, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are the numbers "31" to "36", the accessory condition device is won.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1354), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ If it is other than “0” (“No” in step S1353), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1354 is skipped).

In the condition device number set 7, when the accessory is in operation (the value of "_FL_ACTION" is not "0"), the internal medium flag is on (the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)"). When there is, and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is not “0”), the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed (step S1326 is skipped).
When the accessory is not operating (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”), the inside flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), and the advantageous section number is When it is “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”), an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).
This makes it possible to execute the processing relating to the advantageous section shift lottery without requiring complicated processing.

In the condition device number set 7, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination is “31” to “36”, which is the winning of the accessory condition device, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” Is "0" (when "Yes" in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and thereafter, an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (step S1326).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 7, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before executing the advantageous section shift lottery, the player has won the character condition device in this game. It is not possible to judge whether the game has been won or before the game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1357 before executing the advantageous section shift lottery, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is turned on to determine whether or not the character condition device has been won in the current game, or It is determined whether or not the character condition apparatus has been won before the game.
Then, when the inside medium flag is off, it is determined that the character condition apparatus has been won in the current game, and an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (step S1326).

  In the condition device number set 7, in step S1352, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1354, the value of the C register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1355, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1354, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1355, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.
Therefore, in condition device number set 7, the C register can be used for other processing after step S1354, and the A register can be used for other processing after step S1355. it can.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

Also, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1357, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is turned on to determine whether the character condition device has been won in the current game or the character condition device has been won before the previous game. It was decided whether or not.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in step S1357, by determining whether or not the corresponding RT4 is inside, it is determined whether or not the character condition device has been won in the current game, or to the character condition device before the previous game. You may judge whether or not you have won.

Furthermore, in condition device number set 7, the accessory is inactive ("No" in step S1356), the inside medium flag is off ("No" in step S1357), and the advantageous section number is "0". ("Yes" in step S1358), the advantageous section shift lottery was executed (step S1326).
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is operating, when the inside inside flag is on, and when the advantageous section number is not “0”, the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed. In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained) by skipping step S1338 in FIG. 121.

As described above, the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, two types of advantageous sections 1 and 2 are provided as advantageous sections. In the normal section, it is determined whether to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state is shifted to the gaseous game state having no right to shift to ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, the gaming state (ART of ART) capable of shifting to ART is changed. After a sign), he moved to ART. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, only one type of the advantageous section may be used, and in the normal section, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined.
Then, when winning (determining to shift) to an advantageous section, the game may be uniformly shifted to an advantageous section of 1500 games, which is the upper limit.
In this case, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is, for example, “00000000 (B)” in a normal section and “00000001 (B)” in an advantageous section. This makes it possible to manage the normal section or the advantageous section with 1-bit data.

Further, in the game of the advantageous section, a condition for falling into the normal section (for example, that the number of executed games of the ART has reached a specific value, that the player has won the falling lottery, that the predetermined number of games has been executed, etc.) is satisfied. At that time, the process may shift to the normal section.
Further, for example, three types of the advantageous sections 1 to 3 may be provided as the advantageous sections, and it may be determined which of the advantageous sections 1 to 3 is to be shifted in the normal section. And if it wins in the advantageous section 1, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 500 games, if it is won in the advantageous section 2, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 1000 games, and if it is won in the advantageous section 3, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 1500 games. Is also good.

(2) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the ART is executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is determined, the number of games that can execute the ART during the advantageous section is increased uniformly or by lottery. May be.

Further, for example, in a case where a gasse game (a game state in which the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit but the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit) is being executed during the advantageous zone, the winning corresponding to the addition of the advantageous zone is performed. When the number is determined, the right to shift to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

(3) In the normal section, when the winner is won (determined to shift) to the advantageous section, the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section, or the next game may be shifted to the standby section, and thereafter, the standby section May be shifted to an advantageous section.
In other words, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, “winning in the advantageous section” is not limited to shifting from the next game to the advantageous section, but shifting from the next game to the standby section, and then starting from the standby section. This is a concept including shifting to an advantageous section.
In addition, when shifting from the normal section to the standby section, information indicating that the section is the standby section is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, information indicating that the section is the advantageous section is stored. May be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

(4) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is operating, and when “0”, the accessory is not operating. That was shown.
Also, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that no winning condition device has been won, and when the value is other than “0”, it indicates that the winning condition device has been won.
Furthermore, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that no winning has been made to the advantageous section (determined to shift), and when “1”, it indicates that the winning has been made to the advantageous section 1. , "2" indicates that the winning section 2 has been won.

Further, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.
However, when the accessory is activated or when the accessory is not activated, the value is not limited to being indicated by the value “1” / “0” of the bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION”, and can be set as appropriate.
Similarly, the winning / non-winning of the accessory condition device, the winning / non-winning of the advantageous section, and the ON / OFF of the inside flag can be appropriately set without being limited to the above-described embodiment.

(5) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, a one-byte storage area on the RWM 53 is reserved as “_NB_CND_AT”. However, the storage area for storing the advantageous section number is not limited to the one-byte storage area.
As described above, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section only with one type of the advantageous section. In this case, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the one-byte storage area on the RWM 53 can be used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number. In other words, the 1-bit storage area may be a storage area for storing an advantageous section number or information indicating that the current game section is an advantageous section.

Similarly, “_NB_CND_BNS” is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
For example, in a 1-byte storage area on RWM 53, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) is used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number, and a predetermined bit (for example, bit 1) is stored for storing an accessory condition device number. It can be an area.
Thus, the usage of the RWM 53 by the program can be reduced.

  (6) In the sixteenth embodiment, when it is determined in step S1043 in FIG. 89 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, and “_NB_CND_BNS” is skipped. And the value of “_NB_CND_AT” was maintained. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" and "00000001 (B)" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", "00000001 (B)" is overwritten in "_NB_CND_BNS", and The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained by overwriting “_NB_CND_AT” with “00000001 (B)”.
As described above, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained, the same value is overwritten, not only when the value is maintained by skipping (not updating). May be maintained.

  (7) In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a). In the seventeenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a). Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 112 (a). These have the following regularities, and thus have the following effects.

  A. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for the winning numbers less than “31”, the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to be the same, and “1” to “1” are set. No. 30 "is determined to be continuous.

In this manner, by determining that the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are the same for the winning numbers smaller than the specific value (for example, “31”), the winning determined by the lottery determination is determined. When it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination can be set as a “winning and replay condition device number” in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53. .
Therefore, the process of storing the “winning and replay condition device number” in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

B. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for the winning numbers less than “31”, the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined so as to match, and FIG. As shown in the drawing, the lottery result including the accessory condition device is obtained for the winning number “31” or more (the single winning of the accessory condition device, or the overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device). ).
As described above, for the winning numbers smaller than the specific value (for example, “31”), the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined so as to match with each other. It can be set so that the lottery result including the accessory condition apparatus is obtained.

In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value.
If it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination is stored as a “winning and replay condition device number” in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is equal to or more than the specific value, for example, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination is used by using the “winning number conversion table” shown in FIG. Device number "and" winning and replay condition device number ". Then, the acquired “accessory condition device number” is stored in a specific storage area (“_NB_CND_BNS”) of the RWM 53, and the obtained “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53. ).

In this way, by determining the winning number that matches the winning and replay condition device number and the winning number that is a lottery result including the accessory condition device based on the specific value, the winning number that is equal to or greater than the specific value is determined. Only the winning number conversion table needs to be determined, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.
Further, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning number requires a winning number conversion table, so that the program Can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  Further, by determining one winning number based on one random number value by a lottery determination, a lottery result that becomes a single winning of the winning and replay condition device, a lottery result that becomes a single winning of the accessory condition device, and It is possible to obtain a lottery result in which the bonus condition device and the winning and replay condition device are overlapped. Therefore, the lottery determination process (the process of determining the winning number from the random number value) can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

C. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers “34” to “42” are determined so that the processing relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed.
Further, in FIG. 75 (a), it is determined that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed for the winning numbers "43" to "52". However, when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "52" in the advantageous section, it may be determined that the processing relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed.

  In addition, the addition of the advantageous section means that the number of games in the advantageous section is added (added, increased), and when the ART is executed during the advantageous section, the number of games of the ART in the advantageous section is added (addition, addition, increase). Increase), or during an advantageous section, when performing a gassing game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, although the player does not have the right to shift to the ART), shifts to the ART during the advantageous section. This is a concept that includes

In this manner, by determining that a process related to adding an advantageous section can be executed for a winning number equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “34”), when the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or more than the predetermined value. If it is determined that there is, a process related to adding an advantageous section can be executed.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a process relating to adding an advantageous section, thereby simplifying the program. Therefore, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

D. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers “43” to “52”, it is determined that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed. ing.
Also, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous game state having no right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is changed. After that, the system moves to ART.

In this way, by determining that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be executed for the winning number equal to or more than the specified value (for example, “43”), the winning number determined in the lottery determination is determined. When it is determined that the difference is equal to or greater than the prescribed value, a process relating to a shift from the normal section to the advantageous section can be executed.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the process related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, Since the program can be simplified, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  (8) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, except for the 1BB operation, regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4), first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. 79 to 79). A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", the lottery determination is next performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.

Specifically, at the time of non-RT, the lottery determination is performed using the non-RT time lottery table (FIG. 82 (b)), and at the time of RT1, the lottery determination is performed using the RT1 time lottery table (FIG. 82 (c)). Was.
At RT2, a lottery determination is performed using the RT2 lottery table (FIG. 83A), at RT3, a lottery determination is performed using the RT3 lottery table (FIG. 83B), and at RT4, RT4 is performed. A lottery determination was made using the hour lottery table (FIG. 84 (a)).

In this regard, for example, an RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) as shown below is provided, and the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is calculated (designated) using the RT state-based lottery address table. be able to.
TBL_LOT_RTTBL:
DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-＄; lottery table at non-RT time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-＄; lottery table at RT1 DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-＄; lottery table at RT2 DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-＄;

Here, the lottery address table for each RT state can be stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50, for example.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT0” indicates the head address of the non-RT-time lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1” indicates the head address of the RT1-time lottery table.
Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2" indicates the start address of the RT2 lottery table, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3" indicates the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4" indicates the start address of the RT4 lottery table.

"@" Indicates the current address.
Therefore, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄” indicates a difference (data number, byte number) from the current address to the head address of the non-RT time lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1− ＄” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2− ＄” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT2 lottery table. .
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- −” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- −” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT4 lottery table.

Further, information on the RT state can be stored in a predetermined storage area (RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”) of RWM 53, for example.
Further, any of “0” to “4” is stored in “_NB_RT” as information on the RT state.
Specifically, “0” is stored in “_NB_RT” during non-RT, and “1” is stored in “_NB_RT” during RT1.
At RT2, “2” is stored in “_NB_RT”, at RT3, “3” is stored in “_NB_RT”, and at RT4, “4” is stored in “_NB_RT”.

The calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be performed as described below.
First, “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” is stored in the HL register. Thus, the head address of the RT state-based lottery address table is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” is stored in the A register. As a result, the value indicating the RT state is stored in the A register.

Next, the value of the A register (the value indicating the RT state) is added to the value of the HL register (the leading address of the RT state-based lottery address table) to obtain a new HL register value. Thus, the address of the “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.
Here, the “address designation data” is data stored in the RT state-based lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the head address of the non-RT time lottery table to the RT4 time lottery table. .
Specifically, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the non-RT time lottery table.

Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1− ＄” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2− ＄” is calculating (designating) the start address of the RT2 lottery table. Addressing data to be used.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-ＲＴ” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- −” is for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT4 lottery table. Data for addressing.

Next, data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register stores “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state.
Next, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Thus, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.

Here, the start address of the RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) is set to “1500 (H)”. In this case, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄; non-RT lottery table” is also “1500 (H)”.
Further, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-１; RT1 lottery table” is set to “1501 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- ＄; RT2 lottery table” is set to “1502 (H)”.
Further, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- ＄; RT3 lottery table” is set to “1503 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- ＄; RT4 lottery table” is set to “1504 (H)”.

Also, the head address of the non-RT-time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) is set to “1505 (H)”.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), since the non-RT time lottery table stores 5 bytes of data, the start address of the RT1 time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) is “1505 (H)”. + “5 (H)” = “150A (H)”.
As shown in FIG. 82 (c), 9-byte data is stored in the RT1 lottery table. Therefore, the start address of the RT2 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT2) is “150A (H)” + “9 (H)” = “1513 (H)”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83A, 9-byte data is stored in the RT2 lottery table. Therefore, the start address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3) is “1513 (H)” + “9 (H)” = “151C (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the RT3 lottery table stores 10-byte data. Therefore, the start address of the RT4 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT4) is “151C (H)” + “A (H)” = “1526 (H)”.

Hereinafter, the calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state will be described in more detail by taking RT3 as an example.
First, the head address of “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” = “1500 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” = “3 (H)” is stored in the A register.
Next, the value “3 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1500 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value “1503 (H)” of the HL register.

Next, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- −” corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is stored in the A register.
Here, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” = “151C (H)”.
When the value of the HL register is “1503 (H)”, “＄” = “1503 (H)”.
Therefore, the value stored at the address corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is “19 (H)” (= “151C (H)” − “1503 (H)”). “19 (H)” is the value of the A register.

Next, the value of the A register “19 (H)” is added to the value of the HL register “1503 (H)” to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Here, “1503 (H)” + “19 (H)” = “151C (H)”.
Therefore, the value of the new HL register is “151C (H)”.
The value “151C (H)” of the HL register indicates the head address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3).
In this manner, the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state can be calculated (designated) based on the RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) and the value of the RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”.

Note that the RT state-based lottery address table determines which of the lottery tables (non-RT-time lottery table to RT4-time lottery table) to use in accordance with the RT state. "Address designation data" for calculating (designating) the head address of the lottery table is defined.
For this reason, the RT state-based lottery address table may also be referred to as an “address designation data selection table” or an “address designation data table”.

The two-stage lottery address table of the seventeenth embodiment determines which of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is to be used, and calculates (designates) the start address of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5. "Address designation data" is defined.
For this reason, the two-stage lottery address table may also be referred to as an “address designation data selection table” or an “address designation data table” in the same manner as the RT state-specific lottery address table.

Note that, without using the RT state-based lottery address table, the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state can be specified from the value indicating the RT state.
However, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “0”. Is specified and it is determined that the value is not "0", then it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is "1".

When it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "1", "150A (H)" which is the head address of the RT1 lottery table is designated. , The value indicating the RT state is “2”.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "2", "1513 (H)" which is the head address of the RT2 lottery table is designated. Next, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “3”.

Further, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “3”, “151C (H)” which is the head address of the RT3 lottery table is designated. "1526 (H)" which is the head address of the lottery table is designated.
Since such a process is performed, the process until the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated becomes longer.
Also, a program for designating the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is required.

  On the other hand, when the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated using the RT state-based lottery address table, the processing until the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated can be shortened. In addition, since it is not necessary to define a program for designating the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(9) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, except for the 1BB operation, regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4), first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. 79 to 79). A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", the lottery determination is next performed using the lottery table according to the RT state. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, except at the time of 1BB operation, first, the lottery determination may be performed using the lottery table according to the RT state. Then, in the lottery determination using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state, if the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, then the lottery determination may be performed using the all RT common lottery table. .

(10) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game, a lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed. When a win was made (determined to shift to an advantageous section), a value other than “0” was stored in “_NB_CND_AT”. That is, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, even if a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” at the start of the current game, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, (Including adding the number of games played by the AT during the advantageous section), and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
In a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is written in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

(11) For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the lottery data on the accessory condition apparatus (1BBA, 1BBB, etc.) is set in the all RT common lottery table.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery data relating to the accessory condition apparatus may not be defined in the all-RT common lottery table, but may be determined only in the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.
More specifically, since the RT4 lottery table is a lottery table used in RT4 (inside), lottery data relating to the accessory condition device is not defined in the all RT common lottery table and the RT4 lottery table. Only the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, and the RT3 lottery table may be determined.

(12) For example, when the probability data differs for each set value, it is preferable to make the number of bytes of each probability data uniform.
For example, in the 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data of the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the probability data differs for each set value. Each of the probability data is set to one byte.
In addition, in the small combination A condition device lottery data of the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the probability data differs for each set value. Each of the probability data is set to 2 bytes.

As described above, when the probability data is different for each set value, each probability data is set to 1 byte or 2 bytes, and the 1-byte probability data and the 2-byte probability data are mixed. Not set.
As a result, the lottery determination process can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(13) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the range of “0” to “65535” is defined as one cycle, and a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds is provided. The count value of this counter is a random number value. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value obtained by calculating (for example, adding or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, another random value or a specific value) to the count value obtained from the counter may be used as the random value. Good.

(14) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the carry flag is turned on (“1”) by storing the random number value in the predetermined register and subtracting the probability data from the value of the predetermined register ( It was determined whether or not a carry occurred), and when the carry flag was turned on, it was determined that the game was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether the carry flag is turned on by storing a random value in a predetermined register and adding probability data to the value of the predetermined register. Good.

Then, when the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the winning has occurred.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is not turned on, the value obtained by adding the probability data to the value of the predetermined register is stored as a new value of the predetermined register. That is, the value of the predetermined register is updated. Thereafter, the determination whether the carry flag is turned on by adding new probability data to the updated value of the predetermined register is repeated until the carry flag is turned on.
As described above, determining whether or not a winning has been performed based on the value stored in the predetermined register and the probability data may be referred to as a comparison operation.

(15) How to Determine Winning Number, How to Determine Conditional Device Number, Correspondence between Winning Number and Conditional Device Number, Correspondence between Conditional Device Number and Conditional Device (Winning Combination) Shown in Sixteenth to Nineteenth Embodiments Relationship, type of condition device (winning combination) corresponding to the winning number, correspondence relationship between the winning number and probability data, probability data for winning (deciding to shift) to an advantageous section, winning (shifting to an advantageous section) ), And the winning number for winning (adding) to the addition of the advantageous section are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.
For example, when the player wins the 1BBA condition apparatus, the player wins (determines to shift) to the advantageous section with a 100% probability. For example, when the player wins a predetermined winning number, the player wins the advantageous section with a 100% probability. Thus, probability data and the like can be determined.

(16) In the flowcharts described in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings. If the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing is changed. Is also possible.
(17) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the lottery relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. Lottery, AT lottery, RT shift lottery) can also be applied.
(18) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the slot machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention can be applied to a ball game machine, a sealed game machine, and the like.
(19) The sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification and the like of the present application include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 36. The means for achieving this and the effects of the present invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification does not mean that the invention is initially limited to inventions 1 to 36.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded. In such a case, it is required to perform appropriate control.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to prevent giving an impression that a player can play beyond the upper limit when extending the designated game section (AT) exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 1 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (third embodiment; example 2 in FIG. 55) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition of extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
If, based on the information received from the game control means, the designated game section is extended but does not exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation, the predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section (AT remaining game after addition) Number)
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section is When determined, specific information (such as “celebration” or “congratulations”) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means,
As the predetermined information, information capable of grasping how long the designated game section has been extended is displayed (specific number of games is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision regarding the extension of the designated game section has been made, but to display information that cannot grasp the degree of extension of the designated game section. do not do)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section is extended, it exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When the extension is determined, the predetermined information relating to the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 2 Same as the first invention.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 3 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition of extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the total number of AT games is 1500 games), the designated game section is changed to the advantageous section It is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that indicates that the continuation upper limit is approaching.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, an effect indicating that the designated game section is approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section is output, so that the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. The player can be notified that he / she will not do so.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 Same as Initial Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 1 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the designated game section is extended but the advantageous section continuation upper limit is not exceeded, information on the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section is When it is determined, information on the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after addition) is not displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section is extended, it will exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 4 Same as Initial invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 4 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (third embodiment; example 4 in FIG. 55) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means displays game information (eg, "ends in 10 more games") indicating that the designated game section is not executed beyond the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section.

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means is based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section will exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section When the extension of the designated game section is determined, the game information is displayed.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT. Need to be eliminated.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the designated game section (AT, etc.) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
After the advantageous section is started, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game) is reached (for example, when “Yes” in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to determine whether to extend the designated game section,
When it is determined that the designated game section is to be extended, and the designated game section has reached the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section before the extension is determined (for example, “Yes” in step S451 of FIG. 44), It is characterized by clearing the decision on the extension.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, even if it is decided to extend the designated game section, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, the decision result relating to the extension is made. Since the game is cleared, it is possible to prevent the designated game section from exceeding the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it difficult for the designated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
After starting the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to determine whether to extend the designated game section,
An extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the designated game section,
The extension determination table,
at least,
A first extension determination table (a lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49);
A second extension determination table (lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) having a smaller expected value of the degree of extension (addition number) determined than the first extension determination table;
Until the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), the extent of extension is determined using the first extension determination table. Is reached, the degree of extension is determined using the second extension determination table.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold, the extension degree is determined using the extension determination table having a small expected value of the extension degree. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the indicated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

7. Initial Invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 7 Same as Initial invention 6.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
A role lottery means (61) for performing a role lottery,
It is possible to determine whether to extend the designated game section based on the winning combination in the lottery of the role by the role lottery means,
When the first lottery (for example, small role E1) is won in the lottery of the role by the role lottery means, the degree of extension (number of additions) to be determined is greater than when the second role (for example, small role D) is won. The expected value of
If the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), and the first role is won, the extension of the designated game section is performed based on the winning of the first role. The degree is determined (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52),
In the case where the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second role is won, the extent of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second role,
In the case where the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold, when the first role is won, the extent of the designated game section is determined in the same manner as when the second role is won (FIG. 50). ~ Step S543 in FIG. 52)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold, the extension of the designated game section is reduced so that the expected value of the determined degree of extension becomes smaller. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the indicated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
An external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, and an external signal indicating the special game is output during the special game. However, these external signals are output when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the timing of turning on / off the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to prevent the external signal indicating the designated game section and the external signal indicating the special game from being turned on / off unnaturally when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 8 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
And external signal transmitting means (70).
A special game is executed based on the winning of the special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off,
When the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section and not during the special game, the first external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57),
If the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game is completed (FIG. 57). Example 2)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
An advantageous section display device (advantage section display LED 77) for indicating an advantageous section;
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the first external signal indicating the designated game section can be turned off at a natural timing even when the special game straddles the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
An external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT. However, when the AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the problem is how to control the external signal indicating the AT. Becomes
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately control an external signal indicating the designated game section when the designated game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 9 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes an external signal transmission means (70),
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
When the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section, the predetermined external signal is turned off.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the timing when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off can be matched.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
During the AT, an external signal indicating the AT is output. However, since the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the arrival at the upper limit of the advantageous section are mixed, the external signal is output. It is necessary to prevent the timing of turning on / off from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent unnaturalness in reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, starting and ending the special game, and turning on / off the external signal indicating the designated game section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 10 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
And external signal transmitting means (70).
A special game is executed based on the winning of the special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section and not during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game is finished (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, when the special game ends, and when the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off is matched. Can be.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, there is a problem as to when to start the AT and when to end the AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable a wide range of game design by giving a feature to the start and end timings of the designated game section in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 11 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section, and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state (RT) in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (for example, RT5) and a second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the designated game section can be executed,
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (50 games have been completed) and the state is shifted to the second lottery state, both the advantageous section and the designated game section are ended. Features.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the transition to the lottery state can be used to start or end the advantageous section or the designated game section. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

12. Original Invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 Same as Initial Invention 11.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 12 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The state controlled by the game control means includes at least a first control state (a precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal),
It is possible to shift to the first control state (a precursor) on condition that it is an advantageous section,
In the first control state (AT), the designated game section starts,
In the advantageous section and the first control state (AT withdrawal period, CZ, CZ withdrawal period), when the condition for shifting to the second control state (normal) is satisfied, the state shifts to the second control state and the advantageous section ends. It is characterized by doing.
The second solution is the first solution,
In the first control state, which is the designated game section, when the condition for transition to the second control state is satisfied, the control section shifts to the second control state and ends both the advantageous section and the designated game section. .

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the transition of the control state can be used as an opportunity to start or end an advantageous section or a designated game section. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

13. Original Invention 13
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 13 Same as Initial invention 11.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 13 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
A game state (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means includes at least a first game state and a second game state,
In the first game state (RT5 and AT), an advantageous section is executed, and a designated game section can be started.
The instruction game section is started in the first game state, and when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, the game apparatus shifts to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and ends the instruction game section.

The second solution is the first solution,
When the predetermined number of games has been exhausted in the designated game section in the first game state, the game mode shifts to the second game state and ends both the advantageous section and the designated game section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the gaming state. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

14． Original invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
However, a game that ends only when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not enough to differentiate from other models.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section by making the advantageous section intermittently executable even in the advantageous section having the upper limit.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 14 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
A first solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means is a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different. )
In the indicated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the indicated game section are set. Ends both,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (the “1/32” lottery is executed).
In the normal section in the second lottery state, when a specific condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the “1/32” lottery is won), the section shifts to the advantageous section and shifts to the advantageous section. Instructed game section can be started based on
In the normal section in the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the advantageous section, but the designated game section is not started based on the shift to the advantageous section.

A second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means is a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (non-RT) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different. )
In the indicated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the indicated game section are set. Ends both,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (the “1/32” lottery is executed).
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games have been completed), the state shifts to the third lottery state,
In some cases, the state shifts to the third lottery state without passing through the second lottery state,
In the normal section of the third lottery state which has shifted without passing through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section,
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, then the designated game section can be started,
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section without passing through the second lottery state, the designated game section is not started.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the designated game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the designated game section, and thereafter, transition to the advantageous section again. Since it is possible and the designated game section can be started, it is possible to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition (in the first solving means, satisfying a specific condition in the second lottery state, in the second solving means, passing through the second lottery state) that can start the designated game section, It can be suppressed that the designated game section is more easily executed than necessary.

15. Original Invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. It has also been proposed to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, it is desired that the expectation of the player is not reduced even during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable the player to keep giving expectations even during the special game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 15 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for indicating that the section is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of special roles is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
After winning the special role, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, and the game is shifted to the special game,
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends when the special game ends (Example 1 or Example 2 in FIG. 64) or continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65). Example 3) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games with respect to continuation of an advantageous section during a special game.

The second solution is the first solution,
The continuous effect is an effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Original Invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. It has also been proposed to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, it is desired that the expectation of the player is not reduced even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable the player to keep giving the expectation even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 16 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is:
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for indicating that the section is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of special roles is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
After winning the special role, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, and the game is shifted to the special game,
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends when the special game ends and ends with a predetermined number of games (5 games) (Example 4) and when the special game continues beyond the predetermined number of games (Example) 5) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to the continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

The second solution is the first solution,
The predetermined effect is an effect that indicates whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, the player can be provided with an expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the end of the special game.

17． Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, simply starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special combination does not make it possible to demonstrate the skill of the player.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make the profit related to the advantageous section different depending on the skill of the player when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 17 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention (ninth embodiment (FIG. 67))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a specific winning (1BBA + small role E1),
The specific winning is a winning including a special role (1BBA) that carries over the winning to the next game until the symbol combination stops, and a predetermined role (small role E1) that does not carry over the winning to the next game,
The winning probability of a specific winning is the same for all set values,
In the case where it is determined that the game will be shifted to the advantageous section in the game (“N” game item) that has been specially won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the special role is carried over to the next game. In addition, the advantageous section is started from a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination that has been won has been stopped (“N + 2” game item).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the initial invention, in the first game in which it is determined to shift to the advantageous section and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the symbol corresponding to the special combination is A difference can be provided in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who stopped the combination and the player who could not stop the combination. This makes it possible to vary the profit obtained in the advantageous section depending on the skill of the player.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, the addition of the AT can be performed based on the winning of the special role having no setting difference, but the addition of the AT cannot be performed based on the winning of the special role having the setting difference. ing.
However, in this case, there is a problem that when a special combination having a setting difference is won during the AT, the player cannot be expected to add the AT to the player.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable the addition of the designated game section (AT) even when a special combination having a setting difference is won.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 18 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the tenth embodiment (FIG. 22))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
After winning the special role, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, and the game is shifted to the special game,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which at least one replaying game has a different winning probability.
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When the special game is transferred to the special game during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. age,
During the designated game section, when the state is shifted from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without shifting to the special game, the designated game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be extended when the special lottery is executed and the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state. . Thereby, regardless of whether or not the winning special combination has a setting difference, it is possible to extend the designated game section after the end of the special game. Further, it is possible to set so that the designated game section is not extended simply by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without passing through the special game.

19. Original Invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is desired to provide new playability using the instruction function operation game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to provide a new playability using the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 19 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (small role E1) is won,
The winning probability of the predetermined role is the same for all set values,
When the predetermined lottery is won in the lottery of the role by the lottery means, the next game shifts to the advantageous section,
The advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the predetermined role,
A first advantageous section (example 1 in FIG. 68) in which the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed;
A second advantageous section (example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the designated game section;
The effect control means outputs a continuous effect in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of the predetermined combination.

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means starts the continuous effect after one instruction function operation game is executed.
The third solution is the first or the second solution,
The continuous effect is an effect that indicates whether it is a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, the instruction game section is executed even if the game shifts to the advantageous section, and the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being limited to the gaming ability in which the transition to the advantageous section / no transition.

20. Original Invention 20
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 20 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit in the advantageous section. On the other hand, it is conceivable that even if the transition to the advantageous section is made, the condition device (role) having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to balance the condition for ending the advantageous section (including the upper limit) and the execution of the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 20 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 69)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (small role E1) is won,
The winning probability of the predetermined role is the same for all set values,
When the predetermined lottery is won in the lottery of the role by the role lottery means, there may be a transition from the next game to an advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when a predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the predetermined end condition is reached, the advantageous section is ended until at least one instruction function operation game is executed. Although not performed (Example 3 in FIG. 69), when there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantage is obtained without executing the instruction function operation game. End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, in the advantageous section, "execute at least one instruction function operation game", and "when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, end the advantageous section". And balance things.

21. Initial Invention 21
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 21 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit in the advantageous section. Further, it is conceivable that the special role is won during the advantageous section and the game shifts to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that point, and the player may feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during execution of the special game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 21 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (twelfth embodiment; FIG. 70)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
The effect control means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game) is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous effect is terminated, and the specific effect is terminated.
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the game is shifted to the special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is terminated, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is completed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is terminated, but the output is performed during the advantageous section until the special game is completed. Continue the specific production. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from suddenly ending in the middle of the special game, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

22. Original Invention 22
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with a plurality of lottery states in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine for shifting an RT (lottery state) in order to execute an AT is known.
In the related art, it is known that the RT shift is performed by, for example, winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that the ease of the transition of the RT may vary depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make the transition of the RT difficult to be influenced by the set value.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 22 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71) is as follows.
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2), a second lottery state (RT3), and a third lottery state (RT4) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different. Prepare,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a specific role (replay B group) is won.
When a specific combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The winning probability of the specific role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBB) for winning a special game (for example, 1BBB game) is obtained,
If the special combination is won in any of the lottery states and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination does not stop, the process proceeds to the third lottery state,
It is characterized in that the probability of winning a special role varies depending on the set value.

The second solution is the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When a special combination is won during the designated game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game,
After the end of the special game, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
The instruction game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
When the designated game section is in the third lottery state, the designated game section is not extended.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, since the winning probability of the specific combination which is the trigger for transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all the set values, the first lottery state is changed. The transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Original Invention 23
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 23 Same as Initial Invention 22.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 23 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which at least one replaying game has a different winning probability.
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a specific replay role (replay group C) is won in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, the player wins a specific replay, and when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of a specific replay in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined replay role (replay A) is won,
In the second lottery state, even if the player wins the predetermined re-game combination and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination stops, the game does not shift to the first lottery state,
In the second lottery state, the winning probability of the predetermined replaying game is different depending on a set value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, since the probability of winning a particular replaying game that triggers the transition to the lottery state is the same for all the set values, the ease of transition to the lottery state is equal to the set value. Is not affected. Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of the predetermined re-gaming combination which does not trigger the transition to the lottery state is made different according to the set value. can do.

24. Original Invention 24
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 24 Same as Initial Invention 22.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 24 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71) is as follows.
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of the plurality of setting values,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first lottery state, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role such that a first role (small role B group) having a possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition may be won,
The winning probability of the first role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role such that a second role (small role D) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition may be won.
The winning probability of the second role in the first lottery state varies depending on the set value,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a third role (small role E1) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the third role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped is D1 (9), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped is D2 (15), and the third combination is When the maximum payout when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped is D3 (two),
D2>D1> D3
Is satisfied.

The second solution is the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section,
When the third lottery is won in the lottery selection by the lottery means during the normal section, there is a possibility of shifting to the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the winning probability of the first role having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is the same for all set values, the first lottery state , The ease of transition to the second lottery state is not affected by the set value.
Further, since the winning probability of the second winning combination having the largest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be largely changed according to the set value.

25. Initial Invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, after starting the advantageous section, it is possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, it is considered necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game.
An object of the invention to be solved at first is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at an intended timing while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 25 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 72)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which at least one instruction function operation game needs to be executed in the game section.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is made,
When a predetermined condition (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied during the advantageous section, the end condition (30 games) of the previous advantageous section is changed (50 games are added),
After executing at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section and changing the end condition of the advantageous section based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the instruction function operation game is changed to 1 after the end condition is changed. The advantageous section can be ended without being executed twice (example 1 in FIG. 72),
After the transition to the advantageous section, before executing the first instruction function operation game, if the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on satisfying the predetermined condition, at least one time after the end condition is changed, Unless the instruction function operation game is executed, the advantageous section cannot be ended even if the end condition is satisfied (Example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 25 According to the initial invention, after the advantageous section is started, the end condition of the advantageous section up to that time can be changed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, even though the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied while the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is not executed at any time because the instruction function operation game is not executed at the intended timing. It is possible to suppress that it cannot be completed.

26. Original Invention 26
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 26 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to execute a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, the player may be uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to properly execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 26 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pressing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is made,
The end condition of the advantageous section includes at least two types of first end condition and second end condition,
The advantageous section of the first end condition has a larger expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section than the advantageous section of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling a freeze for temporarily stopping the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section under the second end condition (the end condition of CZ), and does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section under the first end condition (the end condition of AT). It is characterized by performing.

The second solution is the first solution,
During the freeze, a display related to the profit obtained during the advantageous section is performed.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when the freeze is executed according to the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By providing a case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

27. Original Invention 27
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 27 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed, and shifts to this advantageous section. This is related to a slot machine that determines the effect on the main control board side.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a hand on a main control board side and determines whether to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881). Reference).
Here, when the main control board determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, data and a program for performing a process related to the determination are required, and accordingly, the memory on the main control board is required. Requires capacity.
On the other hand, the memory capacity of the main control board has a certain limit.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function actuating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed, and to shift to the advantageous section, the main control board side In the slot machine determined by (1), the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section is appropriately performed within a certain memory capacity range.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 27 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small winning combination D overlap) and shifting to an advantageous section is provided,
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storing means, the value is stored in the predetermined storing means. (If “No” in step S1044 of FIG. 89, step S1045 is skipped)
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means, the value stored in the predetermined storing means can be updated. (If “Yes” in the step S1044 in FIG. 89, the process proceeds to the next step S1045 to store the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53.)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
A specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means. Is stored, the value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (if “No” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “ Even if it is "0", the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 27 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value is maintained. When a predetermined value is stored, the value can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

28. Initial Invention 28
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 28 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 28 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small winning combination D overlap) and shifting to an advantageous section is provided,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the second storing means, the value is stored in the first storing means. (If “No” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, skip steps S1044 to S1046 to maintain the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the second storing means, the value stored in the first storing means can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to step S1044. If “Yes” at this time, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the first storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the second storing means. Is stored, the value stored in the first storage means is maintained ("Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, and even if the process proceeds to step S1044, if "No" in step S1044, step S1045 is performed). Is skipped, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 28 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the first storage means The stored value is maintained, and when the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the value stored in the first storage means can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section.

29. Original Invention 29
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 29 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 29 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a special winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storing means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storing means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit is updated (after updating the value of “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045, “ _NB_CND_BNS "is updated)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small winning combination D overlap) and shifting to an advantageous section is provided,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (for example, small role D),
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storing means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storing means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit and the third storage unit is updated (after the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1045) , The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1046, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1047)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 29 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A process for updating information is executed, and thereafter, information stored in the second storage unit is updated.
Thus, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been determined.
In addition, it is possible to determine whether a special role has been won in the current game or a special role has been won before the previous game without having a flag indicating whether or not the winning information of the special role is carried over.
Therefore, the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the fixed memory capacity.

30. Initial invention 30
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 30 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 30 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a special winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over,
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage means is updated based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means being the specific winning number (when "Yes" in step S1073, In step S1074, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated),
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the second storage unit, if a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is deleted. (Step S1073 determines whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” and updates the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” in Step S1074, and then stores “0” in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in Step S1078. If so, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small winning combination D overlap) and shifting to an advantageous section is provided,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (for example, small role D),
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over;
A fourth storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage unit and the fourth storage unit is updated based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining unit being the specific winning number (“Yes” in step S1073). ), The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1074, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1075.)
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the second storage unit and the fourth storage unit, when a predetermined value is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is deleted. (Step S1073 determines whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, updates the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” in Step S1074, and updates the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” in Step S1075. If “0” is stored in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in step S1078, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079.
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storing means, the value is stored in the second storing means. The characteristic value is maintained.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 30 According to the initial invention, a process for updating information stored in the second storage means is executed based on the determination of the winning number as the specific winning number, and thereafter, When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, after executing the processing related to updating the information stored in the second storage means, the register storing the special combination winning information can be used for other processing.

31. Initial invention 31
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 31 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 31 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number)
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1114 of step S99, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so that the two-stage lottery is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number)
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery may be executed. And maintaining the value stored in the predetermined storage means.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 31 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the process proceeds to the advantageous section. Do not execute the transfer lottery to determine whether or not.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

32. Initial invention 32
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 32 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 32 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number)
A special storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special role (for example, 1BBA);
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the specific storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1113 of step S99, steps S1114 to S1116 are skipped, so that the two-stage lottery is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number)
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special role (for example, 1BBA),
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storage means, the transfer lottery may be executed. , The value stored in the first storage means is maintained.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 32 According to the initial invention, if the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, and if a value other than the specific value is stored in the specific storage means, whether to shift to the advantageous section? Do not execute the transfer lottery to determine whether or not.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number for which the transfer lottery can be executed. Can appropriately be performed.

33. Initial invention 33
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 33 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 33 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
A predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In some cases, the transfer lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40", If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116.)
After executing the process related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means (after performing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1117).
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) and the specific role (small role D) have been repeatedly won,
A predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific combination,
The transfer lottery may be executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be “39” or “40”, If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116.)
After executing the process related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the winning information of the specific combination is stored in the specific storage unit (after executing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, (In step S1117, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated, and in step S1119, the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated.)
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number and the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (step S1113 in FIG. 99). If “No”, steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery of step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by the following.

The fourth solution is the first to the third solutions,
An advantageous section information storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the shift lottery is not executed when the information on the shift to the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means (FIG. 99). If "No" in step S1114, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 33 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the transfer lottery can be executed. Then, after executing the process relating to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means.
As a result, even if there is no flag indicating whether or not the winning information of the special role has been carried over, it is determined whether the special role has been won in the current game or the special role has been won before the previous game, and the transition is performed. It can be determined whether or not to execute a lottery.
Therefore, the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the fixed memory capacity.

34. Initial invention 34
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 34 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 34 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (a modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
A second storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated (the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40". If it is, the result is “Yes” in step S1153 in FIG. 103, and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1154)
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed. (If “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) and the specific role (small role D) have been repeatedly won,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
A second storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over;
A third storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means and the third storage means is updated (the winning number is "38" to "38"). When the number is determined to be "40", "Yes" is determined in step S1153 in FIG. 103, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1154, and the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated in step S1155).
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed. (If “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when the winning information of the special role is stored in the first storing means, the information stored in the first storing means is maintained. (If “No” in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained by skipping step S1154.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 34 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. Then, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed based on the information stored in the second storage means.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number for which the transfer lottery can be executed. Can appropriately be performed.
In addition, after updating the information stored in the first storage means, the register storing the winning information of the special combination can be used for other processing.

35. Initial invention 35
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 35 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 35 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the eighteenth embodiment; FIGS. 105 to 108) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
A lottery data table (all RT common lottery table (8) in FIG. 105 to all RT common lottery table (11) in FIG. 108) used to determine the winning number;
The lottery data table is
Winning number data (for example, “$ BBA” = “38”) indicating a winning number, probability data (for example, “10”) indicating a winning probability, and advantageous section data (for example, “$ LT_AT1”) indicating that a transition to an advantageous section is to be made. )) (For example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in FIG. 106);
The second data group (for example, the 1BBA condition device lottery in FIG. 105) in which the winning number data (for example, “$ BBA” = “38”) and the probability data (for example, “10”) are associated and the advantageous section data is not associated Data) and,
The first data group and the second data group define the same winning number data.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 35 According to the initial invention, the same winning number is determined when using either the first data group or the second data group. However, when the first data group is used, Is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and when the second data group is used, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section.
Thus, by performing the lottery using one lottery data table, the winning number can be determined, and whether or not to shift to the advantageous section can be determined. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

36. Original Invention 36
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 36 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 36 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Random number generating means;
Based on the random number value obtained from the random number generation means, a lottery means for performing a lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (for example, replay A) (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Shift lottery means (advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means;
A first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning the predetermined combination in the lottery by the lottery means;
The transfer lottery means executes the transfer lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is activated ("No" in step S1323 in FIG. 120)) and not inside ("Yes" in step S1324). )) And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325), the process proceeds to step S1326 to execute an advantageous section shift lottery).
In the shift lottery, when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section (when the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 2 If the random number belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 1).
When the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, the winning combination by the combination lottery means is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number value is in the range of “0” to “344”, In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116, the condition device to be won is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of correct answer pressing) (for example, a game at the time of winning a small role group B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Random number generating means;
Based on the random number value obtained from the random number generation means, a lottery means for performing a lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (for example, replay A) (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Shift lottery means for determining whether to shift to the advantageous section based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means (advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121) and a predetermined storage means capable of storing information relating to shifting to the advantageous section. (The storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53).
A first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning the predetermined combination in the lottery by the lottery means;
The shift lottery means decides to shift to the advantageous section when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range (if the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, shifts to the advantageous section 2). Is determined, and when the random value belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 1),
When the transfer lottery is executed under the condition that the specific condition is satisfied, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (when the accessory is activated (“Yes” in step S1356 in FIG. 123). When the internal medium flag is on (when “Yes” in step S1357 in FIG. 123) and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (when “No” in step S1358 in FIG. 123), In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained by skipping step S1338 in FIG. 121). ),
When the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, the winning combination by the combination lottery means is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number value is in the range of “0” to “344”, In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116, the condition device to be won is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 36 According to the initial invention, the lottery of the combination is performed by the lottery means based on one random number value obtained from the random number generation means, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed by the transition lottery means. It is determined whether or not to make it. Then, when the shift lottery means determines to shift to the advantageous section, the same lottery is won in the first game state and the second game state by the role lottery means.
As described above, it is possible to perform the lottery of the hand using one random number value and determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, so that the advantage area can be determined within the fixed memory capacity range. It is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Payment switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board ( Main control means)
51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 role lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 pressing order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 68 RT control means 69 advantageous section control means 69a advantageous section counter 69b upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Number of stored LEDs
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

Winning number determining means capable of determining a winning number;
Winning number determining means for determining whether or not the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is less than N (N is 2 or more);
First storage means capable of storing winning information of a small role or a replay,
A second storage means capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In a situation where the winning information of the special combination is not stored in the second storage means, in the game in which the predetermined winning number less than N is determined by the winning number determining means, the predetermined winning number is determined by the winning number determining means. After determining whether or not the winning number is less than N, the determined predetermined winning number can be stored in the first storage means,
In a situation where the winning information of the special combination is not stored in the second storage means, in the game in which the winning number determining means determines a specific winning number not less than N, the winning number determining means determines that the specific winning number is N. After determining whether or not the winning number is less than the predetermined winning number , the first information and the second information can be obtained by a predetermined calculation process using the specific winning number , and the obtained first information is stored in the first storage means. Storable, and the obtained second information can be stored in the second storage means;
In a situation where the winning information of the special combination is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined arithmetic processing is not executed in the game in which the winning number less than N is determined by the winning number determining means. Machine.

Images